Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA)

SECTION 1: Name The name of this association shall be the Utah High School Activities Association, Inc. (Herein referred to in brief as this “Association” or “Activities Association”). SECTION 2: Purpose A. The Association shall develop, regulate, govern and administer a specific type of athletic competition and certain interscholastic activities. The Board of Trustees shall designate which sports and which activities shall be under the jurisdiction of the Association. B. The Association shall endeavor to: 1. Create, administer, maintain and protect the unique type of athletic competition which has existed in high schools in the State of Utah, based on genuine competition between member high schools and suited to the greatest involvement of students. It should stress participation, fairness, competitive balance and foster in the public a belief that the competitions are fair and honest. 2. Stress educational and cultural values, promote skills involved in competitive and performance activIties and foster sportsmanship, mutual respect, knowledge of the importance of teamwork and the value of community. SECTION 3: Membership A. Any Utah high school, together with their respective governing boards, shall be eligible for membership in the Association. B. The Board of Trustees shall set the requirements, terms and conditions upon which a high school may become and continue to be a member of the Association. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 13 CONSTITUTION

SECTION 1: Dues and Funds A. Dues of member schools shall be determined by the Board of Trustees. Such dues shall be paid from monies that are not State-appropriated funds. B. Each school year, the dues shall be payable on or before September 15. C. All membership dues collected shall be considered Association funds and shall be applied to payment of expenses involved in conducting the business of the Association. SECTION 2: Fees and Expenses A. The Board of Trustees is hereby authorized to levy entry fees and such other assessments upon all schools participating in any interscholastic activity as shall be adequate to meet the total expenses involved in the conduct of such activity and such proportionate share of overhead as is deemed necessary. B. The determination of additional activity fee receipts of contests, their collection and distribution shall be left to the discretion of the Board of Trustees.

(Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 24. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 171 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 1: Resolution: The resolution will be one requiring a policy judgment. The current national question will be used. Refer to www.speechanddebate.org/topics for the current topic. Section 2: Entries: An entry is comprised of two students from the same school; each debating both sides of the resolution and advancing on its own record. No substitution is permitted once the tournament has begun. Section 3: Order of Speeches: Each debater must give one and only one constructive speech, one period of questioning, one period of answering, and one rebuttal speech, in the following order: Affirmative Constructive Speech 8 minutes Negative Cross Examines Affirmative 3 minutes Negative Constructive Speech 8 minutes Affirmative Cross Examines Negative 3 minutes Affirmative Constructive Speech 8 minutes Negative Cross Examines Affirmative 3 minutes Negative Constructive Speech 8 minutes Affirmative Cross Examines Negative 3 minutes Negative Rebuttal 5 minutes Affirmative Rebuttal 5 minutes Negative Rebuttal 5 minutes Affirmative Rebuttal 5 minutes Prep time 8 minutes per team Section 4: Prompting Philosophy : Oral prompting, except time signals, either by the speaker’s colleague or by any other person while the debater has the floor, is discouraged though not prohibited and may be penalized by some judges. Debaters may, however, refer to their notes and materials and may consult with their teammate while they do not have the floor. Section 5: Use of Electronic Devices: The use of laptop computers is permitted at the National Tournament. The use of laptop computers at the qualifying tournament will be the autonomous decision of each district. Laptop use must comply with the “Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” (UHSAA follows the National Tournament rules) Section 6: Timing: Timekeepers are an option but not required. If no timekeeper is used, debaters may time for their partners or the judge may keep time. Prep time for each team is eight minutes. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 172 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 7: Sample Policy Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 173 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 8: Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) A. Judging guidelines: a. Judges should decide the round as it is debated, not on personal beliefs. b. Clash of ideas is essential to debate. c. Debaters should display solid logic and reasoning, advocate a position, utilize evidence, and communicate clear ideas. Speaker Points Rubric: 4-6 Points awarded in each area to total no less than 20 Clarity : arguments were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to the judge Delivery : presentation, style, poise, articulation/enunciation, and inflection are effective in delivering the arguments and responding to the opponent. Evidence and Logic : cites credible sources and warrants claims accordingly that is relevant and supports claim/ideas, . The nature of proof should be in the logic and the ethos of a student’s independent analysis and/or authoritative opinion. Cross Examination : Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments Overall Presentation : Behavior is ethical, respectful of topic, opponent, and judge in manners and tone.

(Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 25- 26. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Section1: Resolution: Specific resolutions for district tournaments held during certain months and the National Tournament topic are available online at www.speechanddebate.org/topics. Public Forum Debate focuses on advocacy of a position derived from the issues presented in the resolution, not a prescribed set of burdens. Section 2: Entries: An entry is comprised of two students from the same school; each debating both sides of the resolution and advancing on its own record. No substitution is permitted once the tournament has begun. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 174 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 3: Procedure and Order of Speeches: A. Prior to EVERY round and in the presence of the judge(s), a coin is tossed by one team and called by the other team. B. The team that wins the flip may choose one of two options: a. EITHER the SIDE of the topic they wish to defend (pro or con) OR the SPEAKING POSITION they wish to have (begin the debate or end the debate). b. The remaining option (SIDE OR SPEAKING POSITION) is the choice of the team that loses the flip. C Once speaking positions and sides has been determined, the debate begins (the con team may lead, depending on the coin flip results). Following the first two constructive speeches, the two debaters who have just given speeches will stand and participate in a three-minute “crossfire”. a. In “crossfire” both debaters “hold the floor.” However, the speaker who spoke first must ask the first question. After that question, either debater may question and/or answer at will. D. At the conclusion of the summary speeches, all four debaters will remain seated and participate in a three-minute “Grand Crossfire” in which all four debaters are allowed to cross-examine one another. a. The speaker who gave the first summary speech must ask the first question. The speakers from each team will continue to ask and answer questions. Teams should alternate asking and answering questions rather than allowing one team to dominate so that a balance between teams is achieved. All speakers are encouraged to participate in the Grand Crossfire.Speakers should listen respectfully to opponents’ questions and answers. First Speaker - Team A 4 minutes First Speaker - Team B 4 minutes Crossfire 3 minutes Second Speaker - Team A 4 minutes Second Speaker - Team B 4 minutes Crossfire 3 minutes Summary - First Speaker - Team A 3 minutes Summary - First Speaker - Team B 3 minutes Grand Crossfire 3 minutes Final Focus - Second Speaker - Team A 2 minutes Final Focus - Second Speaker - Team B 2 minutes Prep Time 3 minutes per team Section 4: Plans/Counterplans: In Public Forum Debate, the Association defines a plan or counterplan as a formalized, comprehensive proposal for implementation. Neither the pro or con side is permitted to offer a plan or counterplan; rather, they should offer reasoning to support a position of advocacy. Debaters may offer generalized, practical solutions. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 175 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 5: Prompting Philosophy: Oral prompting, except time signals, either by the speaker’s colleague or by any other person while the debater has the floor, is discouraged though not prohibited and may be penalized by some judges. Debaters may, however, refer to their notes and materials and may consult with their teammate while they do not have the floor and during the Grand Crossfire. Section 6: Use of Electronic Devices: The use of laptop computers is permitted at the National Tournament. The use of laptop computers at the qualifying tournament will be the autonomous decision of each district. Laptop use must comply with the “Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” (UHSAA follows the National Tournament rules) Section 7: Timing: Timekeepers are an option but not required. If no timekeeper is used, debaters may time for their partners or the judge may keep time. Prep time for each team is three minutes. Section 8: Sample Public Forum Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 176 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 9: Public Forum Judging Rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) A. Judging guidelines: a. Judges should decide the round as it is debated, not on personal beliefs. b. Debaters should advocate or reject the resolution in a manner clear to a non- specialist judge (ie: jury). Clash of ideas is essential to debate. c. Debaters should display solid logic and reasoning, advocate a position, utilize evidence, and communicate clear ideas. d. Neither pro or con is permitted to offer a plan or counterplan, defined as a formalized comprehensive proposal for implementation. Rather they should offer reasoning to support a position of advocacy. Debaters may offer generalized practical solutions as a part of examples/possibilities in supporting their position. e. Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments. f. No new arguments may be introduced in the Final Focus: however, debaters may include new evidence to support prior arguments. g. Comments: provide detailed comments (both positive feedback and constructive criticism) designed to help both the debater and the coach; for example, suggestions on improving case construction, refutation, logic, delivery, etc Speaker Points Rubric: 4-6 Points awarded in each area to total no less than 20 Clarity : arguments were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to the judge. Accordingly, a judge should only evaluate those arguments that were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to them as a judge. Delivery : presentation, style, poise, articulation/enunciation, and inflection are effective in delivering the arguments and responding to opponant. Evidence and Logic : cites credible sources and warrants claims accordingly that is relevant and supports claim/ideas, . The nature of proof should be in the logic and the ethos of a student’s independent analysis and/or authoritative opinion. Cross Examination: Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments Overall Presentation: Behavior is ethical, respectful of topic, opponent, and judge in manners and tone. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 177 SPEECH/DEBATE

(Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 30- 34. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Evidence is one of the important components of arguments in debate rounds. All debaters involved are expected to act in an ethical manner that is in accordance with the rules. In keeping with the National Speech & Debate Association Code of Honor, all participants are expected to use and interpret evidence, evidence rules, and procedures in good faith. Section 1: Responsibilities of Contestants Reading Evidence A. Evidence defined. Debaters are responsible for the validity of all evidence they introduce in the debate. Evidence includes, but is not limited to: facts, statistics, or examples attributable to a specific, identifiable, authoritative source used to support a claim. Unattributed ideas are the opinion of the student competitor and are not evidence. B. Oral source citation . In all debate events, contestants are expected to, at a minimum, orally deliver the following when introducing evidence in a debate round: primary author(s)’name (last) and year of publication. Any other information such as source, author’s qualifications, etc., may be given, but is not required. Should two or more quotations be used from the same source, the author and year must be given orally only for the first piece of evidence from that source. Subsequently, only the author’s name is required. Oral citations do not substitute for the written source citation. The full written citation must be provided if requested by an opponent or judge. C. Written source citation . To the extent provided by the original source, a written source citation must include: a. Full name of primary author and/or editor b. Publication date c. Source d. Title of article e. Date accessed for digital evidence f. Full URL, if applicable g. Author qualifications h. Page number(s) 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 181 SPEECH/DEBATE D. Paraphrasing, authoritative source versus general understanding. If paraphrasing is used in a debate, the debater will be held to the same standard of citation and accuracy as if the entire text of the evidence were read. Paraphrasing may be used to shorten or clarify one specific portion of an original source. It should not be confused with general summary of an entire book, chapter, study, etc., which may only be used for information that is widely considered to be common knowledge. Paraphrasing focuses on a single idea, while summary focuses on a general concept. For example, if a debater references a specific theory by a specific author, the debater must also be able to provide an original source as well as the specific text from the original source which is being paraphrased. If a debater were to reference social contract theory in general, that would not be an authoritative source that would require citation. However, if the debater references “John Locke’s Social Contract,” evidence would need to be available. E. Ellipses prohibited . In all debate events, the use of internal ellipsis (...) is prohibited unless it is a replication of the original document. Debaters may omit the reading of certain words; however, the text that is verbally omitted must be present in the text of what was read for opposing debaters and/ or judges to examine. The portions of the evidence read including where the debater begins and ends must be clearly marked (as outlined in 7.1.G.2.). F. Availability of evidence. 1. In all debate events, for reference, any material (evidence, cases, written citations, etc.) that is presented during the round must be made available to the opponent and/or judge during the round if requested. When requested, the original source or copy of the relevant (as outlined in 7.1.F.2.) pages of evidence read in the round must be available to the opponent in a timely fashion during the round and/ or judge at the conclusion of the round. 2. Original source(s) defined . Understanding that teams/individuals obtain their evidence in multiple ways, the original source for evidence may include, but is not limited solely to, one of the following: a. Accessing the live or displaying a copy of a web page (teams/individuals may access the internet to provide this information if requested). b. A copy of the page(s) the evidence is on, the page preceding, and the page following, or the actual printed (book, periodical, pamphlet, etc.) source. c. Copies or electronic versions of published handbooks (i.e., Baylor Briefs; Planet Debate, etc.). d. Electronic or printed versions or the webpage for a debate institute or the NDCA sponsored Open Evidence Project or similar sites. 3. Debaters, even if they have acquired the evidence other than by original research, are responsible for the content and accuracy of all evidence they present and/or read. G. Distinguishing between which parts of each piece of evidence are and are not read in a particular round. In all debate events, debaters must mark their evidence in two ways: 1. Oral delivery of each piece of evidence must be identified by a clear oral pause or by saying phrases such as “quote/unquote” or “mark the card.” The use of a phrase is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. Clear, oral pauses are left solely to the discretion of the judge. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 182 SPEECH/DEBATE 2. The written text must be marked to clearly indicate the portions read or paraphrased in the debate. See 7.2.B.3 for the penalty for failing to clearly indicate paraphrased text. In the written text the standard practices of underlining what is read, or highlighting what is read, and/or minimizing what is unread, is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. The clarity of other means of marking evidence is left to the discretion of the judge. H. Private communication prohibited. Private, personal correspondence or communication between an author and the debater is inadmissible as evidence. Section 2: Definitions of Evidence Violations A. “Distortion” exists when the textual evidence itself contains added and/or deleted word(s), which significantly alters the conclusion of the author (e.g., deleting ‘not’; adding the word ‘not’). Additionally, failure to bracket added words would be considered distortion of evidence. B. “Non-existent evidence” means one or more of the following: a. The debater citing the evidence is unable to provide the original source or copy of the relevant pages when requested by their opponent, judge, or tournament official. b. The original source provided does not contain the evidence cited. c. The evidence is paraphrased but lacks an original source to verify the accuracy of the paraphrasing. If a student paraphrases from a book, study, or any other source, the specific lines or section from which the paraphrase is taken must be highlighted or otherwise formatted for identification in the round. d. The debater is in possession of the original source, but declines to provide it to their opponent upon request in a timely fashion (as outlined in 7.4.C.). C. “Clipping” occurs when the debater claims to have read the complete text of highlighted and/or underlined evidence when, in fact, the contestant skips or omits portions of evidence. D. “Straw argument” A “straw argument” is a position or argumentative claim introduced by an author for the purpose of refuting, discrediting or characterizing it. Reliance on a straw argument occurs in a debate round when a debater asserts incorrectly that the author supports or endorses the straw argument as their own position. Note: A debater who acknowledges using a “straw argument” when verbally first read in the round, would not be misrepresenting evidence. However, if the debater fails to acknowledge the use of a “straw argument” and their opponent questions the use of such an argument, then that debater has committed an evidence violation. National Speech & Debate Association • © 2021-2022 High School Event Rules Manual 32 Section 3. Procedures for Resolving Evidence Violations A. Judges are responsible for resolving disputes between debaters regarding oral citations (7.1.B.); written source citations (7.1.C.); distinguishing between what parts of each piece of evidence are and are not read in a particular round (7.1.G.). When the judge(s) have such a dispute in the round, they must make a written note on the ballot or inform the tabulation committee of the dispute. They must do so particularly if it impacts the decision in the debate. These decisions may not be appealed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 183 SPEECH/DEBATE B. An appeal can only be made if the issue has been raised in the round with the exception of the issues listed in 7.3.C. Appeals may only be made if judge(s) have misapplied, misinterpreted, or ignored a rule. C. A formal allegation of violation of the evidence rules is permitted during the round only if the debater(s) allege a violation of 7.2.A. (distortion); 7.2.B. (nonexistent evidence); 7.2.C. (clipping). If a formal allegation of violation of these rules is made during a round, the following procedures must be followed: (see section 7.3.D. for procedures for making a formal allegation after the conclusion of the round): a. The team/individual alleging a violation must make a definitive indication that they are formally alleging a violation of an evidence rule. b. The team/individual alleging the violation of the evidence must articulate the specific violation as defined in 7.2.A.; 7.2.B. and/or 7.2.C. c. The judge should stop the round at that time to examine the evidence from both teams/individuals and render a decision about the credibility of the evidence. i. If the judge determines that the allegation is legitimate and an evidence violation has occurred, the team/individual committing the violation will be given the loss in the round. Other sanctions may apply as well as articulated in 7.3.E. . If the judge determines that the allegation is not legitimate and that there is no violation, the round will continue on as normal. Note: Teams/individuals may question the credibility and/or efficacy of the evidence without a formal allegation that requires the round to end. Teams/debaters may make in-round arguments regarding the credibility of evidence without making a formal allegation or violation of these rules. Such informal arguments about the evidence will not automatically end the round, and will be treated by the judge in the same fashion as any other argument. D. The tabulation committee is authorized to hear: (1) appeals, pursuant to 7.3.B., claiming that a judge ignored, misinterpreted or misapplied rules other than those from which no appeal is permitted pursuant to 7.3.A.; (2) appeals from a judge’s decision, pursuant to 7.3.C., on a formal in-round allegation of distortion or non-existent evidence (note: judge decisions regarding clipping may not be appealed) ; and (3) a formal allegation of distortion or nonexistent evidence that is made for the first time after conclusion of the debate. E. The procedures for making an appeal or post-round formal allegation are as follows: a. A coach or school-affiliated adult representative from the school(s) competing in the debate or a judge for the round must notify the ombuds/tournament director of intent to submit an appeal or formal post-round allegation within 20 minutes of the end of the debate round. The 20-minute time period begins once the last ballot from all rounds (if flighted, both flights) has been collected by the tabulation committee. b. The coach must submit the post-round formal allegation within 10 minutes of the formal notification of the intent to appeal. The allegation must be in writing and articulate the specific evidence violation that is being challenged. The challenged contestant and coach will then be notified. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 184 SPEECH/DEBATE c. If the ombuds/tournament director determines that the original protest has merit, the coach or school affiliated adult and contestant(s) being challenged will be given 20 minutes to provide evidence denying, or to the contrary of the claim. If such evidence cannot be offered, the challenged debater(s) will be given the loss in the round and may be subject to additional penalties. If it is determined that the allegation is not legitimate and that there is no violation, no changes will be made. d. The tournament director has the discretion of extending the time limits for these actions if circumstances do not allow a coach or school-affiliated adult to be available within the prescribed time limits. F. The committee’s decision to disqualify a student can be appealed by the coach or school affiliated adult. The following procedure should be followed: a. The appeal must be submitted in writing to the ombuds within 10 minutes of the notification to disqualify. b. The ombuds will then submit the appeal to the tournament director and committee of representatives. The committee will contact the national office referee once the written appeal has been received. Both sides will be able to provide written explanations and supporting evidence to defend their individual side. c. A decision will be rendered in a timely manner. The decision of the committee shall be final and cannot be appealed. d. If the appeal is successful and the contestant(s) may now continue in the tournament, they will be put into the appropriate bracket for pairing the debates. e. If appeals are made in rounds in which multiple judges are being used, normal procedures should be followed to ensure each judge reaches their decision as independently as possible. Judges will be instructed not to confer or discuss the charge and/or answer to the potential violation. It will be possible for one judge to determine that an evidence violation has occurred and the other judge(s) to determine no violation has occurred. The tabulation committee will record the panel’s decision in the same fashion as a normal win or loss; the outcome is thus tabulated in the same fashion as a round in which an evidence violation has not occurred. If the majority of the panel finds an evidence violation did not occur, no sanction may be applied to the team/individual charged with the violation. If the majority finds a violation has occurred, the appropriate penalties will be administered. Section.4. Penalties for Evidence Violations A. If the judge determines that an entry has violated one of the rules listed in 7.3.A. and 7.1.H. (oral citation, written citation, indication of parts of card read or not read, use of private communication), the judge may at their discretion disregard the evidence, diminish the credibility given to the evidence, take the violation into account (solely or partially) in deciding the winner of the debate, or take no action. B. If a debater(s) commits an evidence violation for “clipping” (7.2.C.), the use of a “straw argument” (7.2.D.), or the use of “ellipses” (7.1.E.), it will result in a loss for the debater(s) committing the evidence violation. The judge should award zero speaker points (if applicable), and indicate the reason for decision on the ballot. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 185 SPEECH/DEBATE C. If debater(s) commits an evidence violation of “distortion” (7.2.A.) or have used “non-existent evidence” (as defined by 7.2.B.) the offending debater(s) will lose the debate and face possible disqualification. However, if a debater(s) loses a round due to “non-existent evidence” (7.2.B.) violation during an in-round formal allegation, but can produce it after the round within 20 minutes to the tabulation committee, the committee may decide not to disqualify the entry. The loss that was recorded by the judge may not be changed. If a post-round protest is levied against a debater for not providing evidence or an original source in round (non-existent evidence), and the judge confirms they in fact did not provide the evidence in a timely fashion when requested in round, the debater(s) will lose the round. D. Evidence infractions violate the Code of Honor. Depending on the severity, an offense may result in notification of said offense to the contestant’s high school administration and face possible disqualification and other consequences. Section.5. Tournament Adjustments A. Under no circumstance will a tournament or part of a tournament be re-run because of a violation of these rules. B. In the case of a disqualification of a debater(s), all ranks and decisions of other debater(s) made prior to the start of the round being protested stand and no revision of past round ranks will take place. Penalties listed in 7.4. will be applied. C. When a round has been held between the round being protested and a final decision regarding the protest, the result of that round will be recorded as follows: a. If the protest is upheld, and a debater is disqualified, the opponent of the disqualified debater will receive a forfeit win. b. If the protest is overruled, and the protesting debater won the protested round, no revision of the result on the ballot will take place. c. If the protest is overruled, the protesting debater lost the protested round, and had no previous losses, no revision of the result on the ballot will take place. d. If the protest is overruled, the protesting debater lost the protested round, and had a previous loss, the opponent will receive a forfeit win regardless of the result on the ballot. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 186 SPEECH/DEBATE

(Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 27- 29. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Section 1: Resolution: The resolution will be one requiring a value judgment. Districts must use the current Lincoln-Douglas topic for the month in which the competition occurs. Refer to www.speechanddebate.org/topics for the current topic. Section 2: Entries: Each contestant will debate both sides. No substitution is permitted once the tournament has begun. Section 3: Order of Speeches: Affirmative Constructive 6 minutes Negative Cross Examination 3 minutes Negative Constructive 7 minutes Affirmative Cross Examination 3 minutes Affirmative Rebuttal 4 minutes Negative Rebuttal 6 minutes Affirmative Rebuttal 3 minutes Prep Time 4 minutes per debater Section 4: Timing: A timekeeper is an option but isn’t required. If no timekeeper is used, debaters may time for their opponent or the judge may keep time. Prep time for each debater is four minutes. Section 5: Use of Electronic Devices: The use of laptop computers is permitted at the National Tournament. The use of laptop computers at the qualifying tournament will be the autonomous decision of each district. Laptop use must comply with the “Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” (UHSAA follows the National Tournament rules) 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 178 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 6: Sample Lincoln Douglas Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 179 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 7: Lincoln Douglas Judging Rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) Judging guidelines: A. The resolution evaluated is a proposition of value, which concerns itself with what ought to be instead of what is. Values are ideals held by individuals, societies, governments, etc., which serve as the highest goals to be considered or achieved within the context of the resolution in question. B. Each debater has the burden to prove their side of the resolution more valid as a general principle. It is unrealistic to expect a debater to prove complete validity or invalidity of the resolution. The better debater is the one who, on the whole, proves their side of the resolution more valid as a general principle. C Students are encouraged to research topic-specific literature and applicable works of philosophy. The nature of proof should be in the logic and the ethos of a student’s independent analysis and/or authoritative opinion. D. Communication should emphasize clarity. Accordingly, a judge should only evaluate those arguments that were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to them as a judge. Throughout the debate, the competitors should display civility as well as a professional demeanor and style of delivery. E. After a case is presented, neither debater should be rewarded for presenting a speech completely unrelated to the arguments of their opponent; there must be clash concerning the major arguments in the debate. Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments. F. The judge shall disregard new arguments introduced in rebuttal. This does not include the introduction of new evidence in support of points already advanced or the refutation of arguments introduced by opponents. G. Because debaters cannot choose which side of the resolution to advocate, judges must be objective evaluators of both sides of the resolution. Evaluate the round based only on the arguments that the debaters made and not on personal opinions or on arguments you would have made. H. Comments: provide detailed comments (both positive feedback and constructive criticism) designed to help both the debater and the coach; for example, suggestions on improving case construction, refutation, logic, delivery, etc Tabroom judging rubric Speaker Points Rubric: 4-6 Points awarded in each area to total no less than 20 Clarity : arguments were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to the judge Delivery : presentation, style, poise, articulation/enunciation, and inflection are effective in delivering the arguments and responding to the opponent. Evidence and Logic : cites credible sources and warrants claims accordingly that is relevant and supports claim/ideas, . The nature of proof should be in the logic and the ethos of a student’s independent analysis and/or authoritative opinion. Cross Examination : Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments. Overall Presentation : Behavior is ethical, respectful of topic, opponent, and judge in manners and tone. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 180 SPEECH/DEBATE

Section 1: In-State Sanctioning Process All speech and debate competitions must be sanctioned by the UHSAA (see UHSAA By-Laws Article 4). In the case of virtual or online tournaments, schools still must sanction the tournament, acknowledging they are responsible for “hosting” by running Tab Room and the online platform chosen, as well as facilitating the delivery/shipment of trophies. Include “online” or “virtual” in the tournament title, and principals still will sign off as normal. Forms must be submitted to and approved by the UHSAA no less than 30 days prior to the tournament. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 148 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 2: Online Sanctioning 1. Online tournaments allow out of state schools the opportunity to attend and support Utah Tournaments; bringing diversity, increased educational opportunities, and funding as well. Therefore, any tournament hosted online by a UHSAA school, may allow out of state schools to register and still be sanctioned as long as the following criteria is met: a. The Tournament is still sanctioned through UHSAA as a virtual or Mixed virtual tournament. Out of state schools must compete online only or tournament must go through the normal out of state sanctioning process. b. The out of state School registering is an actual school sponsored team/club, verified with a letter from principal on school letter head approving their participation. c. Students competing are sanctioned by their coach who agrees in writing and agree to ensure judges and meet any financial obligations that may be incurred by attending. Section 3: Preliminary Round Start Time No preliminary round of a tournament, which is not a round robin or a Tournament of Champions qualifier, may be scheduled to start after 8:30 p.m. Section 4: Novice Participation Guidelines Participants participating in a Speech or Debate event as a novice should not have competed in more than one tournament worth of competition prior to the current season within their 9-12 educational career. Section 5: Novice Policy Guidelines Novice teams will only be allowed to run arguments from the approved argument list and corresponding evidence set. Novice policy teams will be limited to a “closed deck” of evidence files (every competitor will have the same set of cards). Novice students may rearrange the organization of evidence but may not add and/or change the content in order to produce new arguments not labeled in the evidence set, nor can they alter the fundamental intent of the argument. These limits will be enforced from the start of the season until the end of December. Novices will be allowed to run any argument or evidence in January until the end of the season. Any novice team found to be running an affirmative not on the case list will forfeit the round. “Novice teams” are strictly and universally defined as two-person policy teams wherein neither student on said team has had more than one tournament’s worth of competitive experience before the start of October of the given competitive season. The novice evidence set is established each year by the UDCA and NFHS to limit the areas of the high school debate resolution that novices will have to prepare to debate. The goal is to make the debating more manageable for novice students and to enhance the quality of each debate. Judges, coaches, and debaters should also understand that by selecting these specific argument limits, the UDCA/NFHS is not necessarily endorsing the topicality any case, nor are they commenting on the strategic value of any one position. Traditional topicality arguments can still be presented by the negative team and should be considered by the judge. Theory and kritik arguments will not be allowed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 149 SPEECH/DEBATE An executive committee of coaches will create the evidence set to be published on the Utah Debate Coaches Association website by the end of August. Section 6: Ballots Debate Ballots will not be accepted with “oral critique” only written. Every ballot must have a warranted reason for decision stating, “I vote affirmative or negative because...” Congress/Speech Ballots should give constructive feedback for each individual competing. Section 7: Contest Limitations Contest Limitations are 10 meets per individual. A. Contest: Any meet or game (this does not include practices and scrimmages) in which 4+ schools participate, judging/feedback is provided, and students earn NSDA points counts toward the contest limitation. Practice, Scrimmage, or combined learning opportunities, may not include more than 4 schools, must be online/ virtual format, and no judging or NSDA points earned. B. Tournament: Competition among four or more schools. C. The contest limitations apply from the starting date of competition until the first day of the state tournament in each classification. This applies to all levels of competition (i.e., Varsity, J.V., Sophomore, Freshman, Novice). State and qualifying region, NCFL and NSDA national qualifying tournaments do not count in the contest limitation total. D. An individual who violates the contest limit is ineligible to compete at the Region or State Tournaments.

Section 1: Timing Rules 1 min. Prep 2 min. Affirmative Constructive 2 min. Negative Constructive 3 min. Cross Examination 1 min. Affirmative Rebuttal 1 min. Negative Rebuttal Section 2: General Rules A. SpAr will begin with a coin toss. The winner of the toss will select topic or side, with the loser choosing the alternative. The contestant selecting the topic weighs three topic choices, followed by the selection of the side (Affirmative or Negative). Preparation time will begin following the selection of the topic. B. SpAr shall be classified and administered as a Debate event at Region and State tournaments, with thejudge deciding a winner at the close of each round. However, SpAr may be treated as a speech duringregular season tournaments at the discretion of a tournament director, with the judge ranking all speakersin the round as first place, second place, third place, etc. C. 4-6 Points shall be awarded in each of the following areas, totaling no less than twenty (20) and no morethan thirty (30) points: (i) Clarity: Arguments were presented in a manner that was clear and understandable to the judge; (ii) Delivery: Presentation, style, poise, articulation/enunciation, and inflection are effective in delivering the arguments and responding to the opponent; (iii) Evidence and Logic: Cites credible sources and warrants claims accordingly that is relevant and supports claim/ideas - the nature of proof should be in the logic and the ethos of a student’s independent analysis and/or authoritative opinion; (iv) Cross Examination: Cross-examination should clarify, challenge, and/or advance arguments; (v) Overall Presentation: Behavior is ethical, respectful of topic, opponent, and judge in manners and tone; D. Use of the internet is strictly prohibited during all SpAr rounds, in keeping with Chapter I, Article IV of these Speech & Debate Policies and Guidelines, E. Sources that have been memorized may be used, but are discouraged, given that SPAR is primarily a logic-based debate. F. Topics at Region and State tournaments should be socially relevant, educational, or relate to current events. However, topics at regular season tournaments may range in terms of seriousness to promote quick-thinking in a fun, engaging, and appropriate manner. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 187 SPEECH/DEBATE

Section 1: Number of Preliminary Rounds There shall be three preliminary rounds for each individual event. Section 2: Pairing Pairing should meet the following objectives. A. There should be at least five students in a section when possible. There may be no more than seven students in a section. B. The student’s speaking order should vary from round to round. C. All effort will be made to ensure that no student should be judged by the same person more than once in prelims. Section 3: Recording Results A. Contestants shall be ranked 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 in all rounds. Tied rankings are not permitted. B. Ranks must be truncated to the size of the smallest section in tabulation. C. Prelim Tie breaks are as follows: a. Cumulative ranks in preliminary rounds. b. Reciprocal ranks, which gives preference to the speaker with the greatest number of 1s, greatest number of 2s, and so on c. Drop highest and lowest rankings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 161 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 4: Final Rounds Final rounds at the state tournaments will be determined in the following manner: A. The best 6 participants or the cleanest break closest to 6 will advance to the final rounds. B. Three-judge panels shall be used in all final rounds. C. Final Tie Breaks are as follows: a. Final round results for impromptu and extemporaneous speaking will be determined with tiebreakers in the following order: i. Rank score from all rounds. ii. Rank score from final round. iii. Judge pref score from final round. iv. Reciprocals score from preliminary rounds. v. Rank score from the preliminary rounds, except the highest and lowest score. b. Final round results for Oratory, Informative, and Combined Interps will be determined with tiebreakers in the following order: i. Rank score from final round. ii. Rank score from all rounds. iii. Judge pref score from final round. iv. Reciprocals score from preliminary rounds. v. Rank score from the preliminary rounds, except the highest and lowest score. Chapter IV–Region Representative and Tournament Director Duties for State Article 1. Tournament Director Responsibilities Section 1: Before the Tournament A. Check Settings on Rules/Tiebreaks to ensure they are correct on Tabroom. (Tournament Will be created by UDCA Tourn Director) B. Work with Region reps, or on own, to secure congress judges and qualified Parliamentarians. C. Ask at least two of the region reps to help run tournament in tabroom to ensure three individuals in tabroom. D. Create and assign Regions in Tabroom E. Get tabroom licenses and paid for. Work with treasurer.to pay with UDCA Card. F. Extemp Prep Assigned and review procedure and timing for schedule. G. IF ONLINE: Make Utility rooms (separate Judge room with a liaison coach to go between--zoom recommended otherwise you will have a lot of utility rooms to go between). H. If ONLINE: Coach/Tabroom--recommend zoom with breakouts available to keep things manageable. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 162 SPEECH/DEBATE I. Double Check judges and that their availability is correct. J. Double Check Entries and numbers from the schools. K. Send judge training module instructions for certification and ensure training certification completed. Section 2: During the Tournament A. Have the Handbook and Event Rule book printed, or electronically available, ready to use as needed. B. Be in the Tabroom with staff at least 30 min before start of tournament to ensure ready to go. Review who is doing what and overall procedures. C. IF ONLINE: Trouble Shooting Tech issues: Use NSDA recommendations ---20 min to fix. Possibility, Coach could record a speech in that 20 min of trying and give to director to give to judge if all else fails. LAST RESORT FOR SPEECH! Kindness and best for students is motto. a. Debate, they get the loss if can’t figure out at that point. i. Recommend having a zoom that has breakout rooms or a google meet set up as an option for those who can’t get into campus emergency and see if that works, have another coach/region representative to be on that job. D. Event procedures: a. Individual Events: i. Set a time prior to round start for extemp prep. ii. pair all rounds in tabroom in advance of tournament. Prior to publishing, double check for any errors and adjustments for drops, changes, etc. iii. Publish and blast rounds at least 5 minutes before extemp prep is set to begin. b. Debate Events: i. Preset rounds I-II at least 30 minutes before tournament begins. ii. Publish and blast rounds at least 15 min prior to round start time. c. Congress: i. Prepanel congress houses at least 30 minutes before tournament start time. ii. Create seating charts in tabroom, print a copy of each for scorers and PO of each house. iii. Publish and blast sessions at least 15 min before round start. E. After start of rounds, ensure judges have clicked start in tabroom, are in their rooms, and that rounds are going. Replace judges and take care of problems as needed. F. While rounds are going, ensure the next rounds are ready to go. G. At conclusion of each round, Publish results to Coaches only after each round for ballot review. Remind them NOT to disclose or discuss with students. H. Hold formal, or informal, coach meetings at some point during rounds to ensure region/state reps and locations are secured for the next year, discuss rule changes or concerns, and vote for Classification Coach of the Year. I. After preliminary rounds are complete and during elimination rounds 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 163 SPEECH/DEBATE a. Complete the Sweepstakes Quartliling. Tabroom staff to print, mark and tally. Then put these out for all coaches to review and sign if agreed with, or adjust after discussion if errors are found. b. If there is conflict or need a second opinion on quartiling/sweeps...use the ombudsman. Section 3: After the Tournament A. Upload results, winning team photos, and any proposals, voting results, etc to the UHSAA/UDCA via provided online folders. B. Make a copy of the Pay Template and fill in. Share this with the treasurer and coaches to ensure payment. Coaches pay judges and treasurer pays the schools, except in case of hires by tournament directors if needed. Treasurer will then pay hires directly.

e. 4 Oratory, Impromptu, Combined Extemp B. 2A: a. 4 LD, SpAr, PF, Congress b. 4 Oratory, Impromptu, Combined Extemp, Combined Interp, Informative. C. 3-6A: a. 4 LD, CX, PF, Congress b. 4 Oratory, Impromptu, International Extemp, US Extemp, Combined Interp, Informative. D. Double Entry: Students may double enter in one speech event and one debate event, except for policy teams. In 1A, Congress is a Speech Event, while 2-6A Congress is considered a debate event. E. Proposals for changes to the UHSAA State Tournament event lineup may only be introduced and voted on once every four years Section 3: Schools to provide Judges Schools who fail to supply their allotted judges will be fined $100.00 per judge. A. Schools are required to supply the following qualified judges: a. One judge per two Debate teams b. One judge for one per six Speech entries. c. If asked to provide by tournament director, 1 Congress Judge. d. A full slate is required to bring a minimum of six judges. e. Each judge must be available for assignments one round beyond the elimination of all students from that school. Judges who miss rounds will result in a $25 fine to the school. Section 4: Judge Restrictions for Contestants Any student who knowingly allows himself or herself to be judged by any of the following individuals, without informing the meet directors, at any of the State Tournaments shall be disqualified and shall lose all sweepstakes points. A. Any judge judging for his or her school. B. A family member. C. Any alumnus from his or her school. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 153 SPEECH/DEBATE D. Any student teacher assigned to his/her school. E. Any adult who has worked for his/her school in the past two years. F. Any person who may be construed to have a bias for a participant. G. For 1A only: No judge may judge 1A participants at the State Speech-and-Debate Tournament who has graduated from a 1A high school within the past two years. Beginning the third year after graduation, a judge would be eligible. H. Any exceptions must be approved by the tournament director. When unavoidable and with all coaches involved permission, a judge may be assigned to a round with participants from his/her school. Section 6: Judge Requirements A. All judges must be graduated, and whenever possible, have some knowledge of Speech/Debate events. It is also the responsibility of judges to make a good faith effort to comply with all expectations listed in Section 4. B. Judges in the Policy debate, Public Forum, and Lincoln-Douglas rounds must adhere to the following requirements in order to receive payment from the State Forensic Tournament: a. Return ballots to the tabulation room within 15 minutes of the end of the round b. Never ask the teams which school they represent. c. Mark the speaker points on the ballot, using the rubric provided in tabroom to ensure accuracy. d. Confine all of their comments to the ballots and make no oral critiques. e. Judges no contestant twice during the four preliminary rounds, whenever possible. Section 7: Codes A. All judges and participants should be assigned a code, which will identify conflicts of interest. In no way, however, should a participant be identified according to his or her school, or have any clothing or insignia that could indicate their school affiliation. B. Teams and contestants should in no way reveal their school identities to the judges or other coaches, unless they are a tournament official. C. All code letters should be kept throughout the State Tournament. D. Teams and contestants should use both their first and last names for balloting. E. An official listing of teams and contestants and their school will be provided after the completion of the State Forensic Tournament. Section 8: Alternate Clearance All alternates participating in the state tournament must be cleared by the State Tournament Directors before the State Tournament begins. Section 9: Late Drops Schools who drop contestants on the day of the state tournament without due cause will be fined $25 for each participant dropped. Section 10: Time Limit to Appear for Rounds Contestants in each event must be in their assigned room and the round must begin within 15 minutes of the posted beginning time. A team or individual who fails to comply will forfeit that round and lose sweepstakes points. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 154 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 11: Missed Rounds A. Any participant at the State Forensic Tournament who misses a round or session of an event will not be eligible for a final rating or team sweepstakes points. B. A $25 charge may be fined. Section 12: Tab Room The state tournament director will have at least two other persons in the tab room. These people may include State Speech Committee members, classification representatives, region representatives, as well as any others appointed by the tournament director. A ballot review is required before final rounds are posted. The ombuds and state tournament director will be open to any questions and/or comments. Section 13: Ballots Only UDCA approved ballots may be used at state tournaments. Paperless ballots are allowed at state tournaments. Section 14: Ballot Review For online tabulation, Ballots will be published to coaches only following each round completion for ballot review. Paper ballots, ballots will be made available for coaches to review once entered. a. Coaches must not disclose results of win/loss, ranking, rfd or feedback to contestants in any way until after the award ceremony. Section 15: Observers Observers will be permitted in all rounds of all events, the only exception is that a Lincoln-Douglas contestant and Public Forum teams in the B Panel cannot observe the A panel and the A Panel cannot observe the B panel. Contestants and judges have the right to limit observers and in elimination rounds if room does not permit, or ask them to leave if disruptive. Flowing in rounds will be allowed for educational purposes. Observers should not be disruptive, distracting, or communicating with the contestants in any way. Section 16: Awards Awards will be given as listed in the UHSAA Yearbook.

Section 1: Resolutions A. The Policy Debate Resolution used at the State Tournament shall be the national topic/resolution for the current school year. B. The Lincoln-Douglas and Public Forum resolution used at the State Tournaments shall be the resolution designated by the National Speech & Debate Association or its successor organization for the month of March. Section 2: No Late Substitution Substitution of participants after the State Speech/Debate Tournament has begun is illegal. Violators will be disqualified. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 156 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 6: Maintenance of Pairings Policy Debate teams, Public Forum Teams, and Lincoln-Douglas contestants must debate against the teams/ individuals they are scheduled to meet and they must debate on the side of which they are scheduled. All rounds must be fully complete in order to count for sweepstakes. Section 7: Preliminary Rounds Pairing Whenever possible, pairing preliminary debate rounds for the State Forensic Tournament shall be as follows: A. Whenever possible, all efforts shall be made to ensure that No team shall meet two teams from the same Region in the first two rounds. B. Whenever possible, all efforts shall be made to ensure that teams do not meet another school from their own region in the first two rounds. C. No team will debate the same school twice in the first two rounds, except when a region with more teams must meet a region with fewer teams. D No team shall debate a team from its own school. Section 8: Rounds III, IV Pairing rounds III and IV for debate events at States Forensic Tournaments shall be as follows: A. In rounds III, IV), all measures will be used to guarantee each team or contestant a fair number of affirmative and negative rounds. B. Round III shall be power matched (based on results of the first two rounds), high-low, by placing teams or contestants with the highest speaker points against the teams or contestants with the lowest points and the same win-loss record. C. Round IV shall be power matched (based on results of the first 3 rounds), high-low, by placing teams or contestants with the highest speaker points against the teams or contestants with the lowest points and the same win-loss record. A. These brackets will be broken if: a. A team or contestant is scheduled to meet another from its own school. b. A team or contestant meets a team, which it has met previously in the preliminary rounds. c. When brackets are broken the next logical bracket shall be pulled up to fit the pairing from the middle of the lower bracket. Section 10: Debate Final Rounds A. After round IV, quarterfinals will be held unless either: a. There is a clean break that would allow a partial octo round of 4 or fewer additional debaters to debate into quarterfinals for the 7 and 8 seeds (this should be done only if there are more than 30 original contestants in the event) OR b. quarterfinals will break more than 50% of the participants in that event. If this is the case, semi-finals will be held instead. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 157 SPEECH/DEBATE B. Final Rounds at the State Forensic Tournaments shall be paired as follow: a. Teams or contestants from this point shall be ranked 1 through 8. C. The ranking of the top eight teams (or contestants) advancing will be: a. first on the basis of win-loss record; and b. second on the basis of speaker points. D. These teams will be bracketed according to the following schematic. a. The bracket is not adjusted to avoid two teams (or contestants) from the same school meeting. i. 1 seed vs. 8 seed ii. 5 seed vs. 4 seed iii. 3 seed vs. 6 seed iv. 2 seed vs. 7 seed E. Winners of the quarterfinal rounds will debate each other in a semi-final round, following the quarterfinal bracketing, regardless of preliminary records. F. Semi-final winners will debate in a final round. G. A panel of at least three judges shall be used in elimination rounds and they will receive additional payment. H. Teams choosing not to debate elimination rounds are ineligible for state tournament awards unless the elimination participants are from the same school. a. A first place will be awarded to the winner of the final round. b. The loser of the final round will be awarded second place. c. Both semi-final round losers will receive a third place award. d. If participants from the same school are scheduled to debate themselves in elimination rounds, the coach of that school may either choose to have the round run normally with a panel of judges, or they may decide which team to advance without debating. Their decision to run the round must be announced to the tab-room within 10 minutes of the round being posted If the coach decides to advance a team without debating, that team must be declared to the tab-room before the end of that elimination round (i.e. they may not wait to see the outcomes of the other debates). e. If one school closes out the bracket such that no other debates can occur with different schools, those contestants will be considered co-champions.

SECTION 1: Action on Proposed Amendments A. Action on proposed amendments to the Constitution and By-Laws may be taken only in properly scheduled and noticed meetings of the Board of Trustees, and only after having been considered in at least two meetings, including the meeting in which the action is taken. B. Proposed amendments may be submitted by any governing board of a member school or any member of the Board of Trustees. C. Proposed amendments shall be submitted in writing to the Chairperson of the Board of Trustees. D. In considering proposed amendments, the Board of Trustees shall permit any member school authority or governing organization of a member school to appear and promote or oppose any proposed amendment or to counsel or advise the Board of Trustees regarding any proposed modifications. SECTION 2: Process Required for Approval and Ratification of Amendments A. A two-thirds (2/3) affirmative vote is required for Board of Trustees approval of amendments to the Constitution. A majority vote is required for Board of Trustees approval of amendments to the By-Laws. B. Amendments to the Constitution or By-Laws approved by the Board of Trustees shall be submitted within 30 days following approval to the governing boards of all member schools for ratification. If ratified by a two- thirds (2/3) vote of the governing boards of member schools, the proposed amendments shall become a valid part of the Constitution or By-Laws. Each governing board of member school(s) shall have a number of votes equal to the number of member high schools they govern. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 20 CONSTITUTION

Section 1: Quartiling All contestants (including disqualifications, drops the day of the tournament, no shows, etc.) in each category shall be ranked in order of finish. The category shall then be divided into equal fourths. Odd numbers shall be placed in the highest fourth possible (one odd number shall be added to the first quarter; two odd numbers shall add one to each of the two highest quarters, etc.). Section 2: Sweepstakes Points Points are to be scored as follows for the State Forensic Tournaments: CX and PF Other Rating Debate Events First fourth 10 5 Second fourth 6 3 Third fourth 2 1 Bottom fourth 0 0 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 155 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 3: Quartile Breaks When quartiles do not break cleanly, adjustment will be made in the direction which least skews the quartile. For example: If ten superiors are needed and the choice is between nine superiors or seventeen superiors, nine will be used since it more closely approximates the quartile. If the number is the same, regardless of direction, the greater number should be used. Section 4: Speech/Congress Event Rankings Rankings in all Individual Events shall be based on cumulative ranks in preliminary rounds. Ties shall be broken by considering reciprocal ranks which gives preference to the speaker with the greatest number of 1s, greatest number of 2s and so on. Unavoidable ties shall increase the higher quartile by the number involved and decrease the lower quartile by the same number. Section 5: Debate Event Rankings Rankings in Policy, Public Forum, Lincoln-Douglas, and Spontaneous Argumentation Debate shall be based on win- loss records in preliminary rounds. Ties shall not be broken on speaker points. Unavoidable ties shall increase the higher quartile by the number of teams involved and decrease the lower quartile by the same number. Section 6: Sweepstakes Tie Breaking Procedure (for all classifications) If two schools tie for either 1st or 2nd place sweepstakes, the following tie-breaking procedure will be followed: A. The lowest total ranking score in all events wins the tie. B. Policy, Public Forum and Lincoln-Douglas Debate will be broken with 1 for wins and 3 for loss. C. Congress will quartile by judge. D. Only ties for 1st and 2nd place sweepstakes will be broken, all other sweepstakes ties will be listed and announced as ties.

Section 1. Qualification and Entry Limits A. The top 10 in each event at region qualify to state, or 50% of the field in that event, whichever is greater. B. All schools in the region shall be rank ordered based upon sweepstakes points at the region tournament. The top 50 percent will qualify a full slate. Regions with an uneven number should round up to determine the top 50 percent. C. Full Slate is defined as: a. 1-2A: 25 participants allowed per the event limits. b. 3-6A: 30 participants allowed per event limits c. If the school exceeds the limitations, schools should list alternates in each event. Alternates will be allowed to compete only in the events they entered at region meet. D. Debate partnership alternate/substitutions: In the event of an emergency/documented medical illness a coach may substitute another qualified member of the team into that partnership prior to rounds beginning. The substitute must also have competed in that same event at region. This only applies to partnership events: Policy and Public Forum Debate. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 152 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 2: Event Entry Limits A. 1A: a. 4 LD b.

Section 1: Region Representative Each region shall elect one-member coach to represent that region to the Utah Debate Coaches Association (UDCA) to help solve problems occurring at major tournaments and to keep an open line of communication with the Activities Association. Section 2: Missed School Time It is recommended that no student miss more than five days of school for Speech and Debate practice or meets during a given school year.

Section 1: Committee Membership State Tournament committees are made up of State Tournament Director, Region Representatives, and the ombudsman. Section 2: Committee Member Duties at State Tournament A. Assist the Tournament director with Tournament/ tabroom duties. B. In case of rule violation appeal of ombuds/tournament director ruling, the committee may meet to discuss, without knowledge of school/individual, to make a decision in the spirit of what is best for the tournament and activity. C. Be available for consultation with the Tournament Director for any decisions not covered in the rules. Chapter V: Protests, Procedures, Consequences

Section 1: Entry Fees No entry fee in excess of $5.00 per student per event per day may be assessed for any meet. A maximum $25 school entry fee per day may be charged at invitational tournaments if deemed necessary by the host school. The only exception is for a Tournament of Champions qualifier or if the Executive Committee approves an exception. Section 2: No Shows A contract is formed when participant entries are submitted to the state tournament director and each “no show” entry will be fined $25. Invitational tournaments may also levy a $25 fine for each “no show” entry at UHSAA sanctioned tournaments. Schools are obligated to pay all fees unless they withdraw 72 hours prior to the tournament. Tournament Directors have discretion to override fees on a case-by-case basis.

Section 1: Events in Which Computer Use is Allowed No electronic devices will be allowed in any competition with the following exception: The use of computers within the guidelines stated in Section 2 is allowed at region and state tournaments in the following events: Extemporaneous Speaking, Lincoln-Douglas Debate, Policy Debate, Public Forum Debate, Student Congress. Section 2: General Rules A. Contestants must follow all rules regarding electronic devices and Internet access as described in the National Speech and Debate Association Unified Manual. B. Communication outside of in-round communication with partners or opponents is prohibited. C. Penalty: Contestants found to have violated these provisions will be disqualified from the tournament and will forfeit all rounds and sweepstakes points in that event. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 150 SPEECH/DEBATE Chapter II: Region Tournaments

Section 1: Region Representative Responsibility It is the responsibility of each region representative to conduct the region tournament. A. Make sure that there is a school to host the tournament, make sure that the tournament schedule is set and published, and make sure that judges have been secured. B. Make sure that each coach in the region has a copy of the handbook, times and location for the tournament, and a thorough understanding of judge expectations well in advance of the tournament start date. C. Submit results to the UHSAA office and the State Tournament Director by the deadline listed on the UHSAA calendar or within five (5) days of completion of the region tournament, whichever is sooner. D. Request and secure region awards, including the team trophy, from their region’s Board of Managers. E. Secure Congress judges. Section 2: Appeals In matters that involve appeals, the region representative should bring all unsettled matters to the UDCA Executive Committee. The UDCA Executive Committee will determine if the issue merits a UCDA Judicial Meeting or if the Region Board of Managers (principals) should address the issue. Clerical scoring errors may be corrected up to 72 hours after the conclusion of the tournament. A team must file a written protest to the UHSAA within that time period. After that time, results will stand. Section 3: Region Entries A. Region tournaments shall not allow phantom entries. Drops should be removed as soon as possible, and debaters should have as few byes as possible, regardless of entry numbers. The exception to this is that schools will not be required to compete against themselves in preliminary debate rounds. B. Students must participate at the region tournament to qualify for State. C. Partnerships count as one entry. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 151 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 4: Participant Eligibility All participants must meet UHSAA eligibility requirements. Section 5: Publication of Results Results should be published to coaches after each round but should not be made public until the tournament is completed. It is unethical for coaches or anyone else to divulge the results of a round before the tournament is completed. Section 6: Rules to Be Followed The region tournament is to follow exclusively the rules for each event, including the timing and eligibility of all materials to be used in speech areas. Rules regarding events can be found in this handbook. Section 7: Awards Awards should be given to schools or participants as determined by the Region Board of Managers. Chapter III–State Tournaments

200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200 / 110H / 300H / Shot Put / Discus / Javelin / Long Jump / High Jump / 4 x 100 / 4 x 400 / Medley / c. All tied athletes will qualify. *The next top 5 additional athletes in each event will be listed as alternates in the event of a scratch and may be called up to compete at state. Starting with the next best mark (1st alternate) and working the way down (5th alternate). After those who have hit the state standard, and those who are region champions have been accounted for, the remainder of the open slots will be filled according to the top performing individuals who did not qualify by meeting the two criteria above. Number of Participants / Number of Heats Track & Field TRI Seeding 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A Event 26 Teams 28 Teams 16 Teams 29 Teams 30 Teams 17 Teams 100 27 27 27 27 27 27 200 27 27 27 27 27 27 400 18 27 18 27 27 27 800 16 32 32 32 32 32 1600 18 27 18 27 27 27 3200 18 27 18 27 27 27 110H 18 27 18 27 27 27 300H 18 27 18 27 27 27 Shot Put 24 24 24 28 28 28 Discus 24 24 24 28 28 28 Javelin 24 24 24 28 28 28 Long Jump 24 28 28 30 30 30 High Jump 20 24 24 24 24 24 4 x 100 9 18 9 18 18 9 4 x 400 9 18 9 18 18 9 Medley 9 18 9 4 x 200 18 18 9 4 x 800 18 18 9 PV 24 Coaches must register athletes to make them eligible for open spots. Vacancies will be filled based on Sporttrax Rankings up to the listed minimums. This table defines the minimum number of participants required for each event across classifications 1A through 6A. Filling the Field: Entries for each event will be finalized using the following priority order: Region Champions: All automatic qualifiers from region meets. Qualifying Marks: Athletes who have met the established state qualifying standard. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 129 Qualifying Meet Standards/Limitations Any qualifying meet must meet the standards and regulations as outlined in the UHSAA Track & Field Qualifying Meet Standards & Regulations found on the “Forms” page of the UHSAA Web-site. An individual may participate in no more than eight (8) qualifying meets in addition to the region meet. Results Reporting Hosts of qualifying meets and region meet chairpersons must assume the responsibility of notifying coaches of accurate times. Results of all state qualifying meets, including region meets, must be submitted to the UHSAA within 48 hours of the conclusion of the meet. This is to be done using the SportTrax system. In all cases, only fully automatic times (FAT) may be submitted. All races of 200 meters or less in length must also include a legitimate anemometer reading to be valid. State Entries; Region Meet Results Region meet results (including trials and finals) are to be submitted using the SportTrax system and are due in UHSAA offices no later than 48 hours following the conclusion of the meet or by 12:00 noon the Monday before the state meet, whichever is earlier. Each individual coach is responsible for entering his/her qualified athletes in the state meet via the SportTrax system. This will not be done by the region. Deadlines for entries are included in meet information available on the Track page of the UHSAA website. Region Meets are Non-Declaratory An athlete is entered in the state meet when an official entry has been submitted by the coach and verified by the UHSAA. This means that region meets are non-declaratory. Resolution of Ties for State Qualifying Each region is responsible for breaking ties at the region meet for qualification to the state meet before forwarding entries. Regions are to include in their handbooks the procedure for breaking ties for the final qualifying spot in the region meet. Spike Requirements at BYU At the state meet only 1/4” (or shorter) Pyramid spikes may be used on the Mondo Track. No Christmas trees, pins, or needles will be allowed. Practice at State Meet Site No practice is allowed at the State Meet site (BYU Track & Field facility) within two weeks of the state meet. This means no athlete may be in the stadium area at all for two weeks prior to the facility opening on the first day of the State Meet. This includes setting up tents or shade tarps. Pole Vault The pole vault will be a team scoring event for both boys and girls in the 6A classification but non-scoring in 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A and 5A. State Records No state record shall be granted unless the time is recorded by fully automatic timing (FAT). No state record in the long jump or any race up to and including 200 meters shall be granted unless an anemometer is used and accurate wind ve- locity readings duly recorded. An average wind velocity which exceeds two (2) meters per second will invalidate a record. Completed state record application forms must be submitted to the UHSAA before a state record can be considered and become official, even if set at the state meet. For application form go to: https://www.uhsaa.org/forms/tfrecapp.pdf TRACK & FIELD 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 130 TRACK & FIELD Event 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A 100 M. Dash 12.71 12.80 12.90 13.19 13,42 13.94 200 M. Dash 25.96 26.11 26.13 26.91 27.66 28.74 400 M. Dash 59.47 59.08 59.93 1:01.66 1:02.77 1:07.17 800 M. Run 2:17.88 2:19.07 2:21.68 2:27.60 2:31.38 2:40.91 1600 M. Run 5:06.02 5:09.15 5:18.09 5:29.68 5:41.03 6:01.56 3200 M. Run 11:10.70 11:12.50 11:28.70 12:02.28 12:30.00 13:22.86 100 M. Hurdles 16.04 16.18 16.08 16.68 17.41 18.76 300 M. Hurdles 46.63 47.08 46.63 49.22 50.05 53.38 High Jump 5-ft. 00 -in. 5-ft. 00 -in. 4 -ft. 11-in. 4 -ft. 11-in. 4 -ft. 10-in. 4 -ft. 08 -in. Long Jump 16-ft. 04-in. 16-ft. 06-in. 16-ft. 03-in. 15-ft. 09-in. 15-ft. 06-in. 14-ft. 04-in. Pole Vault 9’09-ft. 00-in. 7 -ft. 09-in. 7 -ft. 00-in. 7 -ft. 00-in. 7 -ft. 00-in. 7 -ft. 00-in. Shot Put 34-ft.01 -in. 34-ft.04 -in. 34-ft.00 -in. 31-ft.11 -in. 30-ft.06 -in. 30-ft.04 -in. Discus 105 -ft. 08-in 105 -ft. 02-in 102 -ft. 06-in 97-ft. 01 -in. 91-ft. 07 -in. 89-ft. 03 -in. Javelin 100 -ft. 00-in. 103 -ft. 03-in. 105 -ft. 04-in. 99 -ft. 09 -in. 98 -ft. 09 -in. 95 -ft. 00 -in. 4x100 M. Relay 50.28 50.99 50.90 52.63 54.44 57.79 4x200m Relay 1:46.67 1:47.52 1:48.58 4x400 M. Relay 4:05.90 4:07.89 4:09.20 4:19.41 4:36.18 5:01.01 4x800m Relay 9:50.40 9:52.88 10:11.86 Medley Relay 4:36.08 4:46.88 5:11.32 UHSAA Track & Field State Qualifying Standards 2026 Girls' Standards Event 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A 100 M. Dash 11.05 11.17 11.25 11.38 11.72 11.94 200 M. Dash 22.46 22.42 22.83 23.10 23.86 24.22 400 M. Dash 50.08 50.19 51.01 51.45 52.95 54.50 800 M. Run 1:56.05 1:56.57 1:58.55 2:02.66 2:05.51 2:10.43 1600 M. Run 4:17.23 4:19.22 4:27.97 4:34.18 4:43.96 4:58.24 3200 M. Run 9:21.31 9:30.07 9:44.18 10:00.81 10:29.98 11:09.63 110 M. Hurdles 15.69 15.81 15.77 16.58 17.30 18.29 300 M. Hurdles 40.52 41.28 40.66 42.43 44.11 45.45 High Jump 6-ft 01-in. 6-ft 01-in. 6-ft 01-in. 5-ft. 11 -in. 5-ft. 10 -in. 5-ft. 07 -in. Long Jump 20-ft. 10 -in. 20-ft. 07 -in. 20-ft. 06 -in. 20-ft. 01 -in. 19-ft. 06 -in. 18-ft. 10 -in. Pole Vault 12 -ft. 06 -in. 11 -ft. 00 -in. 9-ft. 00 -in. 9-ft. 00 -in. 9-ft. 00 -in. 9-ft. 00 -in. Shot Put 48-ft. 07 -in. 46-ft. 03 -in. 45-ft. 09 -in. 42-ft. 10 -in. 40-ft. 11 -in. 39-ft. 02 -in. Discus 140 -ft. 07 -in 133 -ft. 04 -in. 131 -ft. 01 -in. 126 -ft. 07 -in. 116 -ft. 00 -in. 110-ft. 02 -in. Javelin 156-ft. 01 -in. 153 -ft. 08-in. 152 -ft. 08- in. 149-ft. 07 -in 139-ft. 00 -in. 133-ft. 06 -in. 4x100 M. Relay 43.42 43.94 44.15 45.15 46.71 49.95 4x200m Relay 1:30.64 1:32.17 1:32.91 4x400 M. Relay 3:25.51 3:29.29 3:30.38 3:37.15 3:43.39 4:04.18 Medley Relay 3:48.93 3:55.85 4:12.56 4x800m Relay 8:09.83 8:12.17 8:26.13 UHSAA Track & Field State Qualifying Standards 2026 Boys' Standards UHSAA Track & Field State Qualifying Standards 2027 COMING SOON 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 131 VOLLEYBALL State Tournament Pairings Format State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Throughout the tournament, the team with the higher seed will be the designated home team. Wilson Official Game Ball for State Volleyball Championships Official Game Balls and Equipment Compliance (Effective beginning with the 2026-27 school year) A. Post-Season and State Championship Play: Wilson is the official game ball provider for all UHSAA post-season competition. • Girls’ State Tournament: The Wilson Nova (3-color paneled, smooth leather/composite) is the mandatory official game ball for all state tournament matches. • Boys’ State Tournament: The Wilson Helix (textured leather/composite) is the mandatory official game ball for all state tournament matches. B. Regular Season Play Schools are not required to use the specific Wilson tournament models (Nova or Helix) during the regular season; however, the following surface requirements must be met for all sanctioned matches: • Girls’ Volleyball: Matches must be played with a smooth volleyball. • Boys’ Volleyball: Matches must be played with a textured volleyball. C. NFHS Compliance All volleyballs used in regular season and postseason competition must strictly adhere to the specifications outlined in the current NFHS Volleyball Rules Book and must prominently display the NFHS Authenticating Mark. I llegal Uniform • Initial Penalty: When a team cannot begin the set with 6 players wearing legal uniforms, a loss of rally/ point shall be awarded to the opponent at the beginning of each set. • Subsequent Infractions: Teams that incur uniform infractions in subsequent years shall not be permitted to wear non-compliant (illegal) jerseys under any circumstances. Players must be in fully compliant, legal uniforms to participate in play. Match Times for Varsity and Sub-Varsity The maximum starting time between varsity and sub-varsity matches shall be one hour and 30 minutes. For example, if the varsity match is at 3:30 pm, the next matches (JV and Soph) shall be at 5:00 pm and 6:30 pm. Standard Warm-up of Ten Minutes Standardized warm-up for all varsity and sub-varsity levels is 10 minutes. Teams must use a 5-5 format. Home teams in the pre-season and regions are to determine which format will be used. Teams are encouraged to stretch and warm-up in other areas of the school prior to the start of the 10 minute on-court warm-up. The format for the state tournament play will be 5-5. Teams may be penalized by officials for delay of game with regard to delayed warm-up time or excessive warm-up time. If prior matches finish early there may be more time for general warm-up for both teams, but only in the event that matches are running ahead of scheduled start times. VOLLEYBALL Boy & Girls Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 132 Rally Scoring Format for Varsity & Sub-Varsity Rally scoring format for VARSITY matches is as follows: sets 1-4 (4 if necessary) score to 25 with no cap and set 5 (if necessary) scores to 15 with no cap. Sets 1-5 have a possibility of two time-outs per team. (Note: the varsity set 5 has the possibility of two time-outs per team, unlike the sub-varsity set to 15). Rally scoring format for SUB-VARSITY matches is as follows: sets 1 and 2 score to 25 with a cap of 27; sets 3, 4 and 5 (4 and 5 if necessary) score to 15 with a cap of 17. Sets 1 and 2 have a possibility of two time-outs per team and sets 3, 4 and 5 (4 and 5 if necessary) have a possibility of one time-out per team. For sophomore and freshman matches: regions have the option of playing the best of three sets with rally scoring. Sets 1 and 2 score to 25 with a cap of 27; set 3, if necessary, to a score of 15 with a cap of 17. . Varsity Matches For varsity matches inside a tournament one of the two following options can be considered: 1) All matches are a best 3 out of 5 sets or 2) Pool play can be a best 2 out of 3 sets and at least two bracketed matches must be a best 3 out of 5 sets. For varsity matches outside a tournament, all matches are a best 3 out of 5 sets. Additional UHSAA Guidelines • Flags shall be used by line judges. • The 3-ball system is mandated for all matches, including sub-varsity matches. The three balls should be matching balls (i.e. all white balls, or matching color-paneled balls). • Participants are prohibited from using glitter, body paint, decals or temporary tattoos. • End-of-Match Protocol: following the release of players from end line by R1, teams go to center of court to participate in a team handshake before reporting to the bench. • The UHSAA includes non-faculty coaches, employed by the school, as school personnel (NFHS Rule 1-7-2). • Bench access is strictly limited to team coaches, players, and athletic trainers. All individuals on the bench must be in the 9th grade or higher. VOLLEYBALL 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 133 WRESTLING WRESTLING Policies & Pairings See UHSAA.org pairings for school placements in divisions Weight Management Program The weight management program will be as stated in rule 1, Section 5 of the NFHS Wrestling Rule Book. Certified minimum weight using body fat composition is required. More information as to procedures for body fat composition testing is available on the UHSAA website. All wrestlers are ineligible to participate in any matches until they have successfully completed the body fat composition test and their name appears on the team’s alpha master list. No tests will be valid if performed prior to the first legal day of practice or after the Friday immediately prior to the first post-season tournament for that classification. (note: a wrestler who fails the hydration portion of the test may not re-test for 48 hours.) Once a minimum weight is established and appeals, if any, exhausted a wrestler may not re-test to establish a lower minimum weight. Each wrestler is required to have at least one official weigh-in before being entered in the initial post-season tournament. The Minimum Weight-Lock Date has been removed beginning with the 2022-23 season. No weigh-ins will be counted as official until after the wrestler has successfully completed the UHSAA Body Fat Composition Test to determine a minimum weight. The weigh-in for a post-season tournament does not fulfill this requirement. In order to count a weigh-in as an official weigh-in, the wrestler’s team must be competing in the match or tournament. No wrestler may compete in a weight class that requires them to lose more than 1.5% of their weight per week except in the case of a legal weight allowance which is greater than 1.5% of the wrestler’s weight class and when a wrestler weighs in at the same weight class at which he made weight with the allowance. If the certified minimum weight, at 7% body fat for boys or 12% body fat for girls, is less than 0.9 lbs. scale variance allowance, that weight class shall be the wrestlers minimum weight class. This is after the 1.5 percent variance (body fat) applied after testing. The DISPLAYED certified minimum weight on TrackWrestling includes the scale variance allowance. Further rules regarding the UHSAA Weight Management Program are found at www.uhsaa.org on the Wrestling page. Wrestling coaches are required to enter each wrestler’s actual weight from the first official weigh-in each week (Monday-Saturday) online in their school’s file in the OPC program within the TrackWrestling website. Failure to enter actual weight will result in a $100 fine to the school (See weekly weigh-ins below). Wrestlers who compete at a weight class for which they are not eligible may be subject to additional penalties (see UHSAA By- Laws Article 7, Sections 6 & 7). Verification of each wrestlers allowed minimum weight, using the current weekly weigh-in form, for that weigh-in must be provided before the weigh-in for each competition. Coaches should keep a signed record of each weigh-in. Coaches will need valid documentation if questions arise regarding the minimum weight of a wrestler at a post-season tournament or to correct mistakes that may occur in entering the actual weight of a wrestler. Whenever a legal allowance of weight is given for consecutive days of competition, the minimum weight for a wrestler will increase for that weigh-in by the same amount as the allowance. For example: a wrestler whose minimum weight for a particular day is 107 lbs. and his team is competing in a tournament in which legal allowance of 1 lb. is given, then his minimum weight for that weigh-in would also increase by 1 lb. to 108. That means that he would not be eligible to weigh-in at the 106 lb. class even with the allowance. On January 1st a two-pound growth allowance will be added to each weight class as well as the minimum weight for each wrestler. Allowances cannot be used to drop to a lower weight class than the one in which a wrestler’s minimum weight would allow him to compete without the allowance on that day. Schools must follow the NFHS Wrestling Rules for official weigh-ins. Allowances other than for consecutive days of competition and for the growth allowance are a violation of the rules. Updated: January 22, 2024 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 134 WRESTLING Weekly Weigh-Ins Every wrestler must have an official weekly weigh-in which is recorded in TrackWrestling. To increase the integrity of the weigh-in process, coaches are expected to do the following DURING the weigh-in process before each competition: 1) Fill out the weigh-in sheet of the opposing team as the athletes of opposing team weigh-in (in INK). FOR THE FIRST COMPETITION OF THE WEEK: All weigh-ins of each competing wrestler must be entered into TrackWrestling before the competition starts. Both coaches need to verify the accuracy of the weigh-in sheet before the weigh-in is committed in the OPC. Coaches can either enter them after weigh ins are concluded when they go and do their match ups for the dual, or they can enter the weights live during the weigh in process entering them in the OPC with the opposing coach present and verifying weights. Head Gear Effective July 1, 2022, any manufacturer’s logo/trademark/reference that appears on the wrestling ear guards, including legal hair covering, can be no more than 2 ¼ square inches with no dimension more than 2 ¼ inches and may appear no more than once on ear guards. No additional manufacturer’s logo/trademark/reference, promotional or advocacy references shall be allowed on the wrestling ear guards. This means club headgear with logos or reference is strictly prohibited. JV State Tournament The intention of this unsanctioned tournament was to give those JV wrestlers, WHO have not qualified for the State Wrestling Tournament via the outcome of the Divisional Tournament, and whose season has technically ended, the opportunity to wrestle at JV State. JV Wrestlers who have qualified for the state tournament are “NOT” allowed to wrestle in JV State. Designated alternates from the Divisional Tournament from your school would be allowed to compete in JV State. All Results Recorded To increase the integrity for divisional seeding, coaches MUST enter ALL results into TrackWrestling. It is the responsibility of the tournament director and hosting site for dual matches, dual tournaments, and individual tournaments to enter results into track wrestling. All results must be entered into trackwestling.com 3 DAYS before the Divisional seeding meeting starts (I.E. if a tournament or dual is not on trackwrestling.com , coaches must enter those results into trackwrestling.com ). Any wins that are not recorded in trackwrestling.com 3 DAYS prior to the Divisional seeding meeting starting will not count towards the wrestler’s Divisional seeding criteria. All losses not recorded WILL count towards their Divisional seeding criteria. State Qualifying Tournaments Post-season tournaments must be conducted according to NFHS rules including weigh-ins conducted at the tournament site each day of the tournament. The State qualifiers are imported by the UHSAA. Each school shall be allowed to enter as many as two wrestlers in each weight class. In a qualifying tournament all wrestlers entered must have duly qualified for the qualifying tournament. Wrestling Credits Boys Wrestling: Each high school team will be able to utilize 16 contact points. Each dual meet will count as one contact point. Each tournament will count as one contact point. Teams will not be able to compete in more than 10 duals and 6 tournaments before the post-season qualifying and state tournaments. Teams may not compete in more than 3 dual meet style tournaments. Girls Wrestling: Each high school team will be able to utilize 16 contact points. Each dual meet will count as one contact point. Each tournament will count as one contact point. Teams will not be able to compete in more than 8 duals and 8 tournaments before the post-season qualifying and state tournaments. Teams may not compete in more than 4 dual meet style tournaments. Practicing with other teams between Divisionals and the State Tournament is Strictly Prohibited. Girls’ teams with less that 15 wrestlers would be allowed this exception so they can continue to practice. Division Qualifying Tournaments 1. 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A Divisions shall be determined using returning state tournament points figured as follow: a. Points scored by wrestlers who were seniors in the previous year’s state tournament shall be subtracted from the school’s total points scored at the previous year’s state tournament. b. 3 points will be added to each school’s total for each 9th, 10th, 11th grade wrestler from that school that qualified for and entered the state tournament the previous year. c. Schools shall then be ranked based on the point total. The team with the greatest number of points will be 1; the team with the second highest number of points will be 2, etc. d. Division A shall consist of teams ranked 1,4,5,8,9,12,13,16,17,20,21,24,25,28. Division B shall consist of teams ranked 2,3,6,7,10,11,14,15,18,19,22,23,26, 27. When both schools scheduled to host the division tournaments are assigned the same division based on returning points, the lowest ranked of the two shall be placed in the opposite division and the team in that (opposite) division with the point total nearest the reassigned team will take the place of the host team so placed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 135 WRESTLING 2. Sites and dates of the two divisional qualifying tournaments shall be determined by the appropriate Classification Committee. The UHSAA Classification Committee shall approve budgets for tournaments in their classification. Expenses in excess of those approved shall be the responsibility of the host. 3. Approved expenses of both tournaments shall be shared equally by all regions. 4. Each school shall be allowed to enter as many as two wrestlers in each weight class. 5. View the brackets and pairings sheet on uhsaa.org for Divisions Division Scoring & Seeding (for all classifications) 1. Only use results entered in TrackWrestling for seeding all Divisional Tournaments. (See All Results Recorded Above). 2. Eight places shall be scored. All rounds of the tournament shall be scored. There will not be a true 8th match wrestled. Bracket type will be consistent between divisions in each classification. 3. Seeding for individual weight classes shall be accomplished as follows: a. Wrestlers shall be ranked initially according to varsity win percentage. A state place winner in the previous year will have the following added to their varsity win percentage prior to the initial ranking: 1st Place: add 60% 2nd Place: add 55% 3rd Place: add 50% 4th Place: add 45% 5th Place: add 40% 6th Place: add 35% ***add 30 % for a returning state placer from a different year than the previous year ***add 25 % for a returning state qualifier b. Adjustments to the initial ranking may be made as a result of: 1) Majority vote of head coaches to separate the best wrestlers or 2) A case in which a lower ranked wrestler has defeated a higher ranked wrestler during the current season and has not lost to any of the wrestlers ranked between the two. c. In order to be seeded, a wrestler must have competed in a minimum of 10 varsity matches during the current season and have a minimum 50% win record. Exception: item 1 above – a wrestler with fewer than 10 matches could be seeded as a result of a majority vote of head coaches. d. Once the seeded wrestlers are placed in the bracket, byes will be placed computer draw. Byes will be distributed as equally as possible among all the teams in the tournament. e. Any DQ’s during the season must be counted as a loss for seeding purposes. Verification of State Tournament Entries All entries for the state tournament are to be verified prior to the beginning of the initial weigh-in for the tournament in that classification (1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A or 6A). The beginning of the initial weigh-in for a classification (1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A or 6A) constitutes the deadline for verification of entries in the state tournament referred to in rule 10-2-1. The beginning of the weigh-in occurs when the first weight class in the classification officially reports to the scales. Team Scoring for All Classifications at the State Tournament Even though two wrestlers may represent a school in the same weight class, points earned by only one of the two will count toward the team total. In a weight class where a school has two entries of the two, the wrestler who has earned the greatest number of team points shall have their team points count as part of the school’s total. All team scoring will be in accordance with NFHS rules. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 136 Utah High School Activities Association

Phone 801.566.0681 / Fax 801.566.0633 Rules and Regulations for the UHSAA Activities of Esports, Music, Speech/Debate and Theatre ACTIVITIES UHSAA Activities 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 137 ESPORTS Coming Soon 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 138 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC MUSICPolicies&Guidelines The Utah High School Ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es Associa Ɵ on (UHSAA) works in partnership with the Utah Music Educators Associa Ɵ on (UMEA) to organize and direct designated music ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es at the region and state level. The UHSAA is responsible for the formula Ɵ on and administra Ɵ on of rules and supervision of the organiza Ɵ onal structure necessary to administer uniform, consistent, quality region and state music fes Ɵ vals and other inter-school music ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es. Sanc Ɵ oned Events A. The UHSAA sanc Ɵ ons the following events involving student par Ɵ cipa Ɵ on: EVENT MANAGING ORGANIZATION Region Fes Ɵ vals Solo & Ensemble, Jazz Band, Large Choir, Training Choir, Concert Band, Orchestra Individual Region Leadership Fall Marching Band Season UMEA Sponsored Compe ƟƟ ons UMEA State Solo & Ensemble Fes Ɵ val UHSAA State Large Ensemble Fes Ɵ vals Jazz Band, Concert Band, Choir, Orchestra, Marching Band UMEA State Honor Ensembles All State Choir, All State Jazz Band, All State Orchestra, All State Concert Band, Honor Choir UMEA B. Under the exis Ɵ ng partnership, UMEA may request a sanc Ɵ on from the UHSAA for the ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es they sponsor. UMEA leadership must submit a completed sanc Ɵ on applica Ɵ on to the UHSAA at least thirty days prior to the event and be signed by the UMEA President. C. Managing organiza Ɵ ons are responsible for opera Ɵ ng and funding each of their events. All events shall follow the guidelines as outlined in this document. Individual regions may provide further clarity and guidelines in their respec Ɵ ve region handbooks, however, any devia Ɵ ons or changes to the UHSAA Music Policies and Guidelines must be approved by the UHSAA Execu Ɵ ve Commi Ʃ ee. D. Region music ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es are administered by each region’s Board of Managers. Leadership and Responsibili Ɵ es ͘ UHSAA Music Advisory Commi Ʃ ee ϭ͘ The commi Ʃ ee consists of representa Ɵ ves of the UHSAA, the UMEA, and the Utah State ŽĂƌĚ of Educa Ɵ on, Ă͘ UHSAA Music Commi Ʃ ee Chair ď͘ UHSAA Assistant Director overseeing music Đ͘ UMEA President Ě͘ UMEA Adjudica Ɵ on Chair Return to Table of Contents 132 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 139 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC e. UMEA Execu � ve Director f. State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Directors g. State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Hosts h. Board of Trustees Representa � ve i. Other school administrators and teachers as assigned by the UHSAA 2. The commi � ee meets biannually for orienta � on, periodic review of policies and guidelines, management of music fes � vals, and other purposes. B. UMEA Board 1. UMEA President (Current, Past, Elect) 2. UMEA Execu � ve Director 3. UMEA Area Vice Presidents 4. Other members as elected or assigned C. Individual Region Music Leadership 1. Region Board of Managers: all principals from each of the schools in the region 2. Region Music Administrator: a principal from one of the schools in the region selected by the Board of Managers 3. Region Music Chair: an experienced music teacher from one of the schools in the region selected by the Region Board of Managers a. The Region Board of Managers shall select a music educator to serve as the Region Music Chair, alongside the Region Music Administrator assigned to oversee region music ac � vi � es. They may or may not work at the same school and their term of service is determined by the Board of Managers. b. The region music chair is the liaison between local music educators in a speci  c region and the UHSAA. The selected Region Music Chairs are strongly encouraged to a � end the annual UHSAA training held at the UMEA Professional Development Conference. This posi � on may be shared between two music teachers in a given region. c. It is the responsibility of the Region Music Chair to call periodic mee � ngs of the music educators in the local region to plan music fes � vals and other inter-school music ac � vi � es, to serve as chair for all fes � vals in the local region in order to assure that each is administered in compliance with UHSAA Policies and Guidelines, and to meet with the Region Board of Managers when the need arises. d. The Region Music Chair is expected to train and assist music directors in their region and ensure fes � val policies and guidelines are followed, including: i. Verify state-qualifying entries for state fes � val par � cipa � on ii. Disseminate fes � val results to individual directors iii. Communicate with music directors about State Fes � vals iv. Oversee region fes � val management and opera � on v. Oversee the hiring and payment of cer �  ed adjudicator 4. Region Fes � val Hosts: music teachers assigned to host a speci  c region music event a. Region Music Chairs work with Region Fes � val Hosts on the administra � on of each event. b. They will be responsible for the physical arrangements necessary for e ff ec � ve management of the music fes � val i. Hire and compensate cer �  ed adjudicators ii. Schedule space and events iii. Provide chairs, stands, risers, pianos (tuned), large percussion equipment, public address system, tables for adjudicators, sea � ng charts, student aids, ushers, recording equipment for adjudicators, and hospitality. Ra Ɵ ngs 1. Ra � ngs may include pluses or minuses for each entry with the maximum (highest) ra � ng being a (I). A ra � ng of (I+) is not permi � ed. 2. Guidelines for ra � ngs follow: Return to Table of Contents  133 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 140 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC RATING I : SUPERIOR —A  rst-rate performance for the event and the class of par � cipants being judged. To receive a superior ra � ng a performance must meet the highest expecta � ons in every category of adjudica � on. Memoriza Ɵ on of instrumental solos is op Ɵ onal. Piano soloists and vocal soloists must perform from memory. RATING II : EXCELLENT —a commendable performance showing a high standard of musical accomplishment but lacking in one or more of the characteris � cs of a superior ra � ng. Music may be used. RATING III : GOOD —an average performance lacking in several characteris � cs of a superior ra � ng. Music may be used. RATING IV : FAIR —a below average performance requiring many speci  c improvements. RATING V : POOR —a performance lacking su ffi cient prepara � on and exhibi � ng major de  ciencies. Par Ɵ cipa Ɵ on Requirements A. Music ac � vi � es are curriculum related and designed to serve those students who have chosen to study music through the school program. Therefore, a par � cipant must be enrolled in a music class or a music program at a UHSAA member school during the current school year to par � cipate in region and state music events. Par � cipants may also be subject to unique par � cipa � on requirements established by their school. 1. Ninth graders may only par � cipate in music events if they are enrolled in a music class at a member high school. 2. Seventh and eighth grade students a � ending a six-year member school may par � cipate in a vocal or instrumental ensemble but may not par � cipate in the solo por � on of the solo and ensemble fes � val. 3. Students a � ending a member school with no ac � ve music program may seek administrator approval to par � cipate in events. 4. All par � cipants, with the excep � on of conductors and accompanists, must be students. 5. The UMEA has published a MARCHING BAND POLICY MANUAL to ensure consistency and uniformity in show contests throughout the state. Directors are encouraged to review the policies therein to iden � fy eligibility requirements for students. B. Region and State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Eligibility 1. To par � cipate in a Region or State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val, students must meet UHSAA academic eligibility standards ( UHSAA Handbook, Ar Ɵ cle 1 Sec Ɵ on 8 ). a. Music Directors are responsible for verifying the academic eligibility of the students prior to par � cipa � on in the region fes � val. b. Music Directors and the school principal complete and sign the UHSAA Eligibility Form indica � ng all students are eligible, or will be eligible to par � cipate. This form must be submi � ed to the UHSAA o ffi ces prior to par � cipa � on in any region solo and ensemble fes � vals. 2. Region large ensemble fes � vals and all state fes � vals sponsored by the UMEA, including All State and Honor Ensembles, State Jazz, State Marching Band, State Orchestra, State Concert Band and State Choir, though sanc � oned by the UHSAA, do not require eligibility veri  ca � on. Adjudicator Informa Ɵ on and Requirements A. The UMEA Adjudica � on Commi � ee oversees the approval and cer �  ca � on of adjudicators. The following prerequisites have been established by the UMEA Adjudica � on Commi � ee. a. Adjudicators must have a college or university music degree(required with few excep � ons) OR qualifying life experience. Qualifying life experience should include evidence of a history of many years of success in teaching and mentoring high school age students. b. To adjudicate solo and ensemble fes � vals, the minimum requirement is three years of teaching experience in secondary schools, or three years private studio teaching of high school age students or college-level teaching experience. c. To adjudicate large group fes � vals, the minimum requirement is  ve years music teaching experience in secondary schools or any college-level ensemble conduc � ng experience. B. To cer � fy as an adjudicator one must successfully complete the online applica � on and training available through the UMEA website and receive cer �  ca � on in one or more areas of specializa � on. The applica � on must show evidence of teaching experience in each area of specializa � on. Return to Table of Contents 134 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 141 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC C. To remain eligible, all adjudicators must recer � fy once every four years by comple � ng the online applica � on and training available through the UMEA website. D. If an adjudicator receives three nega � ve evalua � ons, they may be removed from the UMEA list of cer �  ed adjudicators by the UHSAA Music Commi � ee. Reinstatement is allowed once upon comple � on of the UMEA online training. E. An adjudicator must never be alone with a par � cipant and must always have another performer, adjudicator, parent, or observer present in the room. F. Region and state fes � val adjudicator fees are $45 an hour. Drivers will be reimbursed .50 cents per mile and .15 for passengers, for any miles traveled over 50 miles roundtrip. G. Prior to any region or state fes � val, adjudicators should complete The UHSAA Music Fes � val Adjudica � on Contract, available on the UHSAA Music Page. 1. Region events are funded by the sponsoring regions. Each region has established policies on how adjudica � on payments and hos � ng costs are processed or reimbursed. Fes � val hosts and Region Music Chairs should refer to their individual region handbook or contact the region chair for the established procedure. 2. State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Adjudicators are paid by the UHSAA through the ArbiterSports payment portal. Payment will be deposited into the individual adjudicator accounts no sooner than 12-15 business days a � er the fes � val. General Requirements A. O ffi cial adjudica � on and entry forms must be used by each school music teacher for all UHSAA sanc � oned music fes � vals. The forms can be obtained from the Music page on the Utah High School Ac � vi � es Associa � on website. The forms must be  lled out using the internet browser. Handwri � en forms will not be accepted. All adjudica � on forms must be  lled out completely and accurately. B. For all region and state music events, except region and state jazz fes � vals, par � cipants must provide adjudicators with musical scores or individual parts, with measures clearly numbered. Failure to provide these materials with numbered measures may result in adjudicators lowering the performance grade by one level. a. For Region and State Jazz fes � vals, music scores are not required but may be provided at the director's discre � on. C. The use of photocopied or otherwise reproduced copies of published music must comply with the United States Copyright Law. Fes � val par � cipants shall either provide the original score or wri � en permission from copyright owners to duplicate the music. If an unauthorized reproduc � on of published music is used an adjudicator may give a “no ra � ng.” D. Music is an interac � ve art form and as such live accompaniment is required. E. Uninvited communica � on with the adjudicator may result in the disquali  ca � on of the entry. F. Students and directors are encouraged to view fes � vals as a valuable listening and evalua � ng experience in addi � on to their involvement in performance. Par � cipants should spend as much � me as possible  lling the role of cri � cal yet apprecia � ve members of the audience. Region Fes Ɵ vals A. A. Region Music Fes � vals 1. It is recommended that regions recognize only those categories which will be held at state compe �� ons as they submit entries for region fes � vals. 2. Recommended Region Fes Ɵ vals Vocal/Piano Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Concert Band Fes � val Instrumental Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Large Choir Fes � val Jazz Ensemble Fes � val Training Choir Fes � val Orchestra Fes � val 3. Directors are discouraged from reques � ng to par � cipate in another region fes � val; however, under unique circumstances, a school may appeal to their Region Board of Managers in a classi  ca � on of equal Return to Table of Contents 135 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 142 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC or greater size (i.e., a 3A school may only par Ɵ cipate in a 3A, 4A, 5A or 6A region fes Ɵ val). The request must be submi Ʃ ed in adequate Ɵ me for the Region Board of Managers to consider the request. B. Region Large Ensemble Fes Ɵ vals 1. Large ensemble fes Ɵ vals held at the region level are managed by individual Region Music Chairs, Administrators, and Fes Ɵ val Hosts. The following groups should be included: band, orchestra, string orchestra, treble choirs, tenor-bass choirs, chamber choirs and large mixed choirs. 2. Large Ensembles may not perform a selec Ɵ on they have used at any adjudicated fes Ɵ val within the last four years. 3. The amount of Ɵ me allo Ʃ ed to each ensemble is regulated by the fes Ɵ val chair according to the number of par Ɵ cipa Ɵ ng ensembles, and should be consistent with the amount of Ɵ me given at the corresponding state fes Ɵ vals. Suggested Ɵ me for choirs is 15 minutes, and for instrumental groups 30 minutes. This Ɵ me allotment includes se ƫ ng up, performing, and exi Ɵ ng the stage. 4. Ra Ɵ ngs assigned by the adjudicators to the par Ɵ cipa Ɵ ng ensembles shall conform to the guidelines listed under the previous sec Ɵ on Ɵ tled, “Ra Ɵ ngs”. 5. All awards and/or other forms of recogni Ɵ on for large group fes Ɵ vals must conform to the regula Ɵ ons of the Utah High School Ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es Associa Ɵ on. 6. Regions may include sight reading as part of their large ensemble fes Ɵ val ac Ɵ vi Ɵ es. Reading materials should be at least one class below that of the numbers performed by the group. Procedures can be decided by directors of par Ɵ cipa Ɵ ng schools. 7. It is recommended that there be three adjudicators for each large group fes Ɵ val. 8. First and second year Music Directors who par Ɵ cipate in the fes Ɵ val may opt to receive adjudicator comments only and no ra Ɵ ng. C. Region Jazz Ensemble Fes Ɵ val 1. Each jazz ensemble is required to perform at least one swing and one ballad or combina Ɵ on thereof. Most ensembles will play a third tune. This tune could be another swing chart, la Ɵ n, funk or contras Ɵ ng style. 2. At the Region and State Jazz Fes Ɵ vals, schools will par Ɵ cipate in a sight-reading experience. Par Ɵ cipa Ɵ on in region sight-reading is required; however, a minimum sight-reading score is NOT needed to qualify for State. The recommended format is as follows: a Ō er performing on stage, bands will may be brought to a sight-reading room or sight-read on stage, given  ve (5) minutes to look over a tune (students may play), then they will play the tune for adjudica Ɵ on. 3. Each ensemble will be allowed a total of 30 minutes which includes se ƫ ng up, performing, sight-reading and leaving the stage. To facilitate the 30 minutes Ɵ me limit, ensembles are encouraged to use the standard block setup. A warm-up room will be available one-half hour prior to a band’s scheduled performance Ɵ me. 4. Ensemble Instrumenta Ɵ on and Doubling a. A jazz ensemble typically has one person play per part and directors should aim for this standard. Doubling can cause unwanted balance and other issues. b. The standard jazz ensemble instrumenta Ɵ on has  ve saxes, four to  ve trumpets, three to  ve trombones, piano, bass, drums (aux. percussion and vibes) and guitar. c. The following are allowed: i. Trumpets may double one part but should have no more than  ve trumpets. ii. Possible trumpet doubling op Ɵ ons are: i. Lead trumpet down an octave ii. Double the fourth part iii. Trombones may double one part but no more than  ve trombones iv. Possible trombone doubling op Ɵ ons are i. Double third or fourth (suggested that you don’t double bass trombone). d. Saxes should not double parts (an occasional 2nd bari part that is wri Ʃ en by the composer is allowed). e. Rhythm sec Ɵ on instruments should not be doubled. f. Woodwind doublings (clarinet, bass clarinet,  ute, etc.) should be played by the saxophone sec Ɵ on and not by bringing in a new set of students to play these parts. Return to Table of Contents 136 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 143 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC g. Other rare excep � ons may occur but are extremely rare. It is suggested that you communicate with both the UMEA Jazz Vice President and Region Chair ahead of � me so as to not cause you or your students an unwanted adjudica � on surprise. D. Region Solo & Ensemble Fes � vals 1. Solo and ensemble fes � vals o ff er students the opportunity to augment their high school musical experience through the study of quality music literature under the guidance of a skilled music educator. This learning process is enriched by the opportunity to perform for a cer �  ed adjudicator, who provides valuable feedback on the students' musicianship. 2. Solo and ensemble par � cipants must perform fes � val-quality music of ar � s � c merit at an intermediate or advanced di ffi culty level (Grade III or higher, if graded by the publisher). Music not originally composed for recital or concert performance is generally discouraged, including but not limited to musical theater pieces, movie themes, jazz or Dixieland arrangements, and pop music. Self-composed, self-published, or internet-sourced arrangements are typically not recommended for music selec � on. a. It is the responsibility of the music educator to approve all student entries for appropriateness. Region chairs may also be consulted regarding the appropriateness of any music being performed. The current New York State Music Associa � on Manual and/or the NAfME Selected Music Lists are recommended (could also search acceptable state repertoire lists on jwpepper.com). 3. To accommodate the large number of par � cipants, it is recommended students not par � cipate in more than three events. 4. Instrumental and Vocal Solos a. A soloist may not perform a selec � on he or she performed at the solo and ensemble fes � val in any previous year. Each soloist must select music at least one grade more di ffi cult if he or she received a superior ra � ng the previous year. The ruling on repe �� on applies to both soloists and ensembles. b. Music requiring accompaniment must have accompaniment or the performer(s) shall receive a NR. c. Piano duets and concertos are not permi � ed at Region or State Fes � vals. A performer may receive a NR for performing a piano concerto or duet. d. Given the typically small number of harp solo entries, they are o � en grouped with piano solo entries for adjudica � on, but when possible, cer �  ed harp adjudicators should be used for these entries. Harp duets are not acceptable for adjudica � on, but harp concertos may be performed if they are within the 6-minute � me limit. 5. Performing Ensembles and Choirs: a. For the purposes of solo and ensemble fes � vals, a performing group may be entered as either an “ensemble” or a “choir” based on the number of students. b. To be considered a separate ensemble, at least 50 percent of the group shall be new members. c. Instrumental Choirs and Ensembles 1. Instrumental Ensembles consist of 2-7 students with each part played by only one student. 2. String, woodwind, or brass choirs consist of 8-25 students. 3. Instrumental choirs may be conducted and may perform up to three selec � ons within the prescribed � me allotment, which includes set-up, tuning, performance � me, and cleanup. 4. All instrumental choirs and ensembles must adhere to prescribed instrumenta � on listed on the conductor’s score. d. Chamber Choirs and Vocal Ensembles 1. A Chamber Choir is an ensemble of mixed voices, with a total of 16-32 students. All other types of vocal groups are vocal ensembles. 2. Chamber Choirs may be conducted and may perform up to three selec � ons within the prescribed � me allotment, which includes entering and exi � ng the performance space. Return to Table of Contents 137 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 144 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC 3. Mixed, treble, or tenor bass vocal ensembles shall be limited to four singers on a part and shall not exceed 16 singers in total, cannot be conducted, and may perform one piece within the prescribed Ɵ me allotment. e. Percussion Ensembles, Mallet Ensembles, and Large Percussion Ensembles 1. Percussion Ensembles and Mallet Ensembles consist of 2-7 students with each part played by only one student. 2. Large Percussion Ensembles consist of 8-25 students. 3. Large Percussion Ensembles may be conducted and may perform up to three selec Ɵ ons within the prescribed Ɵ me allotment, which includes set-up, tuning, performance Ɵ me, and cleanup. 4. All Percussion Ensembles, Mallet Ensembles, and Large Percussion Ensembles must adhere to prescribed instrumenta Ɵ on listed on the conductor’s score. 5. While many percussion instruments and equipment are provided at the fes Ɵ val loca Ɵ on, it is the responsibility of the individual directors to bring whatever equipment is not provided. Entry Type Number of Students Time Allotment Comments Piano/Harp Solo 1 student 6 minutes ● Must be performed from memory ● Piano ensembles and harp ensembles are not permi Ʃ ed ● Harp solos may be accompanied on piano String/Wind/Brass Solo 1 student 6 minutes ● Must be accompanied if the music calls for accompaniment Percussion Solo 1 student 6 minutes ● Directors must provide any equipment not supplied at the fes Ɵ val site. Vocal Solo 1 student 5 minutes ● Must be performed from memory String/Wind/Brass Ensemble 2-7 students 7 minutes ● One student per part ● May perform only one selec Ɵ on ● Cannot be conducted Vocal Ensemble 2-16 students 5 minutes ● Must be memorized ● May perform only one selec Ɵ on ● Cannot be conducted Percussion Ensemble Mallet Ensemble 2-7 students 10 minutes ● One student per part ● May perform only one selec Ɵ on ● Cannot be conducted ● Directors must provide any equipment not supplied at the fes Ɵ val site. String/Wind/Brass Choir 8-25 students 12 minutes ● May perform up to three selec Ɵ ons ● May be conducted Large Percussion Ensemble 8-25 students 12 minutes ● May perform up to three selec Ɵ ons ● May be conducted Chamber Choir 16-32 students 15 minutes ● May perform up to three selec Ɵ ons Return to Table of Contents 138 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 145 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC ● May be conducted ● Mixed voices only State Solo & Ensemble Fes Ɵ vals A. All policies and guidelines listed under Region Fes Ɵ vals Sec � on D “Region Solo & Ensemble Fes � vals” also apply to the State Solo and Ensemble Fes � val. B. The State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val is divided into a North Fes � val Site and a South Fes � val Site. Schools are assigned to one of these sites based on proximity and the need to maintain a balanced distribu � on of par � cipants. a. In most cases, schools will be assigned to the fes � val site closest to their campus. However, for schools where the travel distance to both sites is comparable, the assigned loca � on may vary from year to year to ensure balance between the two fes � vals. O ffi cial fes � val site assignments will be announced no later than two weeks before the state fes � val. C. Qualifying for the State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val 1. Only soloists and ensembles receiving superior ra � ngs (I) at a region fes � val may par � cipate in the State Solo and Ensemble Fes � val. A (I-) is not acceptable. 2. The number of piano entries a region may advance to the State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val is limited to the number of schools in that region, and all must qualify by receiving a Superior (I) Ra � ng. a. In cases where more entries in a given region earn Superior (I) Ra � ngs at the Region Solo & Ensemble Fes � val, it is the responsibility of the cer �  ed adjudicator to choose which Superior entries qualify to advance to the state level and which do not. b. Harp entries adjudicated with piano entries are not under the same qualifying restric � on as piano entries. All harp entries that qualify with a Superior (I) Ra � ng may par � cipate in the State Fes � val. 3. The Region Fes � val Adjudicators will determine which entries qualify to advance to the state fes � val. 4. Soloists or ensembles advancing to the state level may change their selec � on between region and state fes � vals. 5. In cases when more than one ensemble from a school are entered in the same category, to be considered di ff erent ensembles, no more than 50% of the students may be the same in each ensemble. 6. An ensemble qualifying for state may change no more than one half of its personnel. D. Instruc � ons and General Informa � on 1. Prior to any Region Solo & Ensemble Fes � val(s), all high school music directors and principals shall complete, sign and submit the “Eligibility Requirements for Fes � val Par � cipa � on” form to the State UHSAA O ffi ces. This form will be emailed to all music directors, region chairs, and principals, and posted on the Music Page of the UHSAA Website. 2. Working in tandem with the Region Music Chair and Region Music Administrator, individual Region Fes � val Hosts will establish their own instruc � ons and deadlines for submi � ng entries for their fes � vals. It is the responsibility of the Region Fes � val Hosts to distribute these instruc � ons, schedules, equipment availability informa � on, ra � ngs, and all per � nent informa � on to the individual directors in that region. 3. Following the Region Fes � val(s) the Region Music Chair shall complete the following: a. The Fes � val Host scans (or photocopies) the region fes � val adjudica � on forms and gives them to the Region Chair to keep as evidence of which entries qualify to advance to the State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val. Original adjudica � on forms are returned to each school’s director(s). b. The “State Entry Form,” will be sent to all high school music directors no later than March 1st. Individual directors are responsible for submi � ng the entries advancing to the State Fes � val from his/her school and program. These entries must be submi � ed no later than 3 weeks prior to the State Fes � val. c. While individual scheduling requests are discouraged, individual music directors may email requests directly to the State Solo & Ensemble Director. These schedule requests must be emailed no later than 3 weeks prior to the State Fes � val. Return to Table of Contents 139 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 146 2024-2025 UHSAA HANDBOOK MUSIC d. Region Chairs are responsible for verifying the entries submi � ed by the individual school music directors. This is done by adding their ini � als to the provided column on the “State Entry Form” indica � ng the entry did, indeed, qualify to advance to the State Fes � val. This veri  ca � on must be completed no later than 3 weeks prior to the State Fes � val. e. Prior to the state fes � val, individual school music directors shall create a new adjudica � on form for each of their state entries and distribute those forms to the students. Forms must be typed and never handwri � en, and printed double-sided on the appropriate color paper. At their assigned performance � me the performer(s) shall provide the state adjudicator their adjudica � on form, along with a published copy of their music, with the measures clearly numbered. f. Given the immense size and scope of the State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val, and the complexity of scheduling around con  icts, all entries will be scheduled at the discre � on of the State Fes � val Director and are expected to perform at their assigned � me. g. Individual high school music directors may pe �� on the State Fes � val Director to reschedule an entry to accommodate a previously undisclosed schedule con  ict. An entry may also be switched with another entry from the same school or a di ff erent school. However, it is the responsibility of the music director to arrange these switches before contac � ng the State Fes � val Director, who will then verify all changes with the concerned par � es. h. Students and parents are discouraged from contac � ng the State Fes � val Director to make scheduling or rescheduling requests or to make a grievance. All requests received and grievances from students and parents will be sent back to the individual music directors. i. The  nal day to submit rescheduling requests or cancella � ons is the Monday before the State Fes � val. Any cancella � ons or rescheduling requests made a � er this day may incur a $25  ne. 4. The State Solo & Ensemble Fes � val Schedule will be emailed to all music directors, region chairs, and principals, and posted on the Music Page of the UHSAA website no later than 12 days prior to the fes � val. 5. The completed adjudica � on forms, superior cer �  cates, and superior medals, will be mailed to the principal at each school on the Monday a � er the State Solo and Ensemble Fes � val. a. Soloists receiving a superior (I) ra � ng will be awarded medals and cer �  cates. b. Soloists receiving superior minus (I-) ra � ngs will be awarded cer �  cates. c. Ensembles receiving superior (I) ra � ng will be awarded a cer �  cate d. Chamber Choirs receiving superior ra � ngs (I) from all adjudicators will be awarded a cer �  cate and may be o ff ered the opportunity to purchase a superior plaque for an extra fee. Return to Table of Contents 140 UPDATED 1/9/25 MUSIC 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 147 SPEECH/DEBATE SPEECH/DEBATE SPEECH & DEBATE Policies and Guidelines CHAPTER I – UHSAA Policies

SECTION 1: Board of Trustees A. Authority and Duties 1. The governing authority of the Association shall be vested in a Board of Trustees. 2. The Board of Trustees shall have overall responsibility for the administration of the assets and actions of the Association. Among its responsibilities are the following: a. Set policy and give direction for the operation of the Association, including the creation of committees, panels, or any other subdivision of the Board as is deemed necessary for the best interest of the Association. b. Appoint the Executive Director of the Association. c. Approve an annual budget. d. Take action on proposed amendments to the Association’s Constitution and By-Laws in accordance with Article 4. e. Prepare and approve, for the purposes of fair and prudent competition in the activities sponsored by the Association, a statewide classification of schools and region alignment in those classifications. f. Provide notice of all material actions to Association members. B. Membership Voting members of the Board of Trustees include: District Classification Representatives, District Superintendents, District Principals, Charter Schools Representative, Private Schools Representative, and a State Board of Education Representative. No school district shall have more than one (1) school board member or superintendent on the Board of Trustees. 1. District Classification Representatives a. To be eligible to serve as a District Classification Representative on the UHSAA Board of Trustees, an individual shall be an: i. Elected member of a local district school board of an Association member school assigned to the classification they represent. b. One (1) representative from each UHSAA classification shall be elected by the members of the local district school boards of the schools represented in each classification. c. Elections may take place during the annual conference of the Utah School Boards Association. Elections shall take place as follows: i. Nominations will be taken from each multi-district classification. ii. Nominations will be closed and a ballot distributed one per district member school in the classification. The nominee with the majority of the votes wins the election. In the case where there are more than two nominees and none receive a majority of the votes, the election moves to a second round of voting with only the nominees receiving the two high vote counts eligible. In the case of a tie in the first round voting, the second round voting may result in more than two nominees being eligible. The election moves to a third round of voting only in the case of a tie for first place in the second round voting. In the case of a tie after the third round of voting, an on-site coin flip determines the winner. iii. Announcement of balloting results will be made during a general session of the USBA annual conference in the case the election is held at the conference. Balloting results will be posted on the UHSAA website. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 14 d. District Classification Representatives shall serve three-year staggered terms. The term of office for the initial representatives shall be one (1) year for one-third (1/3) of the representatives, two (2) years for one-third (1/3) of the representatives and three (3) years for the remaining one-third (1/3) of the representatives. All newly elected District Classification Representatives shall take office on July 1 following their date of election. e. Any District Classification Representative who ceases to meet the qualifications outlined in item “a,” above, shall become ineligible to serve on the Board of Trustees. In case of a vacancy from any district, the board members from that district shall elect a new member to serve on the Board of Trustees. That new member shall take office upon election and serve the balance of the term of the District Classification Representative replaced. 2. District Superintendents a. One (1) District Superintendent from 5A and 6A shall be elected/appointed by the Superintendents Association. b. One (1) District Superintendent from 3A and 4A shall be elected/appointed by the Superintendents Association. c. One (1) District Superintendent from 1A and 2A shall be elected/appointed by the Superintendents Association. d. District Superintendents shall serve three-year staggered terms. The term of office for the initial representatives shall be one (1) year for one (1) superintendent, two (2) years for one (1) of the superintendents and three (3) years for the remaining one (1) of the superintendents. The newly elected/appointed District Superintendent shall take office on July 1 following their date of election/appointment. e. Any vacancy occurring in a District Superintendent position shall be filled by the Superintendents Association for the remainder of the unfinished term. 3. District Principals a. One (1) District Principal from 5A and 6A shall be elected/appointed by the UHSAA Executive Committee. b. One (1) District Principal from 3A and 4A shall be elected/appointed by the UHSAA Executive Committee. c. One (1) District Principal from 1A and 2A shall be elected/appointed by the UHSAA Executive Committee. d. District Principals shall serve three-year staggered terms. The term of office for the initial rep resentatives shall be one (1) year for one (1) principal, two (2) years for one (1) of the principals and three (3) years for the remaining one (1) of the principals. The newly elected/appointed District Principal shall take office on July 1 following their date of election/appointment. e. Classifications shall alternate representation for each succeeding term. f. Any vacancy occurring in a District Principal position shall be filled by the UHSAA Executive Committee for the remainder of the unfinished term. 4. Charter Schools Representative a. One (1) representative shall be elected by the UHSAA member charter schools. Any person nominated and elected pursuant to this section must be employed by or affiliated with a member charter school. b. Elections may take place during the spring at the Utah High School Activities Association. Elections shall take place as follows: CONSTITUTION 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 15 i. Nominations will be taken from each UHSAA member charter school. ii. Nominations will be closed and a ballot distributed one per UHSAA member charter school. The nominee with the majority of the votes wins the election. In the case where there are more than two nominees and none receive a majority of the votes, the election moves to a second round of voting with only the nominees receiving the two high vote counts eligible. In the case of a tie in the first round voting, the second round voting may result in more than two nominees being eligible. The election moves to a third round of voting only in the case of a tie for first place in the second round voting. In the case of a tie after the third round of voting, an on-site coin flip determines the winner. iii. Announcement of balloting results will be posted on the UHSAA website. c. When any person elected as a Charter School Representative ends employment or affiliation with a member Charter School, the position of Charter School Representative shall be deemed to be vacant. Any vacancy occurring in a Charter Schools representative position shall be filled by an election of the UHSAA member charter schools for the remainder of the unfinished term. 5. Private Schools Representative a. One (1) representative shall be elected by the UHSAA member private schools. Any person nominated and elected pursuant to this section must be employed by or affiliated with a member private school. b. Elections may take place during the spring at the Utah High School Activities Association. Elections shall take place as follows: i. Nominations will be taken from each UHSAA member private school. ii. Nominations will be closed and a ballot distributed one per UHSAA member private school. The nominee with the majority of the votes wins the election. In the case where there are more than two nominees and none receive a majority of the votes, the eletion moves to a second round of voting with only the nominees receiving the two high vote counts eligible. In the case of a tie in the first round voting, the second round voting may result in more than two nominees being eligible. The election moves to a third round of voting only in the case of a tie for first place in the second round voting. In the case of a tie after the third round of voting, an on-site coin flip determines the winner. iii. Announcement of balloting results will be posted on the UHSAA website. c. When any person elected as a Private School Representative ends employment or affiliation with a member Private School, the position of Private School Representative shall be deemed to be vacant. Any vacancy occurring in a Private Schools representative position shall be filled by an election of the UHSAA member private schools for the remainder of the unfinished term. 6. State Board of Education Representative a. One (1) member of the Utah State Board of Education as appointed by that Board shall serve as a member of the Board of Trustees. 7. Officers a. The Board of Trustees shall annually elect from its membership a chairperson. The Board of Trustees may elect other officers and committee chairs as it deems appropriate. 8. Meetings a. The Board of Trustees shall meet at least five times per year. The dates, place and time of the meetings may be set by the Board of Trustees while in session or may be deferred to the chair person for later determination. CONSTITUTION 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 16 b. Special meetings may be called by the chairperson or upon written request of the majority of the members of the Board of Trustees. c. Each member of the Board of Trustees shall be given at least two weeks advance notice of the date, time and place of each regular meeting and reasonable advance notice of special meetings of the Board of Trustees. 9. Voting a. Only voting members of the Board of Trustees shall vote on matters properly presented to the Board. Each voting member shall have one vote. A quorum of the Board of Trustees is required to take action or vote on any item. A quorum shall consist of at least 60% of the full voting membership of the Board of Trustees. b. Existence of a quorum shall be established at the call to order of the Board of Trustees and, once established, shall be assumed for the remainder of the meeting. A majority of the quorum of the board members present is required to approve action. CONSTITUTION SECTION 2: Executive Director A. The Executive Director shall be the chief executive officer of the Association and shall operate under the direction of the Board of Trustees. B. Among other duties, the Executive Director shall: 1. Faithfully carry into execution the By-Laws, rules and regulations of the Association. 2. Take such action as is consistent with the best interests of the Association. 3. Prepare the annual budget. 4. Receive and deposit all funds belonging to the Association. 5. Maintain complete and current records of the assets of the Association, including receipt and deposit of all funds belonging to the Association as well as a list of other Association assets, including rights to the nature of Association competition, copyright, trademark, and other tangible and intangible assets. 6. Appoint all staff members subject to the approval of the Board of Trustees. 7. Assign and direct the work of the office staff. 8. Interpret the Constitution and By-Laws. SECTION 3: Executive Committee A. Authority and Duties 1. The Executive Committee is organized for the purpose of assisting the Executive Director of the Association in administering the policies and directives of the Board of Trustees, including the function of enforcing the rules and regulations of the Association. 2. The Executive Committee may appoint such committees to assist in that administration as may be reasonable. B. Officers Every two years, the Executive Committee shall elect or retain in position a chairperson from outside its membership. C. Membership 1. The membership of the Executive Committee shall consist of one (1) member from each region selected by that region Board of Managers. Additionally, the State Superintendent of Public Instruction or designee shall be included in the membership. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 17 2. The members of the Executive Committee shall serve three-year staggered terms, except that the term of office for the initial Executive Committee voting members shall be one (1) year for one-third (1/3) of the members, two (2) years for one-third (1/3) of the members and three (3) years for the remaining one-third (1/3) of the members. 3. A vacancy on the Executive Committee shall be filled by the Board of Managers of the region where the vacancy occurs. The newly appointed member shall serve the remainder of the term of the member who has been replaced. D. Meetings The Executive Committee shall meet no more than seven times each year unless additional meetings are approved by the Executive Director. SECTION 4: Region Board of Managers A. Each member high school shall be assigned by the Board of Trustees to a classification and to a region within that classification. B. Authority and Duties: The schools in each region shall organize a Region Board of Managers which shall, under the direction of the Executive Director and the Executive Committee, 1. Supervise and administer all interscholastic activities, under the jurisdiction of the Association, held in its region in conformance with the Constitution, By-Laws, rules, regulations and policies of the Association. 2. Elect, from its membership, a chairperson. 3. Elect, from its membership, a representative to serve a three-year term on the Executive Committee. C. Membership 1. To be eligible to serve as a member of the Region Board of Managers, an individual shall be a: a. Member of the governing board of the region member school; or b. Chief executive of the governing organization (i.e. superintendent) of the region member school or their designee; or c. Principal of the region member school or their designee. 2. Each Region Board of Managers shall include at least one representative from each school within the region. Each school within the region shall have only one vote. The voting representative from each school shall be determined by the governing board of the member school. 3. The term of office of the members of the Region Board of Managers shall be one year. Each term to begin July 1 and to end June 30 the following year, or until his/her successor has been duly elected and qualified. Interps and Guidelines 2.4.1: RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE REGION BOARDS OF MANAGERS A. General Responsibilities: In fulfilling its duty to supervise and administer interscholastic activities in its region, the Region Board of Managers shall: 1. Create and publish to the region membership schedules of contests for its member schools in each of the sports/activities in which the region’s schools participate. 2. Create within the By-Laws, rules, regulations and policies of the UHSAA and publish to its membership, policies governing the conduct of intra-region contests among the region’s schools. 3. Conduct region tournaments/meets in those sports/activities that require them for advancement to state competitions. 4. Represent the schools in the region in making policies regarding competition in divisions when such are in place for a particular sport/activity. CONSTITUTION 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 18 5. Determine and publish tie-breaking procedures for teams and/or individuals regarding qualification to state competitions. 6. Determine the awards the region will present to schools and/or individuals, and provide for securing and presentation of such awards. 7. Such other responsibilities as assigned by the Board of Trustees, Executive Director and/or the Executive Committee. 8. Submit Region Board of Managers’ meeting agenda and minutes to UHSAA for posting on UHSAA website. B. Responsibilities Regarding Violations of UHSAA By-Laws, Rules, Regulations and/or Policies at Region Member Schools: 1. In cases in which there is not a dispute as to the occurrence of a violation (i.e. self-report of a violation by a school), the Region Board of Managers shall: a. Hear reports of violations and actions taken by the offending school in response to the violation; and b. Adopt recommendations regarding penalties to be imposed (see UHSAA By-Laws Article 7, Section 6) 1. The Chair of the Region Board of Managers or their designee shall notify the offending school’s representative, the Executive Director and any other affected parties within 24 hours of the recommendation adopted by the Region Board of Managers, including actions taken by the offending school. Written notification shall be delivered by the Chair or their designee to the principal of the offending school and Executive Director within three business days. 2. The recommendation of the Region Board of Managers will become binding 10 calendar days (or prior to the post season) after it is initially reported to the Executive Director, except in a case where a written request for a hearing before the Executive Committee is filed with the Executive Director prior to the recommendation becoming binding. Requests for hearings will only be considered when filed by the offending school, an affected member school or district, or by the Executive Staff of the UHSAA. 3. The written recommendation should include a description of the violation, the recommended penalty and information considered by the Board of Managers in adopting the recommendation. The Executive Director shall immediately forward the written Board of Managers recommendation to the members of the Executive Committee and the principal of each UHSAA member school along with the date on which the recommendation will become binding without a request for a hearing. 2. In cases in which there is dispute as to the occurrence of a violation (i.e. charge of a violation brought by another school in the region), the Region Board of Managers shall: a. Review the charge and supporting evidence, and b. Adopt a recommendation regarding: 1. The credibility of the charge, and 2. The sufficiency and credibility of the evidence supporting the charge. c. The recommendation shall be forwarded to the Executive Director. d. Review of a charge and the forwarding of a recommendation by a Region Board of Managers do not preclude action by entities within the UHSAA taken in the fulfillment of their duties and responsibilities under the UHSAA Constitution and By-Laws. CONSTITUTION 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 19 CONSTITUTION

SECTION 1: Action on Classification and Alignment A. The Board of Trustees shall assign each member high school to a classification and to a region within that classification. B. Final action on assignment of member schools to a classification and region alignment shall be taken only in properly scheduled and noticed meetings of the Board of Trustees, and only after the subject has been considered in at least two meetings, including the meeting in which the action is taken. C. In classifying and aligning schools for participation in Association activities, the Board of Trustees shall have plenary power to make such classification and alignments as shall promote the best interests of the Association. Interps & Guidelines 5.1.1: ALIGNMENT OF MEMBER SCHOOLS A. According to Articles 2 and 5 of the UHSAA Constitution, the Board of Trustees of the UHSAA has the responsibility and plenary authority for the classification of schools and the assignment of schools to a region within those classifications. In order to fulfill that responsibility, the Board of Trustees adopts format and procedures for aligning each of the UHSAA member schools into a classification and region. In considering the adoption of format and procedures for the alignment of schools, the Board of Trustees: 1. May take into account any factors that affect “fair and prudent competition in the activities sponsored by the Association” (UHSAA Constitution Article 2, Section 1-A-2-e). These may or may not include school enrollment including demographics, travel costs, time out of school, natural rivalries, competitive success, etc. 2. Shall permit any member school authority or governing organization of a member school to appear and promote or oppose the format and procedures under consideration or to counsel or advise the Board of Trustees regarding proposed format and procedures. B. Format for the 2027-2029 Alignment of Schools as Adopted by the Board of Trustees 1. In classifying and aligning schools for participation in Association activities, the Board of Trustees shall have plenary power to make such classification and alignments as shall promote the best interests of the Association. 2. Realignment shall be completed on a two year cycle. 3. Realignment shall consist of a general alignment and a football alignment. 4. Prior to the first consideration of assigned regions or divisions , any school may apply to a higher classification in the general alignment and/or the football alignment. 5. Prior to the first consideration of assigned regions or divisions, any school may apply to compete in a higher classification for a specific sport or activity if the school is already competing at that higher level in that sport or activity, or if it has finished with an average in the top 15 percent of its classification in that sport during the past three seasons. Application does not guarantee approval. Once a school is placed in a higher classification, it must remain there for that sport or activity for the full duration of the established two-year alignment. In the general alignment, schools will remain in their assigned classification and region during region competition. However, the school will compete in the higher classification for postseason competition. 6. Regions may be reduced to divisions by the Executive Committee depending on the sport. 7. Each classification shall qualify teams or individuals for post season as determined by the Executive Committee. C. Procedures for the 2027-2029 Alignment of Schools as Adopted by the Board of Trustees 1. Classifications are based on October 1 data for junior and sophomore classes, excluding self-contained students, as reported by the State Office of Education in even calendar years. 2. UHSAA member schools shall be placed into classifications based on a Composite Realignment Index (CRI) score. The CRI score is calculated using a combination of enrollment (size), socio-economic status (SES), and competitive performance. The number of schools in each classification shall be established by the Board of Trustees (BOT). Schools will be assigned to classifications based on a CRI score with 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 21 higher scores placed in higher classifications and lower scores placed in lower classifications. A school may submit an appeal for classification placement based on geographic considerations. The BOT will review all appeals and determine if an adjustment is warranted. The BOT retains the responsibility and final authority for alignment of all UHSAA member schools. 3. To accommodate geographic adjustments, regions may have schools in different classifications. 4. Region assignments shall be finalized in December of even calendar years. Region organizational meetings are conducted the following spring of odd calendar years with competition under the new alignment beginning the following August of odd calendar years. 5. For consideration during an established alignment, any school with at least 40% reduction in enrollment may appeal prior to January 15 of even calendar years to move down no more than one classification. 6. The minimum number of schools in each classification is as follows: 6A 21+ 5A 21+ 4A 21+ 3A 8+ 2A 8+ 1A 8+ 7. The minimum number of schools in each football classification is as follows: 6A 21+ 5A 21+ 4A 21+ 3A 8+ 2A 8+ 1A 8+ 8-Player 8+ D. A school directly affected by a change in placement during the meeting in which an alignment is established, may petition for a reconsideration of placement. Such a petition for reconsideration shall only be based on new information or new circumstances not previously considered by the Board of Trustees and shall be filed in writing with the Executive Director no more than 10 days following the action of the Board of Trustees establishing an alignment of schools. The Executive Director shall publish the petition to association member schools, the Executive Committee and to the members of the Board of Trustees and provide a means of accepting comment for a period of no less than 10 days following the initial publication of the petition. Reconsideration of the alignment regarding schools indicated by such petition(s) shall take place in a meeting of the Board of Trustees (see UHSAA Constitution, Article 2, Section 1-B8). CONSTITUTION 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 22 CONSTITUTION SECTION 1: Uniform Procedure for Hearings and Process for Appeals A. The Association shall establish a uniform procedure for hearing and deciding all disputes, questions and allegations of violations of the Association’s eligibility rules or any other issues which relate to the activities under the jurisdiction of the Association. B. Any person or member school subject to the authority of this Association who shall be charged with violating the Constitution, By-Laws or other rules and regulations of this Association shall be entitled to a hearing before the Association shall impose any penalty or sanction. C. Member districts’ boards of education, member governing boards of charter or private high schools, UHSAA member schools and students through their high school, shall have the right to appeal any adverse decision which affects their interests. An appeal must be filed with the Association within thirty (30) calendar days of the decision to be appealed. Interps & Guidelines 6.1.1: HEARINGS The Transfer Rule, Article 1, Section 9, of the UHSAA By-Laws sets the terms on which a student may transfer from one school to another. The Transfer Rule’s provisions bear directly on a student’s standing to request the hearing of any decision regarding a request to establish eligibility after a student transfers schools. Provided the student meets all other UHSAA and school/district eligibility requirements the Transfer Rule permits immediate sub-varsity participation and full varsity participation after the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests in those sports in which the student competed during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season in which the student is seeking eligibility. The member schools of the Association have voted over whelmingly in favor of a lenient restriction on transfers with specific and clear evidentiary requirements for granting any exception. This is the uniform procedure to be followed for hearing and deciding these matters. It should be noted that unless and until certain evidentiary requirements have been met and certified by the sending and receiving schools, the Association shall have no obligation or duty to recognize the application for an exception. In connection with hearings and appeals, that means that failure to meet the evidentiary standard is not a decision or a denial by the Association. The Association’s obligation to consider the application arises only after the evidentiary requirements are met. A. In all cases in which the facts of an alleged violation of the Association’s transfer rules of eligibility are undisputed, the Executive Director, pursuant to authorization to interpret the Constitution and By-Laws, together with such review committees as may be deemed necessary, may make a decision and rule on any such matter presented. B. In those cases in which the application is based on the evidence required by the Transfer Rule and its Interpretations and Guidelines, but the transfer is not approved, that would be a decision that would be subject to appeal pursuant to UHSAA Constitution Article 6, Section 1 C and Section 2. In such a case, that is, where the evidence supported the exception, but the exception was not granted, the Association may convene a hearings panel consisting of a single hearings officer or a group of three or more members of the Executive Committee and/or members of the Board of Trustees none of whom shall represent the same region as any party involved in the hearing. C. For all disputes, other than transfer rules of eligibility, such as questions and allegations of violations of the Association’s By-Laws, rules, regulations and/or policies shall be heard by a panel of the Association. 1. For such hearings, the Association may convene a hearings panel consisting of a single hearings officer or a group of three or more members of the Executive Committee and/or members of the Board of Trustees none of whom shall represent the same region as any party involved in the hearing.

(Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 35- 43. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Section1: . A session is defined as including: A. Minimum of 2.5 hours. B. 18-20 students as the optimum number for a three-hour session; otherwise, a session should be lengthened by ten minutes per each additional student beyond 20. Chambers may not be larger than 30 students. C. Election of a presiding officer. The presiding officer must be elected with a majority of the vote. If one candidate does not receive a majority of votes, eliminate the candidate with the fewest votes and vote again. If candidates are tied for the fewest number of votes, vote to determine which of the tied candidates should remain in contention. Repeat this process until one candidate receives a majority of votes. D. New seating chart (necessary accommodations for students with special needs may be made). F. New legislation that has not been debated in a previous session at that tournament. Section 2 . Recognizing Speakers A. When more than one speaker seeks the floor, the presiding officer must follow the precedence/ recency method: 1) First recognize students who have not spoken during the session. 2) Next recognize students who have spoken fewer times. 3) Then recognize students who spoke earlier (least recently). B. If a tournament is not using preset recency, before recency is established, the presiding officer should recognize speakers fairly and consistently. They may not link recognition of speakers to previous recognition of students asking questions, moving motions, or longest standing (standing time). Before precedence is established, the presiding officer should explain their recognition process and it must be fair, consistent and justifiable. All district tournaments must use preset, randomized recency in Congressional Debate beginning in 2022-2023. C. During any session, precedence/recency should not reset, to ensure that all students in a chamber have an equal opportunity to speak and receive evaluation from scorers. When a new session begins, precedence/recency may be reset along with a new seating chart, and election of a presiding officer. D. Scorers will include answers to questions when evaluating speeches. E. A speaker may yield time on the floor during debate (for questions or clarifications) but that speaker will remain in control of their three minutes (see #6 below regarding questioning). 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 188 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 3 . Speeches introducing legislation are allotted up to three minutes, followed by two minutes of questioning by other delegates. A student from the school (or at the national level, the district) who wrote the legislation gets the privilege of recognition (called authorship), regardless of precedence; otherwise the presiding officer may recognize a “sponsor” from the chamber, provided this recognition follows the precedence guidelines above. Regardless, this speech of introduction must be followed by two minutes of questions. Should no student seek recognition for the authorship/ sponsorship, the chamber will move to lay the legislation on the table until such time that a student is prepared to introduce it. Section 4 . The first negative speech must be followed by two minutes of questions. Section 5 . Following the first two speeches on legislation, the presiding officer will alternately recognize affirmative and negative speakers, who will address the chamber for up to three minutes, followed by one minute of questioning by other delegates. A. If no one wishes to oppose the preceding speaker, the presiding officer may recognize a speaker upholding the same side. B. When no one seeks the floor for debate, the presiding officer may ask the chamber if they are “ready for the question,” at which point, if there is no objection, voting may commence on the legislation itself. C. There is no “minimum cycle” rule; however, if debate gets “one-sided,” the chamber may decide to move the previous question. D. In the event a student speaks on the wrong side called for by the presiding officer and the error is not caught, the speaker shall be scored and the speech shall count in precedence, but the speaker must be penalized at least three points for not paying close attention to the flow of debate. E. In the event a student speaks on an item of legislation not currently being debated, said speech shall count in precedence, but zero points shall be awarded. Section 6. The presiding officer fairly and equitably recognizes members to ask questions following each speech. The presiding officer starts timing questioning periods when they have recognized the first questioner, and keeps the clock running continuously until the time has lapsed. There are two different questioning methods. A. Traditional questioning: Speakers are encouraged to ask brief questions, and may only ask one question at a time. Two-part/multiple-part questions are not allowed. There is no formal “permission to preface,” however; presiding officers should discourage students from making statements as part of questioning, since that is an abusive use of the limited time available. B. STATE WILL USE Direct questioning: The presiding officer will open the floor for questions following each speech. The presiding officer will recognize questioners for a cross-examination period of no more than 30 seconds. Questioners will be chosen according to a separate questioning recency. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 189 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 7. The presiding officer will pause briefly between speeches to recognize any motions from the floor; however, they should not call for motions (at the beginning of a session, the presiding officer should remind members to seek their attention between speeches). Section 8. Amendments must be presented to the presiding officer in writing with specific references to lines and clauses that change. This must be done in advance of moving to amend. A. The parliamentarian will recommend whether the amendment is “germane”—that is, it upholds the original intent of the legislation—otherwise, it is considered “dilatory.” The title of the legislation may be changed. B. A legislator may move to amend between floor speeches. Once that motion is made, the presiding officer will read the proposed amendment aloud and call for a second by one-third of those members present, unless they rule it dilatory. C. Should students wish to speak on the proposed amendment, the presiding officer will recognize them as per the standing precedence and recency, and the speech will be counted toward their totals, accordingly. D. Simply proposing an amendment does not guarantee an “author/sponsor” speech, and any speeches on amendments are followed by the normal one minute of questioning. E. Amendments are considered neutral and do not constitute an affirmative or negative speech on the original legislation. F. If there are no speakers or the previous question is moved, the chamber may vote on a proposed amendment without debating it. Section 9. All major voting (such as the main motion/ legislation) which a congressperson’s constituents should have a record of, shall be done with a counted vote. Secret balloting is used when voting for presiding officer. Section 10. Students should ask permission to leave and enter the chamber when it is in session (move a personal privilege). However, do not interrupt a speaker who is addressing the chamber. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 190 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 11. Use of Evidence (also see the section on Congressional Debate Evidence Rules) A. Visual aids are permitted in Congressional Debate, provided they do not require electronic retrieval devices in the chamber. B. All evidence used is subject to verification. Honesty and integrity are of utmost importance in legislative debate. Falsification or deliberate misuse of evidence may result in the legislator being suspended by tournament officials. C. The use of internet enabled electronic devices is permitted. Students may not use the internet to gain help from coaches, other students, or any person, such that it would prevent the speech from being the original work of the competitor. Electronic device use must comply with the “New Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” Section 12. Since the rules above ensure fairness for competition, they may not be suspended; the presiding officer should rule such motions out of order; except to extend questioning and allow for open chambers provided the tournament staff permits doing so. Section 13: Congressional Debate Legislation Guidelines Most legislation should have a national/domestic focus that the U.S. Congress would have jurisdiction over, taking the form of a bill. A bill establishes details behind how a particular law must work, including when it takes effect, how much tax levy would be appropriated (if applicable), how infractions/violations will be dealt with, etc. A bill will answer the who, what, when, where–and most specifically how–but it will never answer “why.” Legislators explain rationale behind bills in their speeches, and how a bill implements its solution can spark deeper, more meaningful debate. Writing an effective bill involves more time and research than researching one written by someone else. Students must ask themselves what the legislation does, who is involved (government agencies), where it happens, when it is feasible to take place and how much time is needed for implementation, and how it should be carried out (a plan of action). All of these questions must be answered in writing the sections of the bill, with thoughtful consideration as to how thoroughly each section explains its plank of implementing the overall bill’s plan of action. Resolutions are simply position statements on issues Congress does not have jurisdiction over (such as foreign issue, although a bill can suggest foreign aid), or further action (such as amending the Constitution). Resolutions lack the force of law, and never establish enforcement. Appropriate topics exhibit seriousness of purpose. The action proposed should be feasible, and such that the actual United States Congress might debate it. Topics should be debatable, meaning substantive argumentation exists on both sides. Legislation should be typed and double-spaced with line numbers, not exceeding one page. Capitalizing the words “WHEREAS” and “RESOLVED” in resolutions, and “SECTION” in bills, as well as inverse-indenting each clause or section helps to distinguish between ideas and concepts. The samples above show proper formatting. In the resolution, note the semicolon, and how it precedes the word “and” at the end of each “whereas” clause, and the phrase “now, therefore, be it” at the end of the last “whereas” clause. Note: Legislation that is submitted for consideration at the district and/or national tournament may be rejected if serious issues exist with the adherence to these guidelines. Templates for bills, resolutions, and resolutions to amend the Constitution are available online at www. speechanddebate.org . 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 191 SPEECH/DEBATE

Based on recommendations from the Congress Evidence Committee, the Board of Directors had a discussion of how evidence is currently used in Congressional Debate and the concerns surrounding students’ appropriate, substantiated, and ethical use of evidence in Congressional Debate speeches. The Board of Directors officially voted to adopt these Congressional Debate evidence rules for use during the 2017-2018 competition season and beyond. Section 1. Responsibilities of Contestants Reading Evidence in Congressional Debate A. Evidence defined . Debaters are responsible for the validity of all evidence they introduce in the debate. Evidence includes, but is not limited to: facts, statistics, or examples attributable to a specific, identifiable, authoritative source used to support a claim. Unattributed ideas are the opinion of the student competitor and are not evidence. B. Oral source citation . In all debate events, contestants are expected to, at a minimum, orally deliver the following when introducing evidence in a debate round: primary author(s)’name (last) and year of publication. Any other information such as source, author’s qualifications, etc., may be given, but is not required. Should two or more quotations be used from the same source, the author and year must be given orally only for the first piece of evidence from that source. Subsequently, only the author’s name is required. Oral citations do not substitute for the written source citation. The full written citation must be provided if requested by an opponent or judge. C. Written source citation . To the extent provided by the original source, a written source citation must include: 1. Full name of primary author and/or editor 2. Publication date 3. Source 4. Title of article 5. Date accessed for digital evidence 6. Full URL, if applicable 7. Author qualifications 8. Page number(s) D. Paraphrasing, authoritative source versus general understanding. If paraphrasing is used in a debate, the debater will be held to the same standard of citation and accuracy as if the entire text of the evidence were read. For example, if a debater references a specific theory by a specific author, the debater must also be able to provide an original source. If a debater were to reference social contract theory in general, that would not be an authoritative source that would require citation. However, if the debater references “John Locke’s Social Contract,” evidence would need to be available. E. Ellipses prohibited. In all debate events, the use of internal ellipsis (...) is prohibited unless it is a replication of the original document. Debaters may omit the reading of certain words; however, the text that is verbally omitted must be present in the text of what was read for opposing debaters and/or judges to examine. The portions of the evidence read including where the debater begins and ends must be clearly marked (as outlined in 7.1.G.2.). 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 192 SPEECH/DEBATE F. Availability of original source. 1. When challenged, the original source or copy of the relevant (as outlined in 7.1.F.2.) pages of evidence read in round must be available to the student making the challenge within two speeches. In all debate events, for reference, any evidence that is presented during the round must be made available to the opponent during the round if requested. 2. Original source(s) defined . Understanding that teams/individuals obtain their evidence in multiple ways, the original source for evidence may include, but is not limited solely to, one of the following: a. Accessing the live or displaying a copy of a web page (teams/individuals may access the internet to provide this information if requested). b. A copy of the page(s) the evidence is on, the page preceding, and the page following, or the actual printed (book, periodical, pamphlet, etc.) source. c. Copies or electronic versions of published handbooks (i.e., Baylor Briefs; Planet Debate, etc.). d. Electronic or printed versions or the webpage for a debate institute or the NDCA sponsored Open Evidence Project or similar sites. 3. Debaters, even if they have acquired the evidence other than by original research, are still responsible for the content and accuracy of the evidence they present and/or read. G. Distinguishing between which parts of each piece of evidence are and are not read in a particular round. In all debate events, debaters must mark their evidence in two ways: a. Oral delivery of each piece of evidence must be identified by a clear oral pause or by saying phrases such as “quote/unquote” or “mark the card.” The use of a phrase is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. Clear, oral pauses are left solely to the discretion of the judge(s) and parliamentarian. b. The written text must be marked in some way to clearly indicate the portions read in the debate. In the written text the standard practices of underlining what is read, or highlighting what is read, and/or minimizing what is unread, is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. The clarity of other means of marking evidence is left to the discretion of the judge. H. Private communication prohibited. Private, personal correspondence or communication between an author and the debater is inadmissible as evidence. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 193 SPEECH/DEBATE Section.2. Definitions of Evidence Violations in Congressional Debate A. “Distortion” exists when the textual evidence itself contains added and/or deleted word(s), which significantly alters the conclusion of the author (e.g., deleting ‘not’ ; adding the word ‘not’ ). Additionally, failure to bracket added words would be considered distortion of evidence. B. “Non-existent evidence” means one or more of the following: a. The debater citing the evidence is unable to provide the original source or copy of the relevant pages when requested by their opponent, judge, or tournament official. b. The original source provided does not contain the evidence cited. c. The evidence is paraphrased but lacks an original source to verify the accuracy of the paraphrasing. d. The debater is in possession of the original source, but declines to provide it to a student who challenges, the chair, or the parliamentarian upon request. C. “Clipping” occurs when the debater claims to have read the complete text of highlighted and/or underlined evidence when, in fact, the contestant skips or omits portions of evidence. D. “Straw argument” A “straw argument” is a position or argumentative claim introduced by an author for the purpose of refuting, discrediting or characterizing it. Reliance on a straw argument occurs in a debate round when a debater asserts incorrectly that the author supports or endorses the straw argument as their own position. Note: A debater who acknowledges using a “straw argument” when verbally first read in the round, would not be misrepresenting evidence. However, if the debater fails to acknowledge the use of a “straw argument” and their opponent questions the use of such an argument, then that debater has committed an evidence violation. Section 3. Procedures for Raising Evidence Questions During a Congressional Debate Session The procedures for making an In-round evidence question are as follows: A. Congressional Debate entries must rise to a point of information after a speech to formally request a copy of the evidence cited, the citation, or the original source of evidence. When requested during the point of information, the presiding officer will instruct the debater being challenged to produce the copy of the evidence, citation, or original source. The debater being challenged must produce the requested materials in a timely fashion. Should a debater feel they are not receiving the information they requested in a timely fashion, they may rise to another point of information for the presiding officer and parliamentarian to address the situation. B. Debaters who request the information may receive the evidence from the presiding officer within a period of two speeches. The round would not be put on hold for the request to be completed. For example, if a debater rises to a point of order after speech #4, then by the conclusion of speech #6, the requested evidence should be presented to the presiding officer. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 194 SPEECH/DEBATE C. If after reviewing the evidence in question, a debater feels that an evidence violation has occurred, they may submit a formal allegation by completing an evidence challenge form (see Appendix) and, after making a motion to approach the chair, the debater will present the form to the presiding officer and parliamentarian. Section 4. Penalties for Resolving Evidence Violations During Congressional Debate A. All evidence challenges must occur during the session of Congressional Debate where an alleged violation took place, and should happen before a vote on the pending legislation. If the concern arises during the last cycle of speeches, the parliamentarian may grant a challenge after the vote, prior to the first speech on a new piece of legislation. B. Parliamentarians are responsible for resolving disputes between debaters regarding oral citations (7.1.B.); and written source citations (7.1.C.). When the parliamentarian has such a dispute in the round, the parliamentarian must submit the protest form to the tabulation committee. All protest forms will be submitted to the tabulation committee. a. The parliamentarian will determine the legitimacy of the challenge, and if the parliamentarian considers the request justified, the debater making the allegation will move a point of order to address the allegation to the chamber. b. The debater being challenged will be recognized by the presiding officer for a response to the evidence violation. c. The parliamentarian will evaluate the legitimacy and severity of the charge and make a recommendation to the presiding officer for action. The recommendation may be charged against either student involved in the dispute. Depending upon the severity of the offense, the parliamentarian may opt to censure the debater(s). Refer to section 7.5. for an outline of the severity of offenses and corresponding actions. d. The presiding officer will announce the parliamentarian’s decision and recognize either/both debaters for consequent action. C. Procedures for Appealing the Parliamentarian’s Decision a. An appeal can only be made if the issue-in-question has been raised, by a student, in the round. Appeals may only be made if the parliamentarian has misapplied, misinterpreted, or ignored a rule. b. A coach or school-affiliated adult representative must notify the tabulation committee of intent to submit an appeal of the parliamentarian’s ruling within 20 minutes of the end of session as recorded by the Parliamentarian for that chamber. i. The coach must submit the post-round appeal to the ombuds/tournament director within 10 minutes of the formal notification of the intent to appeal. The allegation must be in writing and articulate the specific evidence violation and ruling that is being challenged. ii. If the ombuds/tournament director determines the appeal has merit, both parties involved in the original dispute will be given 20 minutes to respond. iii. The tournament director/ombuds/committee of representatives will make a decision and has the discretion of extending the time limits for these actions if circumstances do not allow a coach or school-affiliated adult to be available within the prescribed time limits. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 195 SPEECH/DEBATE 3. At the district tournament level, the committee’s decision to disqualify a student’s rankings for that session can be appealed by the coach or school- affiliated adult. The following procedure should be followed: a. The appeal must be submitted in writing to the ombuds within 10 minutes of the notification to disqualify. b. The ombuds will then submit the appeal to the tournament director/committee. Both sides will be able to provide written explanations and supporting evidence to defend their individual side. c. A decision will be rendered in a timely manner. The decision of the committee shall be final and cannot be appealed. d. No elimination session may occur before a ruling is made. If the appeal is successful, any student(s) involved will receive the appropriate rank as if the evidence challenge was never called into question. Section.5. Penalties for Evidence Violations in Congressional Debate A. If the parliamentarian determines that an entry has violated one of the rules listed in 7.1(A-D, F-H) (oral citation, written citation, indication of parts of card read or not read, use of private communication), the parliamentarian must notify the judge(s) of the violation. The judge(s) and parliamentarian may at their discretion disregard the evidence, diminish the credibility given to the evidence, take the violation into account (solely or partially) in the ranking of chamber participants, or take no action. These offenses are considered minor and a parliamentarian sanction is the only prescribed penalty. B. If a debater(s) commits an evidence violation of “distortion” (7.2.A.), uses “nonexistent evidence” (7.2.B.), uses a “straw argument” (7.2.C.) or the use of “ellipses” (7.1.E.) such action will result in the debater(s) committing the evidence violation not being ranked by the judge(s) and parliamentarian. These offenses are considered major and censure by the parliamentarian would be applied. C. Evidence infractions violate the Code of Honor. Depending on the severity, an offense may result in the notification of said offense to the contestant’s high school administration, disqualification, etc. Section.6. Tournament Adjustments in Congressional Debate A. Under no circumstance will a tournament or part of a tournament be re-run because of a violation of these rules. B. In the case of censure, all ranks and decisions made prior to the start of the round being protested stand and no revision of past session ranks will take place. Penalties listed in 7.4. will be applied. C. When a session has been held between the session being appealed and a final decision regarding the protest, the result of that session will be recorded as follows: a. If the protest is upheld, all ranks and scores will remain as recorded. The evidence violation would apply only to the session in which it occurred and not affect prior or subsequent sessions. b. If the appeal is upheld, the judge and/or parliamentarian will restore any ranks and scores that were earned by that debater. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 196 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 7: Sample Congressional Debate Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 197 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 8: Sample Congressional Debate Presiding Officer Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 198 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 9: Congressional Debate Rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) DIRECTIONS: RATE each speech 1-8 points, with one being the worst, eight being the best, providing comments to justify your rating, with constructive suggestions for improvement. At the end of the session, you will holistically and comparatively RANK students, on a separate form. Scorer/Judges will rank 1-9 (tie all those at that point 9). Parliamentarians will rank all the way through with no ties. Remember: You do not have to rank by number of speeches, it is the quality overall of students throughout the round. The Presiding Officer receives the equivalent of 1 speech per hour based on their quality of running the house and should be ranked accordingly as well. When rating, consider the following elements and comment accordingly below. 2 Pts PARLIAMENTARY PROCEDURE (clear in explaining protocols and rulings); 2Pts RECOGNITION (fair and efficient in recognizing speakers and questioners, and maintains appropriate speaker precedence and recency); 2 Pt CONTROL (maintains decorum of delegates, and willing to rule dilatory motions/business out of order); 1 pt DEMEANOR (fosters a respectful, professional, and collegial atmosphere); 1 pt COMMUNICATION (overall use of language, avoiding unnecessary verbiage). Speaker points/Speech (These are used to help evaluate each speech and the speaker overall for final ranking. Speaker points here do not impact congress Rankings or placement in Utah Debate) 1 PT ORIGINALITY OF THOUGHT (extent to which speech advances debate or merely repeats previously stated ideas; whether speaker refutes opposing arguments); 2 PT ORGANIZATION AND UNITY (while speeches that respond to other arguments advanced in the session are often spontaneous and extemporaneous, the speaker should attempt to organize ideas and have cohesiveness); 2 PT EVIDENCE AND LOGIC (cites credible sources and warrants claims accordingly that is relevant and supports claim/ideas); 2 PT DELIVERY (extemporaneous vs. reading a manuscript, seriousness of purpose, style and poise, articulation, inflection, enunciation). 1 PT How well the speaker ANSWERS QUESTIONS for each speech should be considered: logic, reasonable, uses evidence when needed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 199 SPEECH/DEBATE

2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 23 CONSTITUTION 2. The decision of a hearings panel on those issues is subject to appeal pursuant to UHSAA Constitution Article 6, Section 1 C and Section 2. 3. Hearings shall be recorded and made available at a cost to affected parties. No recording of a hearing shall be provided until payment is received. D. Written decisions of any hearing will be provided upon request. The cost of providing a written decision shall be borne by the party requesting the written decision and payment shall be received prior to a written decision. Interps & Guidelines 6.1.2: CONTEST OFFICIALS A. Once the game officials have determined that a contest has ended, there can be no protest of the outcome of that game. Decisions by contest officials are not subject to an appeal. Players may not appeal an ejection. SECTION 2: Appeals Panels A. For matters other than student eligibility, an appeals panel shall review the evidence presented at the hearing and may, in its discretion, request additional written materials. The decision on appeal shall be limited to the evidentiary record presented in the hearing. The appeals panel’s decision is final. B. Decisions of a hearings panel regarding transfer of eligibility may be appealed to a separate appeals panel established by the Utah Legislature. The statute describes the nature of the appeal and the procedures. There is an established appeals panel for an Association decision regarding a request to establish eligibility after a student transfers schools. The appeals panel shall consist of the following three members: 1. a judge or attorney who is not employed by, or contracts with, a school; 2. a retired educator, principal, or superintendent; and 3. a retired athletic director or coach. C. A review and decision by the appeals panel is limited to whether the hearings panel properly followed the Association’s rules and procedures in regard to a decision regarding a request to establish eligibility after a student transfers schools. The appeals panel’s decision is final. Interps & Guidelines 6.2.1: APPEALS A. In cases involving any appeal of a decision issued by a hearings panel, an appeals panel shall consist of a group of three or more members of the Executive Committee and/or members of the Board of Trustees none of whom shall represent the same region as any party involved in the appeal and none of whom served on the hearings panel for the parties involved in the hearing. B. Written decisions of any appeal will be provided upon request. The cost of providing a written decision shall be borne by the party requesting the written decision and payment shall be received prior to a written decision. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 24 BY-LAWS SECTION 1: Eligibility of Players A. To be eligible to participate in Association activities, a student must be enrolled in and attend a member high school or qualify for participation as a ninth grade student and must satisfy all of the Association’s eligibility requirements. A student who meets all other eligibility requirements and is not enrolled at a member high school may be eligible to participate in Association activities provided the student is enrolled in ninth grade in a school other than a high school (see “C.” Below) or all of the following apply: 1. The student is legitimately enrolled in grades 9-12 in one of the following school/educational pro grams, which do not provide an athletic/activity program in which the student intends to participate. a. A public charter school b. An online school c. A private school d. A district alternative school e. A home school 2. The school at which the student intends to participate is either: a. The UHSAA member high school where initial eligibility is established, or b . The UHSAA member high school from which the student withdrew for the purpose of attending home school or UHSAA non-member on-line or a UHSAA non-member charter high school or a UHSAA non-member private high school. 3. The school at which the student is enrolled meets all legal requirements to allow its students to participate. B. A student establishes initial eligibility upon the first day of attendance at any high school, or its equivalent, or by trying out for and being selected for membership on a high school team. C. Students may participate in Association activities while enrolled in the ninth grade if the school permits. Ninth grade students enrolled in schools other than a high school (junior high, middle school, etc.), if otherwise eligible, may participate in Association activities with an appropriate high school. A ninth grade student enrolled in a school other than a high school who tries out for and is selected for membership on the team of a member high school has, by that action, established initial eligibility at that high school. A student who has established eligibility, at a school, even though they did not attend that school, shall be considered to have attended that school for the purposes of eligibility. If a student then transfers to a different school, or should that student enroll in a different high school for the 10th grade, that student should be subject to the requirements of the Association’s transfer rule (Article I Section 9). D. Any student who is suspended from a member school for violation of the Safe Schools provision of that school’s governing board shall be declared ineligible for participation (including practice) in any activity for a period equal to any suspension, bar or dismissal but in no case shall the period exceed twelve (12) months. If the student is transferred to another school, the suspension will follow that student and apply at the new school as fully as at the prior school. That student shall also be subject to the requirements of the Transfer Rule. BY-LAWS ARTICLE 1: ELIGIBILITY OF PLAYERS 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 25 Interps & Guidelines 1.1.1: NINTH GRADE STUDENTS & JR./SR. HIGH SCHOOL COMPETITION A. Ninth grade students who are members of a junior high school student body may participate at an appropriate high school if such participation is approved by their local board of education. Any 9th, 10th, 11th or 12th grade student participating on a high school team will be governed by the rules of the UHSAA whether attending a three-year high school, a four-year high school or a separate junior high school. The names of all members of these teams must be included on an eligibility list. B. High school teams (9th grade, 10th grade, junior varsity, varsity, etc.) may play any other member high school team or junior high school team consisting only of 9th grade students. High school teams or individuals may not compete, practice, nor try out with or against any students below the ninth grade. Exceptions: 1. Eighth grade students may try out for competitive cheer or drill team in the spring at the designated time established by the high school. 2. Seventh and eighth grade students of six-year schools may participate in music with those grades 9 through 12. (See music policy B.2) 3. Students can participate in individual wrestling tournaments, not representing their school, after the start date of wrestling on the UHSAA calendar. All UHSAA weight management and contest limitations apply to these tournaments. These tournaments may include participants not enrolled in high school. 4. Seventh and eighth grade students of six-year schools may practice only in speech and debate with students in grades 9-12. C. A ninth grade student who has participated on a junior high team, or its equivalent, during a specific sports activity season is ineligible to participate on a high school team in the same sport if it is during the same sports activity season as the high school. D. Initial eligibility is established by attending the high school, or its equivalent, as a student or trying out for and being selected as a member of a high school team, whichever comes first. E. Ninth grade high school teams may exist at any member high school. Such teams will be high school teams only if the team and coaches are under the authority and regulation of a member high school. Ninth grade high school teams and their individual members are subject to the same rules, regulations, by-laws, etc. as all other UHSAA member high school teams and their members. Only one freshman team in any sport for each gender may exist at a member high school. Q & A: Ninth Grade Eligibility Q. How does a ninth grader establish eligibility at a high school? A. Either by attending a high school, or its equivalent, OR making a high school team. If a ninth grader, at a junior high, tries out but does not make the high school team, then they have not established their eligibility at that high school, but they have used a sport season. Interps & Guidelines 1.1.2: CO-OP RULE A. When a given sport is not available at the UHSAA member high school where a student attends and thereby has established eligibility, the student may become eligible for that specific sport at another UHSAA member high school. In order to activate that eligibility, the student must secure written approval of both principals under one of the following circumstances: 1. Students attending a UHSAA member charter high school or a UHSAA member private high school: a. Eligibility is only available at the UHSAA member district high school in the attendance area where the student’s custodial parent or legal guardian resides (neither a power of attorney nor a district or school guardianship will suffice) or at a UHSAA member district high school from which the student withdrew for the purpose of attending a UHSAA member charter high school or a UHSAA member private high school. Charter high school and private high school students may only be eligible at a district high school for sports or activities which are not available at their charter high school or private high school. Students may continue to attend their charter high school or private high school while participating at the district high school. BY-LAWS 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 26 b. If the UHSAA member district high school in the attendance area where the student’s custodial parent or legal guardian resides or the district high school from which the student withdrew for the purpose of attending a UHSAA member charter high school or a UHSAA member private high school does not offer a given sport, then eligibility is available for that specific sport at another UHSAA member high school provided the student secures written approval of both principals and approved by the UHSAA. c. If the student attends a non-UHSAA member charter or private high school or is home schooled, he/she must follow all dual enrollment rules set by the Utah State Board of Education for participation. The student must attend any classes required for participation in their sport at the district high school consistent with state board of education rules and policy (see Section 14). 2. High school students attending a UHSAA member district high school: eligibility may be obtained at any UHSAA member school provided the student transfers to the desired school and gains full-time status at the new school. After the conclusion of that sport season, the student may not remain at new school without loss of eligibility in sports that are offered at the original school for up to one year, as stipulated in the UHSAA By-Laws. Upon re-enrolling at the original school of eligibility, the student is immediately eligible for other sports offered at the home school. 3. Ninth grade students attending a junior high/middle school who have established eligibility at a member high school: may co-op to another member high school and remain attending their current junior high/middle school unless there is a ninth grade at the transfer high school. All other eligibility rules of the Utah High School Activities Association still apply. B. A student may not co-op to a charter or private school unless item A1b applies. Interps & Guidelines 1.1.3: EXHIBITION ATHLETES OR UNATTACHED COMPETITORS Athletes must compete for his or her school as an eligible member of that team. So called “exhibition” athletes or “unattached” competitors are not eligible to participate in UHSAA sponsored competitions. Interps &Guidelines 1.1.4: TRANSGENDER PARTICIPATION In accordance with federal law and state law regarding the protection of women’s sports, UHSAA reaffirms its commitment to fair competition and the integrity of female athletics. All students shall be required to use the gender designation on their original, unamended birth certificate for participation in UHSAA sanctioned sports. It will be the responsibility of the member school and the principal to verify they have followed this policy. The UHSAA will rely on such a verification to acknowledge that the school and the principal have determined that the students listed on a gender specific sports team are eligible for participation (See By-Laws Article 9). Interps & Guidelines 1.1.5: INELIGIBLE STUDENT-ATHLETE RESTRICTIONS A. An athlete may try out or practice at the discretion of the school: 1. Having been suspended for an ejection 2. Having been suspended as a result of the drugs, alcohol and tobacco rule after fulfilling the requirements specified within the rule 3. Having been suspended as a result of local school or team rules 4. Having been declared ineligible because of the scholastic rule 5. Having had a request for a waiver of ineligibility denied. B. An athlete may not try out nor practice with the team under the following situations: 1. Having incurred a safe schools violation 2. Being in violation of the age rule 3. Being in violation of the years of eligibility rule 4. Being in violation of the sports season rule BY-LAWS 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 27 C. A student who is ineligible to represent his/her school on any varsity, junior varsity, sophomore or freshmen team, whether it is pre-season, region or post-season competition shall not: 1. Be in uniform on competition day 2. Warm up with the team 3. Be introduced as a member of the team Interps & Guidelines 1.1.6: RATIONALE FOR ELIGIBILITY RULES A. The right to and need for an education is paramount and superior to any privilege a student may enjoy to participate in interscholastic activities. However, because many activities are high-profile in high school, they can become over-emphasized and the target of manipulation by several different interested groups. It is the rare and exceptional athlete, for example, that can move from high school sports to college athletics. Unfortunately, not every student or the student’s parents may recognize that fact. To protect individual students from the effects of over-emphasis on activities and athletic competition, which may interfere with the more important regular progression of the student’s education, the following is provided as some of the prominent rationale for Attendance, Sports Season and certain other rules within the By-Laws of this Association. The listing here of these rationales should not be considered as the only basis for these rules: 1. To provide equality of eligibility among athletes. Each student is afforded the same number of years of eligibility without regard to number of years it takes to complete the high school curriculum. 2. To prevent “red shirting” or holding back of athletes not for scholastic reasons but merely to gain a perceived advantage by affording them an additional year of eligibility at a time when they would be older and generally more experienced and mature. Moreover, the absence of a “red shirt” rule also prevents marginal coaches from manipulating a student’s academic progress with promises or even misleading suggestions. 3. Unfair displacement of other student athletes. 4. To permit a greater number of students to start and play because the number of starting team positions is finite and the overall number of team positions generally is limited. 5. To keep interscholastic activities competitive (providing for a “level playing field”) and safe by allowing students of relative equal maturity to compete. 6. To prevent exploitation by those seeking to obtain transfers or to delay a student’s normal progress in school. 7. To be responsible to member schools and each student-athlete. If participation is permitted beyond four years, there would be no rationale for denying requests for students who might not meet graduation requirements at the prescribed time. This could result in unfair competition. Moreover, it would create environments for manipulation of students and a delay in academic progress. 8. To discourage students transferring from one school to another for athletic purposes. Again, where such transfers are prohibited, it limits the ability of those who would manipulate students to do so. 9. To prevent enrollment by a student for the sole purpose of increasing his/her athletic skills and abilities. 10. To prevent injury to students who are less physically and emotionally mature than others. 11. To discourage students from delaying completion of their high school education. 12. To discourage students from interrupting their education. 13. To graduate students on time so that they do not become an undue financial burden on the taxpayers of Utah. BY-LAWS 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 28 BY-LAWS SECTION 2: Age Rule No student shall be eligible to participate in Association activities who has reached nineteen (19) years of age prior to the first day of September of the school year in which such participation is intended. SECTION 3: Sport Season Rule A. No student shall participate in Association activities in more than four seasons in any one activity after entering the ninth grade. B. A student shall have no more than one season of eligibility per sport per year. C. A school may sponsor an activity only once in any school year. Interps & Guidelines 1.3.1: SPORTS SEASON RULE A. Participation in a sports season ends at the conclusion of a student’s participation in the sport. This includes, without limitation, the following: 1. A student’s participation in a tryout for a sport is considered the beginning of that student’s sports season for that sport. In the event a student is not chosen for the school’s program in that sport or is chosen and later terminated from the school’s sport program as a result of action by the coach or administration, is considered the end of the sports season for that student. 2. If the student withdraws from the tryout or participation in that sport, that is considered the end of the student’s sports season for that sport. 3. A student who has had a first tryout and made a high school team will not be permitted to withdraw from the high school team to play club sports and then rejoin the high school team in that sport in that year . A second tryout for the high school team will not be premitted after a student has participated in club sports in that sport in that year. 4. Once a student has exhausted eligibility for a sport season, the student may not participate in that sport in that year at any other member school. 5. A student who has tried out for a sport program and was not chosen or who was terminated or suspended from the school’s sport program is ineligible to participate (or practice) in that sport during that sport season at any other member school. 6. The end of the sport season as defined by the Association. SECTION 4: Years of Eligibility Rule At the time a student first enters the ninth grade of a high school or an equivalent level of education in any other system, that student shall have four consecutive years of eligibility for Association activities. SECTION 5: Participation on a Team of Higher Institution No student shall be eligible to represent his or her school in interscholastic competition who has ever participated on the team of an institution higher than that of secondary grade. Interps & Guidelines 1.5.1: PLAYING ON A TEAM OF HIGHER INSTITUTION For purposes of this rule, practicing is also interpreted as playing. One-day auditions are permitted, as long as there is no coaching in the audition; and, workouts and/or tryouts for seniors after their high school season is over will not jeopardize eligibility in another sport. College sponsored club teams are the same as college or university teams. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 29 BY-LAWS SECTION 6: Amateur Rule A. In order to protect the high school athlete from exploitation, undue influence or unthinking action which may jeopardize a student’s athletic future, the following rule definitions and interpretations shall apply to participants in athletic programs of member schools: an amateur sports person is one who engages in sport solely for the pleasure and the physical, mental and social benefits derived there from. A student must be an amateur to be eligible to represent his or her high school. An athlete has forfeited his or her right to compete as an amateur, and has thereby become ineligible for further high school competition, by any of the following actions: 1. Having knowingly competed as a member of a team which included professional athletes in organized athletic competition or against a team composed all or in part of professionals. 2. Having competed for money in any organized athletic activity. 3. Having competed under an assumed name in any organized athletic activity. 4. Having accepted an award in non-school athletic activities which he or she has converted into cash by sale or by pawning. 5. Having signed a professional athletic contract. Interps & Guidelines 1.6.1: AMATEUR RULE A. The amateur rule applies to those athletic activities which are recognized and sponsored by the Utah High School Activities Association as part of the interschool program. B. Competition with or against professionals in individual sports is excluded from Section 6 provided no money is received by the amateur. C. It is permissible for a player to accept necessary meals, lodging and transportation if such are accepted in service rather than in money or any other material form. D. Competing for a cash prize is interpreted as competing either as an individual or as a member of a team for cash award. It matters not whether the amount awarded as a cash prize is only sufficient to cover expenses. Students who compete as members of teams in athletic events where cash prizes are offered or awarded are ineligible for further high school athletic competition. E. The ineligibility described in Article 1 Section 6 only relates to the sport in which the professional contract was signed. F. Although a student may accept money for the use his or her name, image, and likeness, doing so in the following manner will be considered a violation of the Amateur Rule: 1. Wearing a school team uniform or any identifying school insignia while appearing in any advertisement, promotional activity or endorsement for any commercial product or service; or 2. Lending his/her name and team affiliation for purposes of commercial endorsement. Any appearances by students for nonprofit organizations must be approved by the Board of Trustees. This provision is not intended to restrict the right of any student to participate in a commercial endorsement provided there is no school team or school affiliation. SECTION 7: Prohibition of Awards Individual participants of any interscholastic activity sponsored and/or approved by the UHSAA shall not accept any cash award. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 30 BY-LAWS SECTION 8: Scholastic Rule A. To be eligible to participate in Association sanctioned activities, a student: 1. Must be a full-time student in the school he or she intends to represent, or otherwise comply with all Utah State Board of Education dual enrollment requirements; 2. Cannot fail more than one subject in the preceding grading period (for purposes of this rule, a failure in a multi-period subject shall be counted as the number of failures equal to the number of periods in the class); and, must have obtained a minimum grade point average (GPA) of 2.0, for the preceding grading period, based on a 4.0 scale or its equivalent. a. A student who has failed to meet the minimum requirements set forth shall be ineligible for participation in UHSAA activities throughout the next grading period, provided however, that deficiencies in the final grading period of the school year may be made up prior to the first term of the succeeding year by any method acceptable to the school district or the member private school. Deficiencies must be made up in the same subject area. b. Eligibility under this rule is determined when grades are posted. Grades are “posted” when the school registrar enters all grades electronically and are available to students, parents and teachers. In no case may the posting date be more than five (5) school days following the last day of the grading period. Grade changes after the posting date cannot restore lost eligibility, except for a documented clerical error. c. These scholastic regulations are the minimum required for participation in Association activities. Nothing in this rule shall prevent local boards of education or governing boards of charter or private schools from establishing standards, related with grades, that exceed those of the Association. Any such rule, however, is not binding on the Association. Interps & Guidelines 1.8.1: FULL-TIME STATUS & SCHOLASTIC ELIGIBILITY A. For the purposes of UHSAA eligibility, a full-time student is defined as a student who is enrolled at a UHSAA member high school for at least half of the periods offered at that high school OR who is a senior on-track for graduation. Parent approved Ed-Release periods count as periods of enrollment at a school. If a student is dual enrolled equally at two schools, the school where the student initially enrolls is determined to be the file holder and the school where full-time status applies. Any exceptions to the definition of a full-time student must be submitted in writing by the member school principal and approved by the UHSAA. B. For uniformity and for clear evidence of continued academic performance, for the purposes of the scholastic rule, a grading period can be no fewer than nine weeks. C. The scholastic regulations apply to students who are in the 10th, 11th, and 12th grades. The scholastic regulations do not apply to the first grading period of a ninth-grade student. However, scholastic regulations do apply to subsequent grading periods of any ninth-grade students at a high school, junior high, middle school or any other equivalent level of education who has established eligibility at a member high school as provided in the by-laws. D. A student who is ineligible at the conclusion of a grading period or who changes schools to avoid ineligibility, cannot be scholastically eligible before the end of this nine week period. E. Students who are scholastically ineligible for a grading period shall not represent their school. F. Incompletes (I), no grades (NG) and no credits (NC) are considered failures and must be factored into the grade point average (GPA) until made up. The GPA must be recalculated once an I, NG or NC has been made up, with the new grade replacing the deficiency. A recalculation of the GPA would also need to be done if deficiencies are replaced during the summer grading period. In order to replace the deficiency obtained during the final grading period, the new grade must be earned in the same subject area and must come from a 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 31 BY-LAWS summer program that has been approved by the school district, charter or private school. Deficiencies, for purposes of this rule, include any letter grade. No other makeup work is accepted to gain academic eligibility during the school year. G. Compliance with scholastic eligibility requirements for a home school student shall be demonstrated in compliance with state statute. The statute is found in Utah Code, Title 53A, Chapter 11, Section 102.6 accessed at the following link: https://le.utah.gov/xcode/Title53A/Chapter11/53A-11-S102.6.html?v=C53A- 11-S102.6_1800010118000101. Subsections 5-14 of this section of state statute deal specifically with academic eligibility of home school students. Q & A: Scholastic Eligibility, Summer Makeup and Recalculating the GPA Q1. Does an “Advisory” class that meets once a week count toward a student’s eligibility? A1. Because seat time and credit for an “Advisory” class varies from school to school, it is up to the discretion of the member school/district to decide whether or not the “Advisory” class counts. Q2. How soon can a student declared scholastically ineligible at the end of the first grading period become scholastically eligible? A2. The student could not become scholastically eligible until grades are posted for the succeeding grading period and only if the student met the eligibility standards required. Q3. Can midterms or another formative assessment be used to restore eligibility prior to grades being posted at the end of a grading period? A3. NO! Only final grades for a grading period may be used to restore eligibility. Q4. What if grades for a college class are not available at the end of the high school grading period? A4. Eligibility at the end of the high school grading period would be determined by the grades posted by the high school and then re-evaluated when the grades are posted from the off-campus class. Q5. If a student was taking all classes on a college campus and grades were only issued on a semester basis how would you determine their eligibility for first and third terms? A5. Eligibility would be determined when the student’s grades are posted. Q6. If a student fails an elective class, can they take any elective to make it up? A6. No. Deficiencies replaced during the summer must be earned in the same subject area whether it was a core or an elective (i.e. social science, foreign language, art, applied tech). Q7. Can a student attend summer school and count that as a grading period? A7. No, but classes taken during the summer can replace deficiencies in the prior grading period. Q8. How do you recalculate the GPA after a summer makeup credit has been entered? A8. When recalculating the GPA, replace the failing or deficient grade from the last term with the new grade earned during the summer from the same subject area. For example, a student with eight classes fails English fourth term and then earns a “B” in a summer English makeup class. Replace the “F” in English with the “B” earned. Divide by eight classes, not nine. In the case where a “P” is the standard grade given for remediation courses, the “F” earned during the last term would be replaced with the “P” earned during the summer remediation. The GPA would be recalculated using the “P” in place of the “F”. Recalculate the GPA using only grades which generate a point value. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 32 BY-LAWS SECTION 9: Transfer Rule A. The Transfer Rule is an integral part of the Association’s ability to create, administer and maintain the valuable and unique form of competition it offers. This unique form of competition is a carefully constructed system that promotes competitive balance and serves the mission and purpose of education-based sports and activities. Association sports and activities are intended to foster a sense of community as well as to teach teamwork and discipline. Other sporting organizations exist which promote free player movement and are primarily designed to promote athletic development of the individual and provide a showcase for the athletic talents of those individuals. These organizations do not share the primary purposes of the Association and therefore cannot provide the unique type of competition created and maintained by the Association. Efforts randomly to impose adjustments or favoritism on these rules damage the Association and, in turn, damage all the students who either participate in an Association sport/activity or who support them, from cheerleaders to band members to drill teams to parents. The Association is committed to maintaining its unique form of competition. A student changing eligibility from one school (sending school) to another school (receiving school) shall be considered a transferring student. For information and record keeping purposes, the sending and receiving schools shall cooperate with each other and the Association. The Transfer Rule applies to all athletes and is applicable to all sports in which the student competed during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season. Competition is defined as a student competing in a contest at any level. B. A student shall be ineligible for contests at the varsity level until after the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests in those sports in which the student competed at any level during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season in which the student is seeking eligibility. See Interps & Guidelines 2.2.2 D and E, which indicates: For the purpose of the transfer rule in the sports of Swimming, Tennis, Track and Wrestling, the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests is determined by the number of allowable varsity team events for that sport: Swimming 7; Tennis 9; Track 6; Wrestling 8. In no case may an individual participate in more than the first 50% of the allowable varsity contests per individual. For the purpose of the transfer rule, the following allowable varsity contest limitations constitute the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests: Baseball 13; Basketball 12; Competitive Cheerleading 2; Cross Country 5; Drill Team 2; Football 5; Golf 5; Lacrosse 9; Soccer 9; Softball 14; Volleyball 14. [Students who transfer after the Competition Start Date will be subject to 30 calendar days of ineligibility (or 50% of the Maximum Number of Contests) in that sport, whichever is more. The UHSAA Sport Season Rule, Article 1, Section 3, will apply to a student who has tried out and/or competed in the same sport in the same sport season.] C. In a case of a subsequent transfer by a student who does not meet the criteria for a transfer rule exception, the student is ineligible for ALL varsity level competition for one (1) year from the date of first attendance at the receiving school in those sports in which the student competed at any level during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season in which the student is seeking eligibility. D. Transferring students may compete at the varsity level, without penalty, in those sports in which the student HAS NOT competed during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season in which the student is seeking eligibility. In addition, a student may compete at the sub-varsity level in any sport at the new school for a period of twelve (12) months from the last day of attendance at the former school PROVIDED the student meets all other UHSAA and school/district eligibility requirements. Once a student has enrolled and attended at the new school, that student is no longer eligible at the former school. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 33 BY-LAWS TRANSFER RULE EXCEPTIONS - A student who transfers from one school (sending school) to another school (receiving school), may be eligible to compete in Association sanctioned sports at the receiving school when one of the following eligibility requirements has been fulfilled: A. MEMBER SCHOOL CLOSURE / DROP OF UHSAA MEMBERSHIP - If a member school closes, any student attending the school at closure shall be eligible at the new member school. B. DISCONTINUED PROGRAMS - If a member school discontinues or suspends its participation in an Association sanctioned sport, any student who had previously competed in that sport while attending that member school may transfer, without the loss of eligibility, to a different member school which offers that sport. The transfer rule shall apply to other Association sanctioned sports in which the student competes. C. DISCIPLINARY REMOVAL - A student suspended, expelled or otherwise removed for disciplinary reasons, including revocation or non-renewal of an open enrollment permit, from one high school shall be ineligible for interscholastic competition in any other high school for one (1) year or until all conditions for re-admittance have been fulfilled at the high school where the suspension, expulsion, open enrollment revocation or removal for disciplinary reasons occurred, whichever occurs first. D. GUARDIANSHIP - No non-parental guardianship will be recognized where a student has a living parent unless: 1. There has been a determination of abandonment of the student by such parent(s), and 2. A determination that the student is a dependent juvenile as defined in Utah Code ( Title 80, Chapters 2A and 3 ) by a court of competent jurisdiction, or 3. The student has been judicially declared a ward of the court or state and is placed in a member school, or 4. The student has been identified as an orphan or placed in a foster home by the Division of Social Services (or comparable agency if out of state) and custody (not guardianship) has been determined by the court or social agency. A student whose custody has been established by court order or social services agency decision is eligible for competition at the member school to which he or she is placed. E. DEATH - The period of ineligibilty may be waived in the event of a death in the family, which requires the submission of a death certificate and requires a student to move from the student’s original residence. F. DIVORCE - The period of ineligibility may be waived in the event of a dissolution of marriage, which requires the submission of a final and legally binding divorce decree from a court of competent jurisdiction and requires a student to move from the student’s original residence. G. BONA FIDE CHANGE OF RESIDENCE - The period of ineligibility may be waived if there has been a bona fide change in residence by the parents and student that precedes a student’s change of schools. Any change in residence must be bona fide. It must meet the criteria of a Bona Fide Change In Residence set out below. The change must be made with the intent that it is permanent. 1. For the purpose of this rule, a bona fide change of residence means the uninterrupted moving of the permanent residence of the entire family unit of the student as composed when the student was eligible at the sending school (including one or both parents if at that residence) from one defined member school attendance area into a new defined member school attendance area prior to a change in enrollment of the student. 2. To be considered bona fide, the change must remain uninterrupted for the entire period during which the student would have been ineligible if the exception was not applied. 3. To be considered bona fide, the change in residence must reasonably cause the change in schools in that a student cannot delay transferring schools after a change in residence. The transfer must be completed prior to the subsequent school year. The change in 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 34 BY-LAWS residence must clearly have a compelling impact on the need to change schools for the exception to be granted. 4. A student who becomes emancipated does not have a bona fide change of residence by his or her emancipation and change of residence for the purposes of satisfying this exception. 5. All conditions of evidence of a bona fide change of residence as outlined in the Interpretations and Guidelines (Item F) shall be certified by the sending and receiving schools. 6. APPLICATIONS FOR WAIVER BASED ON CHANGE OF RESIDENCE SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED BY THE ASSOCIATION UNLESS AND UNTIL BOTH SCHOOLS HAVE CERTIFIED IN WRITING THAT THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE EXCEPTION HAVE BEEN MET. H. ANTI-BULLYING EXCEPTION - The period of ineligibility may be waived for a student when it is documented at the time of the original transfer of eligibility submission that a student is a victim of bullying as defined in USBE regulations, R277-613-1 and R277-613-4 , and in which bullying has been investigated and documented by a member school or school district before the date of the transfer of eligibility submission, and as a result of this documented harassment, intimidation or bullying, the student is compelled to transfer, provided: 1. The member school’s or school district’s anti-bullying policies and procedures have been substantially followed and complied with and a copy of which policies have been provided to the UHSAA along with the request for eligibility; and 2. The member school or school district secures the appropriate releases from the student/ student’s parents authorizing the member school to provide a complete record of the events and circumstances on which the policies and procedures were initiated, and the member school provide such records at the time of the eligibility of transfer submission including: a. A specific report of the prohibited incident(s); b. An outline of the procedures used to respond to and investigate the reported incident(s). 3. APPLICATIONS FOR A WAIVER BASED ON BULLYING OR HARASSMENT SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED BY THE ASSOCIATION UNLESS AND UNTIL THE SENDING SCHOOL HAS CERTIFIED IN WRITING THAT THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE EXCEPTION HAVE BEEN MET. Interps & Guidelines 1.9.1: TRANSFER STUDENTS A. Whenever a student intends to participate in Association sanctioned activities in Utah, the student’s entry to high school, or its equivalent, irrespective of the location of the student’s initial eligibility, shall be used for purposes of the application of this rule. A student establishes initial eligibility upon entry to high school, or its equivalent, for the first time (either in the ninth grade or the tenth grade depending on the high school). A student who intends to establish eligibility under this section must demonstrate that the grade level in the prior high school, or its equivalent, is appropriately shown to be the eighth or ninth grade. A student enrolling in a Utah high school for the first time, as a result of a full-family move from outside of Utah, will be deemed residentially eligible for interscholastic activities even if that first entry is at a school not within the student’s residential area. This exception to the transfer rule regarding residency for students enrolling for the first time recognizes the prevailing law encouraging open enrollment. Unless otherwise exempted, the Transfer Rule will apply to any subsequent transfer (Article 1, Section 1). Transfer requests, once they have been submitted to the UHSAA by the receiving school as a fully completed request, may take up to 4 - 6 weeks for a decision. B. Recruiting Not Affected by First Entry Exception: The recruiting of student-athletes by a member school, coach, coaching staff or affiliated boosters is considered a serious violation of the UHSAA rules regarding the imposition of undue influence on students for the purposes of athletics. Although under most circumstances the UHSAA will not examine the motives behind a student’s choice of school upon first entry, there may be other factors beyond residence that could affect a student’s eligibility and could impose heavy sanctions on a school, a program and/or a coach. One example is recruiting. Where a student or students who, during the school year prior to initial high school participation, have attended a school or coach sponsored camp or have 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 35 BY-LAWS been players together on a “super-league,” “all-star,” “select” or other traveling or combined team, attempt to establish eligibility at a member school which is outside the residential area for any of those students, such enrollment may be considered prima facie evidence of recruiting. Similarly, where a transferring student transfers to a school and intends to participate with any member or coach of such a traveling or combined team, such transfer shall also be considered prima facie evidence of recruiting. 1. A panel may determine that there was no recruiting or may impose any or all of the penalties permitted, including fines, restrictions, suspensions and disqualifications. The UHSAA may ask the hearing panel to declare that recruited students cannot be eligible at any time at the school to which they were recruited. 2. Principals should remind athletic directors, coaches and boosters of the prohibition on recruiting and make certain that any possible violations of these rules be reported immediately to the UHSAA. C. If a student’s parents move, the student may remain eligible at the high school where he or she has established eligibility at the time of the move. Any transfer to a new member school must be completed prior to the subsequent school year. Once a new school year begins following the move, any subsequent transfer to another school will require the student to comply with the Transfer Rule. D. The UHSAA shall not review or act on any Application unless and until the transferring student has enrolled in the receiving school and has attended at least one day of classes. The UHSAA will not provide advisory opinions regarding potential eligibility. E. During the summer, if a student so requests, the UHSAA will review a Application upon the receipt of proof of enrollment alone. In such a case, however, enrollment at the receiving school, even without attendance, will preclude such a student from claiming eligibility at the former or sending school. F. In a case of a subsequent transfer by a student who does not meet the criteria for a transfer rule exception, if a student returns to the school of initial eligibility, then the student shall be ineligible for contests at the varsity level until after the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests in those sports in which the student competed at any level during the twelve (12) months immediately preceding the season in which the student is seeking eligibility. See Interps & Guidelines 2.2.2 D and E, which indicates: For the purpose of the transfer rule in the sports of Swimming, Tennis, Track and Wrestling, the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests is determined by the number of allowable varsity team events for that sport: Swimming 7; Tennis 9; Track 6; Wrestling 8. In no case may an individual participate in more than the first 50% of the allowable contests per individual. For the purpose of the transfer tule, the following allowable contest limitations constitute the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests : Baseball 13; Basketball 12; Competitive Cheerleading 2; Cross Country 5; Drill Team 2; Football 5; Golf 5; Lacrosse 9; Soccer 9; Softball 14; Volleyball 14. G. Definitions: 1. Residence : A student shall have only one residence for the purposes of Association eligibility rules. A residence is a place where a student has established his/her true, fixed and permanent home, where the family regularly eats, sleeps and lives. It is the place where the student and his/her parent(s) are habitually present and to which, when departing, they intend to return. Evidence of residence may include but is not limited to the following: voter registration records, ecclesiastical membership records, vehicle registration, rent receipts, utility payments or mortgage documents. 2. Bona Fide Change of Residence : To be considered a bona fide change of residence under this rule, minimally, the following facts must be present in the change: a. The prior residence must be abandoned. For purposes of this rule, that means that the prior residence has been sold, rented to third parties or transferred from the legal ownership 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 36 BY-LAWS or possession of the parents or guardians. The change of residence must include the transfer of personal property ordinarily associated with a legitimate change of residence. b. To qualify as a change of residence, the prior residence must not be currently used as a residence by either parent or any relative under the circumstance in which it could reasonably be inferred that the change of residence was a sham. c. The new residence must be situated in a high school attendance boundary different than the prior residence. 3. Full Family Move : A permanent change in residence by the student and his/her entire family into the established attendance boundary of the receiving school. The new residence must be situated in a high school attendance boundary different from the prior residence. For the purpose of this rule, the attendance boundary for public charter schools or private schools is defined as the district school attendance boundary in which the public charter school or private school is physically located unless a boundary change is approved by the Board of Trustees as filed with the UHSAA. a. A boundary change may be presented prior to a new alignment of UHSAA member schools in odd number of years during the August Executive Committee meeting. The boundary change must also be presented and approved by the Board of Trustees in the August Board of Trustees meeting of that same year. b. The new proposal for the boundary change cannot be larger (geographic) than the current boundary, but can be shifted. A new approved boundary must exist through the duration of the new alignment of UHSAA member schools. H. Special Circumstances Related to Eligibility: 1. Student of Full-Time Faculty Member : A student who is a child of a Varsity head coach, full-time faculty member and/or school administrator may become eligible for interscholastic activities at that school by petitioning and receiving approval of the Association. 2. Boarding School Students : A domestic boarding school student at the new UHSAA member school may become eligible for interscholastic activities at that school by petitioning and receiving approval from the Association. 3. Alternative School Students : Students attending a district alternative high school are eligible only at the district high school in whose attendance boundary the student’s parent(s) or legal guardian(s) resides (neither a power of attorney nor a district or school guardianship will suffice) or at the district high school from which the student withdrew for the purpose of attending the alternative high school. I. Foreign students and international boarding school students must subscribe to the rules outlined in the UHSAA Handbook, Interps & Guidelines 1.9.3. J. Other Activities: The Transfer Rule does not apply to activities other than athletics. K. Statement of Philosophy/Rationale for the Transfer Rule: 1. Promotes the educational philosophy that participation in interscholastic activities is a privilege, which should not take a dominant role over academics. 2. Recognizes the overwhelming administrative difficulty in attempting to determine the motives or reasons for each and every transfer, and therefore, adopts a uniform objective standard to be followed by all member schools. 3. Helps to protect opportunities for participation by students who attend school in the attendance area of their residence. 4. Serves as a deterrent to students leaving their schools because of disciplinary action that has been or may be imposed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 37 BY-LAWS Interps & Guidelines 1.9.2: SUB-VARSITY LEVEL APPLICATION A. Drill Team 1. A student who has been deemed sub-varsity level may only compete and/or perform in non-state auxiliary routines. B. Cross Country, Golf, Swimming, Tennis, Track-and-Field and Wrestling . 1. A student who has been deemed sub-varsity level may compete in a combined varsity/sub-varsity competition, but is not allowed to score. 2. A student who has been deemed sub-varsity level MUST compete at the sub-varsity level when there are separate varsity and sub-varsity competitions. C. All UHSAA Sanctioned Sports 1. A student who has been deemed sub-varsity level shall NOT compete in any region, divisional, or state competition in any UHSAA sanctioned sport Interps & Guidelines 1.9.3: STUDENT VISA ELIGIBILITY The UHSAA recognizes the concerns of its member schools related to displacement of Utah students by students from foreign countries as well as recruiting of foreign players to be placed with Utah high schools. These rules are intended to preserve interscholastic competitive opportunities for Utah students and promote the unique competition fostered by the UHSAA. A. Foreign Exchange Students with J-1 Visas: 1. A foreign exchange student with a J-1 visa is an international student who attends high school in the U.S. To be eligible for interscholastic athletics in the U.S., such a student must be under the auspices of, and be placed with, a U.S. host family by an international student exchange program that has been accepted for listing by the Council on Standards for International Educational Travel (CSIET) and be recognized by the U.S. State Department, or be on a program approved by the USBE (Utah State Board of Education). The foreign exchange program must assign students to host families by a method that ensures no student, or his/her parents, school or other interested party may influence the assignment for athletic or other purposes. The foreign exchange student may not be selected or placed on any basis related to his/her athletic interests or abilities. 2. A foreign exchange student is considered to be placed with a host family when written notice of placement is provided by the exchange organization to the student and parents and to the host family. a. Neither the school, the student nor any person associated with the school shall have input into the selection of the student. b. No member of the school’s coaching staff, paid or voluntary, shall serve as the host family. 3. The foreign exchange student must possess a current J-1 visa, issued by the U.S. State Department. 4. The foreign exchange student must comply with all eligibility requirements set forth by the state high school association of which the school he/she attends is a member. Conditions of eligibility for competition in UHSAA sanctioned athletics include: a. Must be on a CSIET (Council on Standards for International Educational Travel) or USBE (Utah State Board of Education) approved placement program. b. Student cannot participate if he/she has completed twelve (12) years of school (excluding kindergarten) prior to attending a Utah high school. c. UHSAA age rule applies (cannot reach 19 years of age prior to September 1). d. Student must be in an approved placement program that is at least 90 days in length. e. Foreign exchange students are eligible for a maximum of one year. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 38 BY-LAWS f. Student is only eligible at the school where he/she is placed. g. Student must meet all other UHSAA eligibility policies required of student athletes competing in UHSAA sanctioned athletics. h. Student must complete online the Foreign Exchange Student Transfer Application in Aktivate (Register My Athlete) to compete which includes: • Transcript of credits in English (to be evaluated and/or interpreted by USBE if necessary): - 12 year stipulation (item c above) - UHSAA scholastic rule requirement • Date of birth • Type of visa issued and the title of foreign placement program • Reason for coming to this particular school; sports preferred • Signatures: student, principal, agent and host family, with disclaimer certifying that no sports recruiting occurred 5. Noncompliance with one or more of the foregoing provisions shall render the foreign exchange student ineligible for interscholastic athletics at any UHSAA member high school. B. International Students with F-1 Visas: 1. An international student with an F-1 visa issued by the U.S. Immigration and Naturalization Service is a student who attends high school in the U.S. An international student with an F-1 visa is only eligible for non-varsity level competition unless the following condition is met: a member school may choose to compete with an F1 student at the varsity level, but the member school is not eligible for post- season competition. Such member school must declare the use of an F1 student at the varsity level prior to the competition start date for that given sport and receive approval from the UHSAA. 2. By court order, the UHSAA is enjoined from enforcing the provisions of B1 for the duration of the existing litigation. Consequently, any student with and F-1 visa will be subject to the requirements of paragraph C. C. International Students with a Visa other than a J-1 Visa: 1. An international student with a visa other than a J-1 visa is a student who attends high school in the U.S. An international student with a visa other than a J-1 visa must follow regular UHSAA transfer procedures. Unless a student establishes initial eligibility upon entry to a high school, or its equivalent, for the first time, irrespective of the location of the student’s initial eligibility, international students who enter Utah shall be considered as having made a transfer. For example, if an international student enrolls at a high school, or its equivalent, that enrollment will be considered the student’s first transfer. Any subsequent transfer to a high school, or its equivalent, shall be considered a second transfer under the UHSAA Transfer Rule. 2. An international student who is not living with a parent must meet the following requirements in order to be considered for interscholastic athletic eligibility: a. The student must provide to the principal of the school the student attends an official untranslated transcript, and a transcript that is translated into English, by an acceptable agent or agency which indicates work taken in all grades in which the student was enrolled. b. The international student must pay tuition to the high school the student attends as prescribed in Section 625 of U.S. Public Law 104-208 and receive an I-20 endorsement from the district or school before admission. A copy of the international student’s I-20 must be provided to the UHSAA at the time the student applies for eligibility to compete in UHSAA athletics. Proof 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 39 BY-LAWS of payment must be provided by the member school upon request by the UHSAA. c. No member of the school’s coaching staff, paid or voluntary, shall serve as the resident family for the student. 3. To participate in competition pursuant to the rule, the international student must comply with all eligibility requirements set forth by the UHSAA of which the school the student attends is a member. Conditions of eligibility in UHSAA sanctioned athletics include: a. Student cannot participate if the student has completed twelve (12) years of school (excluding kindergarten) prior to attending a Utah high school. b. UHSAA age rule applies (cannot reach 19 years of age prior to September 1). c. Student must meet all other UHSAA eligibility policies required of student athletes competing in UHSAA sanctioned athletics. d. International students must complete online the International Student Transfer Application in Aktivate (Register My Athlete) to compete. 4. Noncompliance with one or more of the foregoing provisions shall render the international student with a visa other than a J-1 visa ineligible for interscholastic athletics at any UHSAA member high school. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 40 BY-LAWS SECTION 10: Undue Influence The Undue Influence and Recruiting Rules are an integral part of the Association’s ability to create, administer and maintain the valuable and unique form of competition it offers. This unique form of competition is a carefully constructed system that promotes competitive balance and serves the mission and purpose of education based sports and activities. Association sports and activities are intended to foster a sense of community as well as to teach teamwork and discipline. Other sporting organizations exist which promote free player movement, unrestrained recruiting and setting of lineups. Such organizations are primarily designed to promote athletic development of the individual and provide a showcase for the athletic talents of those individuals. These organizations do not share the primary purposes of the Association and therefore cannot provide the unique type of competition created and maintained by the Association. Efforts randomly to impose adjustments or favoritism on these rules damage the Association and, in turn, damage all the students who either participate in an Association sport/activity or who support them, from cheerleaders to band members to drill teams to parents. The Association is committed to maintaining its unique form of competition. A. The use of undue influence by any person, connected with or not connected with a member school, to secure the enrollment or transfer of a student to a member school for the purpose of participation in Association athletic activities is prohibited. Recruitment is a form of undue influence and is broadly defined as the use of undue influence or special inducement by anyone, on behalf or for the benefit of a member high school, who attempts to influence a student to enroll or transfer to a member school for the purpose of participating in athletics. Whether such action is taken directly by a person affiliated with the school or through a peer, a parent, a student, a non-school coach or other, the action shall nevertheless be considered a violation by the member school. B. Recruiting shall include, but is not limited to, promising or inducing the expectation of an advantage over others for a particular team, playing time, of any athletic advantage, of employment of the student or a relative, of housing, of transportation, of specific tutoring, of scholarship or financial aid. C. The Association may further describe, with particularity, specific circumstances which shall qualify as undue influence or recruiting. SECTION 11: Undergraduate Standing No student shall compete in any high school activity who is a graduate of a regular four-year high school or who is a graduate of a secondary school which has the same requirements for graduation as a regular four-year high school. However, a student who finishes the required number of credits for graduation in fewer semesters than are normally required and is doing college undergraduate work shall not be barred from interscholastic competition to which he or she would otherwise have been eligible until the termination of so many semesters as normally would have been available for such a student’s eligibility or participation. SECTION 12: Limited Team Membership A student, while participating as a member of a high school team, may not compete on a team not sponsored by his or her school in the same activity during the same season. A student may compete in a non-school sponsored contest as an individual, not a team member, while a member of a high school team during an activity season. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 41 BY-LAWS Interps & Guidelines 1.12.1: LIMITED TEAM MEMBERSHIP A. No member of a high school team may compete in any organized competition on any outside team for a particular sport after the competition start date in a given season, other than the exceptions listed below. One-day auditions or try outs are allowed during the season so long as no high school practices or games are missed. B. A student may practice and train on a team not sponsored by his or her school in the same activity during the same season. C. Tennis doubles and relays in track are not considered to be teams. Student athletes may play in a non-school sponsored contest, in individual sports, where no team scores are kept. Golfers may compete provided that no other team member plays in the same group (four-some, three-some, two-some). D. Olympic Development Program (ODP) for swimming: student athletes may be granted an exception to the Limited Team Membership Rule in order to participate on an ODP team if the following conditions are met: 1. The outside team is a legitimate ODP team as verified by the national governing body for swimming. 2. Student obtains written permission contract signed by player, parent/guardian, high school coach, principal and ODP coordinator. 3. Team shall be selected, and UHSAA advised at least thirty days prior to ODP competition. 4. Any missed academic lessons are completed. E. A high school soccer player may compete in up to two soccer tournaments, showcases, and/or events, including ODP for soccer, not sponsored by his or her school, where next-level opportunities exist, if the following conditions are met: 1. The outside team is attending an approved opportunity as verified by the UHSAA/UYSA Association Partnership Committee. (Process for club approval and next level opportunities, refer to Soccer policies and procedures on page 111). 2. At least thirty days prior to the tournament, showcase or event, the student must provide written notification, signed by the player and their parent/guardian, to his or her high school coach and UHSAA. 3. Any missed academic lessons must be completed. 4. In the event an exceptional showcase opportunity, including but not limited to a trial, performance, or training opportunity with a professional soccer academy, team or college event, becomes available to a student athlete after he or she has already attended, or is scheduled to attend, two outside tournaments, showcases or events, the student athlete may submit a written request to the high school coach and UHSAA for approval of attendance beyond the two-event limit. F. A high school basketball player may compete in one (1) FIBA (Federation of International Basketball Association) tournament during the regular season if the following conditions are met: 1. Student is a citizen, or dual citizen of the country the student is representing. 2. Be able to provide and upload current passport from the country the student is representing and presented to the UHSAA. 3. Student obtains written permission contract signed by player, parent/guardian, high school coach, athletic director, principal, and UHSAA representative. Form is found on the basketball home page & Forms section. 4. High School and the UHSAA are advised at least (30) days prior to the competition. 5. Any missed academic lessons are completed. 6. No post-season games are missed. 7. This form is submitted to the UHSAA for approval (30) days prior to competition. G. A high school competitive cheerleader may compete in up to two (2) national qualifying competitions, not soponsored by his or her school, with a private cheer organization, if the following conditions are met: 1. The outside team is attending an approved opportunity as verified by the UHSAA . 2. At least thirty (30) days prior to the competition, or event, the student must provide written notification, signedby the cheerleaderand their parents.guardian, to his or her high school coach and the UHSAA. 3. Any missed academic lessons must be completed . H. A high school wrestler is allowed to participate in up to two (2) individual wrestling tournaments as an individual not representing their school, if the following conditions are met: 1. The wrestler complies with their designated UHSAA weight management program. 2. Contact points used during these tournaments contribute to the wrestlers overall season total. 3. The student obtains a written permission contract signed by the player, parent or guardian, high school coach and principal. 4. Any missed academic lessons are completed. I. The Limited Team Membership Rule applies only to competition. It does not apply to music, speech/debate and theatre performances. These groups are free to perform for parades, concerts, church/community functions, etc. However, Association catastrophic insurance will not be in effect for unsanctioned activities. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 42 BY-LAWS SECTION 13: Physical Examination Required No student shall be eligible to compete in any athletic contest sponsored by this Association unless such student has a physician’s certificate stating that he/she is physically able to compete in inter-school athletic contests. Interps & Guidelines 1.13.1: HEALTH EXAMINATION POLICY A. A health examination must be performed and the student athlete cleared for participation in a sport before any student may compete in athletic activities sponsored by this Association. It is recommended that the 4th edition PPE forms from the American Academy of Pediatrics, or an equivalent, be used as the appropriate assessment for student athletes. B. To better maintain an efficient and accurate accounting of student athlete pre-participation physical exams (PPE’s) in Register My Athlete, it is proposed that pre-participation physical exams have a common expiration date, so as to facilitate the current medical status of the student athlete. It is proposed that the pre-participation physical exam date should be performed on or after March 10th to be valid for the following school YEAR through July 15th of that year. (EXAMPLE: AFTER MARCH 10 , 2026 GOOD THRU JULY 15, 2027). C. A properly completed and signed Pre-Participation Athletic Health Examination Form indicating the student’s clearance to participate plus a properly completed Disclosure and Consent Form must be on file at the school. The health examination should be completed and the form signed by a qualified medical professional, operating within the legal scope of their practice. Forms may be obtained on the UHSAA Website. These are minimum requirements Interps & Guidelines 1.13.2: COLD WATER IMMERSION If exertional heat stroke is suspected, onsite cooling using cold water immersion before transport to the hospital. Cold water immersion tubs are required for onsite cooling. Cold water immersion (usually understood as circulating, ice-water immersion) is considered the most effective strategy for rapid treatment of exertional heat stroke. The goal in any exertional heat stroke case should be to cool the athlete down to 102 degrees Fahrenheit within the first 30 minutes after collapse, prior to Emergency Medical Services (EMS) transport. Accurate temperature measurement, via rectal thermometry, (PERFORMED BY HEALTH CARE PERSONNEL) is recommended. Exertional heat stroke is suspected if body temperature is higher than 105 degrees Fahrenheit and signs of central nervous system dysfunction are present (i.e. disorientation, confusion, dizziness, irritability, headache, inability to walk, loss of balance or muscle function, vomiting, diarrhea, loss of consciousness). Working with EMS personnel toward a policy of “cool first, transport second” is the standard for suspected exertional heat stroke. Cooling an athlete via cold water immersion, if performed immediately, (HAS BEEN PROVEN TO) provides a 100% survival rate. Interps & Guidelines 1.13.3: EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN As part of each school’s Emergency Action Plan (EAP), automated external defibrillators (AEDs) are accessible at (TO) each venue for early defibrillation by trained personnel for suspected sudden cardiac arrest (SCA). Prompt recognition of SCA, immediate activation of the EMS system, early CPR, and immediate retrieval and application of the AED should be the initial steps of a comprehensive and thoughtful EAP. First responder programs, such as Anyone Can Save A Life ( anyonecansavealife.org ) and public access to AEDs are strongly encouraged. Consensus guidelines and several public-access defibrillation studies uniformly support access to early defibrillation, targeting a time interval of less than 3 to 5 minutes from collapse to first shock. The EAP also should identify the individual(s) responsible for documentation of personnel training, equipment maintenance, actions taken during an emergency, and the post-event evaluation of the emergency response. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 43 BY-LAWS SECTION 14: Home School and UHSAA Non-Member On-line School and UHSAA Non-Member Charter High Schools and UHSAA Non-Member Private High Schools Students exempted from compulsory public school education by the local board for instruction in home or Utah charter schools or private schools may be eligible for participation in extracurricular public school activities provided they earn credit as outlined in the USBE policies. The home, on-line, charter, or private school student may establish initial athletic eligibility at any UHSAA member high school by being selected for membership on a high school sports team. A student who has established eligibility at a UHSAA member high school, even though they did not attend that school, shall be considered to have attended that school for the purposes of eligibility. If a student then transfers athletic eligibility to a different UHSAA member high school, or should that student enroll in a different UHSAA member high school, that student shall be subject to the requirements of the Association’s transfer rule (Article 1 Section 9). UHSAA non-member charter and UHSAA non-member private school students may only be eligible at a UHSAA member high school for sports or activities which are not available at the non-member charter high school or the non-member private high school. Interps &Guidelines 1.14.1: UHSAA NON-MEMBER SCHOOLS A. A home or UHSAA non-member on-line or UHSAA non-member charter high school or UHSAA non-member private high school student may participate in an extracurricular activity at: 1. The UHSAA member high school where initial eligibility is established, or 2. The UHSAA member high school from which the student withdrew for the purpose of attending home school or UHSAA non-member on-line or a UHSAA non-member charter high school or a UHSAA non-member private high school. B. A student attending or affiliated with a UHSAA member on-line high school must participate at that UHSAA member high school while attending or affiliated with that UHSAA member on-line high school. C. The Association cannot waive this requirement due to Utah Code and will not accept any request to do so. Q & A: Charter or Private Schools Ending with Ninth Grade Q. Is a ninth grade student attending a charter or private school ending with the ninth grade treated the same as a ninth grade student attending a district junior high school? A. Yes. A charter or private school ending with the ninth grade is seen as the equivalent of a traditional junior high school for the purposes of this rule. BY-LAWS ARTICLE 2: ACTIVITY LIMITATIONS SECTION 1: Schedules A. All scheduled interscholastic activities within the jurisdiction of this Association shall be governed by this Association. B. All schedules of activities shall be approved by the local Board of Education or its duly authorized representatives. All games or schedules shall be so arranged as to interfere with a minimum of schoolwork. SECTION 2: Practice, Pre-Season and Post-Season Contests A. The Board of Trustees shall have authority to determine the dates that schools may utilize for practice in each and all activities. B. Pre-season and post-season games and contests shall be governed by the Board of Trustees. The number of games to be played during the sports season shall be governed by the Board of Trustees. C. The alumni are to be considered as an outside team . 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 44 BY-LAWS Interps & Guidelines 2.2.1: ACTIVITY SEASONS A. The playing or competition season is completed with the last state meet for any of the classifications or tournament in that activity. UHSAA jurisdiction for seniors shall end at that time. No meets nor competitions will be sanctioned after the UHSAA state championships. Exceptions: All-Star games sponsored by coaches associations for seniors only may be sanctioned upon request. B. The alumni are to be considered as an outside team . Alumni games may be played against only the member school’s alumni. The game must count towards the contest limitations for that sport and certified officials must be used. Schools may not play their alumni in a UHSAA endowment game. Statistics from alumni games will not be accepted as UHSAA state records. C. From the beginning practice and team selection date to the competition start date, there can be no competition with other schools. This includes scrimmages and practices. D. Purposes for establishing starting dates are as follows: 1. To provide a “level playing field” (parity) between schools so that one set of students is not placed at a disadvantage to others with whom they compete. 2. To create definable seasons of competition which allow students to participate in various activities without coaches feeling the need to “compete” with each other for athletes within their own school. 3. To discourage specialization in the sense that students are not deprived of a variety of extracurricular experiences which the high school “exploratory” life stage provides. 4. To create a corridor which protects some personal time for students between activities. 5. To provide opportunity for families to clearly define times for vacations and other family functions. 6. To prevent the exploitation and “burn out” of participant athletes and coaches E. From the regular season end date for each sport in each classification to the beginning of post season competition, there can be no competition with other schools. This includes scrimmages and practice Interps & Guidelines 2.2.2: CONTEST LIMITATIONS A. Definitions: 1. Contest: Any meet, game or competitive activity (including practices and scrimmages) in which one or more students participate, and at least one of whom is not a member of the student-body or the school sponsored program, counts toward the contest limitations listed below for that activity. 2. Tournament: Competition among four or more schools. B. The following contest limitations apply from the starting date of competition until the season end date for each sport in each classification. This applies to all levels of competition (i.e., varsity, j.v., sophomore and freshmen). State qualifying tournaments do NOT count in the contest limitation totals for cross country, golf, swimming, track, wrestling, and speech & debate. 1. Baseball: 25 games. Each game played counts as one game . 2. Basketball: 23 games, at all levels, if no region post-season is held. 21 games, at all levels, if post-season tournament is held. Each game played counts as one game . 3. Competitive Cheerleading: 4 qualifying competitions. The four competitions includes divisionals. The live practicum does not count toward the contest limitations. 4. Cross Country: 10 meets per individual. The UIAAA Cross Country Meet does not count toward the contest limitations. 5. Drill Team: 4 qualifying competitions. The four competitions includes a region competition if held. The live practicum does not count toward the contest limitations. 6. Football: 9 games. One additional varsity contest is allowed for an approved endowment game, but member schools may not play alumni teams in a UHSAA endowment game. Each game played counts as one game . 7. Golf: 10 meets. One (1) multi-day event may count as one (1) meet . 8. Lacrosse: 18 games. Each game played counts as one game. 9. Boys Soccer: 17 games (until further notice). Each game played counts as one game. 10. Girls Soccer: 18 games. Each game played counts as one game . 11. Softball: 28 games. Each game played counts as one game. 12. Swimming: 14 meets per individual. The Region Championship meet does not count as part of the 14-meet limit. 13. T ennis: 18 matches per individual. Each match counts as one (1) match. Tournaments, including Region Tournaments count as one match for each tournament day. This means that a two (2) day tournament will count as two (2) matches towards the total contests. The State Tournament and Play-in matches DO NOT count toward the contest limitations. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 45 BY-LAWS 14. Track: 12 meets per individual. An individual may participate in no more than eight (8) qualifying meets in addition to the Region Championship meet. 15. Volleyball: 28 matches. Each match played counts as one match . The following guidelines pertain to Varsity tournaments: No more than 8 total matches in a tournament and no more than 4 matches in a single day. Guidelines for Sub-Varsity Tournaments: (2 out of 3 matches): No more than 9 total matches in a tournament and no more than 7 matches in a single day. Tournaments may not exceed three days in length. 16. Boys Wrestling: Each high school team will be able to utilize 16 contact points. Each dual meet will count as one contact point. Each tournament will count as one contact point. Teams will not be able to compete in more than 10 duals and 6 tournaments before the post-season qualifying and state tournaments. Teams may not compete in more than 3 dual meet style tournaments. 17. Girls Wrestling: Each high school team will be able to utilize 16 contact points. Each dual meet will count as one contact point. Each tournament will count as one contact point. Teams will not be able to compete in more than 8 duals and 8 tournaments before the post-season qualifying and state tournaments. Teams may not compete in more than 4 dual meet style tournaments. 18. Music: 3 contests per category. 19. Speech: 10 meets per individual. C. Per UHSAA Executive Committee ruling, teams must participate in a determined minimum number of contests to be eligible for the postseason. Baseball 15; Basketball 12; Football 6; Lacrosse 10; Soccer 10; Softball 12; Volleyball 14. D. For the purpose of the transfer rule in the sports of Swimming, Tennis, Track and Wrestling, the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests is determined by the number of allowable varsity team events for that sport: Swimming 7; Tennis 9; Track 6; Wrestling 8. In no case may an individual participate in more than the first 50% of the allowable varsity contests per individual. E. For the purpose of the transfer rule, the following allowable varsity contest limitations constitute the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests: Baseball 13; Basketball 12; Competitive Cheerleading 2; Cross Country 5; Drill Team 2; Football 5; Golf 5; Lacrosse 9; Soccer 9; Softball 14; Volleyball 14. Interps & Guidelines 2.2.3: USE OF AN INELIGIBLE STUDENT IN VARSITY COMPETITION F or the purpose of the transfer rule, if a student competes in a varsity competition prior to the first 50% of the maximum allowable varsity contests, then the student and varsity head coach are not eligible for post-season compeition. By-Laws Article 7, Section 7 will also apply to both the student and varsity head coach when an ineligible student competes in a varsity contest. Interps & Guidelines 2.2.4: COMPETITION DATES All Association activities are to be played on the dates designated on the calendar unless another day is mutually agreed upon by the schools involved and cleared through the Activities Association office. Interps & Guidelines 2.2.5: ATHLETIC PERIODS No Students interested in their prospective sport may play or practice that sport during an athletic period, except after the official beginning practice date or the beginning competition date, if no beginning practice date is established. Teaching proper stroke mechanics will be allowed prior to the start date in swimming to allow for the safety and education of individual participants and not the coaching and competitive training of teams. Q&A: Athletic Periods Q. Can a student-athlete whose prospective sport is basketball play or practice basketball, during an athletic period, prior to the start of the sports season? A. No. The athletic period may be used for conditioning, strength training or study hall. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 46 BY-LAWS Interps & Guidelines 2.2.6: PRACTICE LIMITATIONS A 20-hour practice limit is in effect for all UHSAA sponsored sports beginning with the Fall Official Try-Out Start Date and ending with Memorial Day.. For all UHSAA sponsored activities (Esports, music, speech/debate, theater) from September 1 to Memorial Day. The practice limit includes one (1) day off each week (Monday-Sunday). Competition days, including travel, will count as three (3) hours. Practice limitations include anytime a team is together which includes, but is not limited to: team practice, team dinners, film time, weight training, individual instruction, etc. Restrictions include any meeting of the team and/or individual sport-related contact with the coach. 20-Hour Weekly Practice Limitation Compliance Coaches are required to track and document practice hours each week to ensure compliance with the UHSAA 20-hour weekly practice limitation. The LEA Designee shall certify compliance for each UHSAA-sanctioned sport and activity twice during each season: once at the midpoint of the season and again at the conclusion of the season. Because cheer and drill participate across multiple sport seasons, the LEA Designee shall certify compliance six (6) times annually, corresponding with each sport season. The LEA Designee’s certification confirms that the required weekly practice-hour documentation has been reviewed and that the program has complied with the UHSAA 20-hour weekly practice limitation. Reporting will be linked here . UHSAA 20-Hour Rule Compliance Form Q&A: Practice Limitations Q1. If a team has to travel six (6) hours to a location on the day of the tournament, and then competes in the tournament, which could be eight (8) hours, does that mean the team has used 14 hours in one day? A1. No. The competition day is three (3) hours total, which includes travel time. Q2. If a team travels 5 (five) hours the day before a contest, and they stop to do a one (1) hour walk through/practice, does that count for 6 (six) hours? A2. No. The travel is part of the competition day (3 hours), but the walk through/practice would be included in the 20 hours. Q3. Does time during an athletic period or the watching of film during the school day (including lunch time) count towards the 20- hour practice limitation? A3. Yes. Anytime the team meets counts towards the 20-hour practice limitation. An exception is time used for study hall, if the focus of the study hall is academics, and the majority of the student athletes are using the time as a study hall. Q4. Does a weight lifting class count towards the 20 hours? A4. If the weight lifting class is not open to all students, then the time spent in class would count. If the majority of the class belongs to one specific team, but other students have the opportunity to be in the class as well, the time does not count. Q5. If a team meets at the home of a team member for a “team night” (with our without the coach), does this count towards the 20- hour practice limitation? A5. Yes. Anytime the team gets together for team meetings, team dinners, team film, etc. (with our with out the coach) it counts towards the 20- hour practice limitation. Q6. If an individual meets with the coach to go through skill development or talk X’s and O’s, does that count towards the 20-hour practice limitation? A6. Yes. Anytime a student-athlete meets with a coach for individual instruction related to the sport, it counts towards the 20-hour practice limitation. Q7. Does participation in an assembly count towards the 20 hours? A7. No. Participation in assemblies does not count towards the 20 hours. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 47 BY-LAWS Q8. If students are participating in a fundraiser, does the time spent on the fundraiser count towards the 20 hours? A8. If revenue is for a specific team account, the time spent at the fundraiser would count towards the 20 hours. If the revenue raised is going towards an individual’s account, the time would not count. Anytime a fundraiser is required, the time must be counted. Q9. If actors in a school play rehearse for three hours and the band rehearses for seven hours and the school choir for two hours. how is this calculated? A9. Hours spent rehearsing for a school play is a school or district decision Interps & Guidelines 2.2.7: ANNUAL MORATORIUM A. The philosophy of UHSAA Moratorium days is to allow students and teachers/coaches quality time with their families without the pressure of losing a level playing field. B. UHSAA Moratoriums 1. Thanksgiving Moratorium (all UHSAA sports and activities) 2. Christmas Moratorium (all UHSAA sports and activities) 3. New Year’s Day Moratorium (all UHSAA sports and activities) 4. Fourth of July Moratorium (all UHSAA sports and activities) a. A one week Fourth of July moratorium will be in place Monday, June 29 - Sunday, July 5, 2026. b. Schools are allowed to participate in a one-day community celebration during this week. However, there shall be no competitions, practices or practice-type activities (i.e scrimmages, 7-on-7 competitions, conditioning, weight-training, etc.) 5. Additional Summer Moratorium (all UHSAA sports and activities) a. A required one week (Monday-Sunday) additional summer moratorium will be selected by each member school. The selected week must be outside the school year calendar and must be submitted by the school principal prior to May 1. The selected week received after May 1 will still be considered as long as the dates have not passed but will carry a $250 fine. b. Schools may make adjustments to the required week sport by sport prior to May 1. Requests received after May 1 will still be considered as long as the dates have not passed but will carry a $250 fine. 6. Sport Specific Moratoriums (at least six (6) weeks - weeks must be a minimum of two week blocks) C. Moratorium days apply to current 9th through 12th grade students. For moratorium days occurring during summer months, incoming 9th grade students are also included. D. During the MORATORIUM DAYS, the following restrictions apply to all UHSAA activities at all levels: 1. Activities shall not meet, practice, compete or travel. 2. Facilities used by the school shall not be used related to the sport. Weight rooms will be closed during the Thanksgiving, Christmas, New Year’s and Summer moratoriums. 3. During a Sport Specific Moratorium, any member of the coaching staff for that particular sport shall not supervise or observe in the weight room outside of the school day. E. RESTRICTIONS ON COACHES: Coaches are defined as any individuals (paid or non-paid or volunteer) who make up the school’s immediate past, current or projected future coaching staff. During the moratorium days: COACHES SHALL NOT: 1. Have player contact or communication related to the sport. 2. Organize or conduct any meetings related to the sport. 3. Organize or conduct practices or competitions of any kind at any level. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 48 BY-LAWS 4. Organize or conduct any activities related to the sport, including weight lifting and conditioning outside of the school day. 5. Organize or conduct open gym, open court, open pool or open field play or permit the use of batting cages. 6. Organize or conduct any fundraisers. 7. Coach or observe any potential player related to the sport. A coach may observe only if his/her own child is participating or if acting as a registered official assigned to that specific contest. Note: To organize or conduct would include facilitating or encouraging an activity to take place, regardless of whether or not the coach attends. F. Sport Specific Moratoriums are specific periods of time determined by the UHSAA staff in consultation with individual coaches’ associations. 1. At least six (6) weeks. Weeks must be a minimum of two week blocks. a. Holiday and summer moratorium days shall not be counted as sport specific moratorium days. b. Sport specific moratorium days may be split around holiday and summer moratorium days to create a consecutive block of time. 2. SPORT SPECIFIC MORATORIUMS: (for specific dates, see sport specific ready reference calendar) a. Baseball: schools select six weeks on the “Moratorium Declaration Form” due August 1. (except 1A). b. Basketball: four weeks beginning August 3 through August 30 & two weeks beginning March 15 through March 28. c. Competitive Cheer: schools select six weeks on the “Moratorium Declaration Form” due January 15 . d. Cross Country: six weeks beginning March 8 through April 18. e. Drill Team: schools select six weeks on the “ Moratorium Declaration Form” due January 15. f. Football: four weeks beginning November 23 through January 3 & two weeks beginning February 22 through March 7. g. Golf: six weeks beginning November 16 through January 3. h. Lacrosse: four weeks beginning August 3 through August 30 & two weeks beginning December 14 through January 3. i. Soccer: two weeks beginning November 2 through November 15 & four weeks beginning November 30 through January 3. . j. Softball: six weeks beginning November 30 through January 17. k. Swimming: schools select from four options on the “ Moratorium Declaration Form. ” Dates must be selected by January 15 l. Tennis : six weeks beginning November 16 through January 3. m. Track : six weeks beginning Ausust 31 through October 11. . n. Volleyball : schools select from four options on th e “Mor atorium Declaration Form. ” Girls dates must selected by October 15, Boys dates must be selected by May 1. o. Wrestling: six weeks beginning July 20 through August 30. G. Moratorium Adjustments 1. Thanksgiving, New Year’s Day and any Sport Specific moratorium days shall not be compromised in an adjustment request without approval of the Executive Committee. 2. Christmas Moratorium a. The moratorium days may be adjusted as long as Christmas day is not compromised. The adjustment must be five (5) consecutive days and must include Christmas day. In-season teams may adjust the moratorium no more than one day prior to the date of a competition. b. Requests for Christmas moratorium adjustments must be approved by the school principal and athletic director. The approved adjustment request must be submitted by the school 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 49 BY-LAWS principal prior to November 1. Requests received after November 1 will still be considered as long as the dates have not passed but will carry a $250 fine. c. When a Christmas moratorium adjustment is granted, the school principal shall monitor the adjusted moratorium period. The approved adjustment shall apply to all levels of that sport. For example, all levels of boys’ basketball (i.e. freshman, sophomore, junior varsity and varsity) shall adhere to the same moratorium days. 3. Fourth of July Moratorium a. The moratorium days may be adjusted for all levels of all UHSAA sports and activities for the entire school, but not sport by sport. The adjustment must be seven (7) consecutive days. b. Requests for Fourth of July moratorium adjustments must be approved by the school principal and athletic director. The approved adjustment request must be submitted by the school principal prior to May 1. Requests received after May 1 will still be considered as long as the dates have not passed but will carry a $250 fine. C. When a Fourth of July moratorium adjustment is granted, the school principal shall monitor the adjusted moratorium period. The approved adjustment shall apply to all levels of all UHSAA sports and activities for the entire school. 4. Additional Summer Moratorium a. The selected additional summer moratorium week must be seven (7) consecutive days. Consecutive days may be adjusted sport by sport. b. Requests for additional summer moratorium adjustments must be approved by the school principal and athletic director. The approved adjustment request must be submitted by the school principal prior to May 1. Requests recieved after May 1 will still be considered as long at the dates have not passed but will carry a $250 fine. C. When an additional summer moratorium adjustment is granted, the school principal shall monitor the adjusted moratorium period. The approved adjustment shall apply to all levels of that sport. For example, all levels of boys’ basketball (i.e. freshman, sophomore, junior varsity and varsity) shall adhere to the same moratorium days. Interps & Guidelines 2.2.8: OUT OF SEASON PARTICIPATION A. “Two Weeks Prior” to Start Date Restrictions 1. To create a more level playing field, the “Two Weeks” prior restrictions are in place to identify the start of a season and the official tryout date. 2. “Two Weeks Prior” to Start Date Restrictions apply to current 9th-12th grade students. 3. Any potential player shall not be required to attend. This is an optional attendance period. 4. The following restrictions are in place during the “Two Weeks Prior:” a. No try-out or team selection is allowed. b. No contact with any other schools or programs. including practices, scrimmages and contests. c. For the sport of football, member schools will adhere to the established current football calendar. B. Spring Football Guidelines 1. Spring Football Guidelines apply to current 9th-12th grade students. 2. Spring restrictions prior to and including Memorial Day: a. No player protective gear may be worn (Helmets, Shoulder pads, pants pads) b. No football competition with other schools (including scrimmages) until after Memorial Day; however, 7 on 7 compitition is allowed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 50 BY-LAWS c. Abide by football moratorium dates: Four weeks beginning Novemebr 23 through January 3 & two weeks beginning February 22 through March 7. d. Following Memorial Day, the UHSAA Approved Football Summer Calendar (posted on the football page) continues until the season start date for football including; heat acclimatization and padded camp guidelines. 3. A camp may occur after Memorial Day and before Friday, July 16, 2027 , except during Summer Moratorium. This is a school specific period for all levels i.e. varsity, junior varsity, sophomore, freshmen; or offense/defense, etc. The camp must be declared in writing to the UHSAA prior to the use of any pads and must follow the Heat Acclimatization, which includes up to three (3) days in pads. Form at uhsaa.org. 4. Heat Acclimatization: please see item 33 in the Administrative Policies and Guidelines section of this handbook as well as the approved “Football Summer Calendar” available from a link on the Football page of UHSAA website for information and regulations regarding heat acclimatization. SECTION 3: School Sponsored Out of Season Programs A. Clinics on an individual school basis may be held with the approval and direction of the local school administration and with the approval of the local Boards of Education. The two basic principles governing the development and operation of programs should be: 1. All educational programs for high school students should be kept in balance so that no single program robs any other program of its fair and proper share of attention in the students’ experiences; and 2. All students should have equal opportunity to compete for a position on a team. There should be no discrimination against any student in the operation of physical development activities, and participation in such programs will not be prerequisite to membership in a school’s athletic program. Interps & Guidelines 2.3.1: SCHOOL SPONSORED PROGRAMS A. Limiting teams to days or number of camps, leagues, tournaments or competitions is a school or district policy. Limitations as to dollar amounts spent by individuals will also be left to district or governing board of a charter or private school discretion. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 51 BY-LAWS BY-LAWS ARTICLE 3: CONTESTS WITH NON-MEMBER SCHOOLS AND HIGHER INSTITUTIONS PROHIBITED SECTION 1: Contests with Non-Member Utah Schools Prohibited Members of the Utah High School Activities Association shall be prohibited from engaging in contests with Utah high schools that are not members of the Utah High School Activities Association without the approval of the Board of Trustees. For purposes of this Article, an alumni team is exempt from this rule. SECTION 2: Contests with Out-Of-State Schools Members of the Utah High School Activities Association shall be prohibited from engaging in contests with high schools outside of Utah who are not members of their respective state high school associations unless that state permits contests with schools not members of its association. In such case, those schools shall be considered eligible for contests with UHSAA members SECTION 3: Restrictions Regarding Higher Institutions No athletic team representing a member high school shall compete or scrimmage in organized competition against a college or university team. Interps & Guidelines 3.3.1: COMPETITIONS AGAINST HIGHER INSTITUTIONS For the purposes of this rule, college-sponsored club teams are the same as college or university teams BY-LAWS ARTICLE 4: SANCTIONING PROCESS SECTION 1: Multi-School Meets for Member Schools A. By definition, contests between two, three or four member schools are considered sanctioned. B. Any multi-school meet hosted in Utah which involves more than four member schools, whether in-state or out-of-state, must be approved by the UHSAA at least thirty (30) days prior to the event. Applications received after deadline will be fined $100.00. SECTION 2: National Federation Sanctioning Requirements A. Any interstate competition involving two (2) or more member schools which is sponsored by or titled in the name of an organization outside of the high school community (i.e., a university, a company, a theme park, a community recreation department, etc.) in addition to being sponsored by a member school, shall require sanction of the National Federation. B. An interstate competition sponsored by a State Association member school is automatically sanctioned by the Associations involved regardless of the number of competing schools, provided all schools are from bordering states. C. National Federation action is required if one or more of the competing schools comes from a state which does not border the host state, and even then five or more states and/or more than eight schools must be involved. In that case, Federation approval is necessary for schools from ALL STATES INCLUDED. D. The NFHS requires an online process for NFHS sanctioned events. For information regarding NFHS sanctioning procedures go to the NFHS website link shown here: https://tools.nfhs.org/sanctioning/ E. Any event involving U.S. and foreign schools must be sanctioned by the state association(s) involved and the National Federation. F. Application forms for interstate and international contests or tournaments requiring sanction are available from the Association office and must be filled out completely before the request will be considered. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 52 BY-LAWS Interps & Guidelines 4.2.1: SANCTIONING A. A major purpose of sanctioning is to minimize loss of classroom instructional time. B. The UHSAA does not sanction events outside of the respective sport/activity season. C. Competitions or tournaments involving more than four schools and all are within a specific UHSAA region are considered sanctioned and do not require application process. D. Tournaments will be sanctioned at the level (varsity, junior varsity, sophomore and freshmen) requested. Participation in that tournament will count at that level unless a request for an exception is made in writing two weeks in advance of the tournament and that request is approved by the UHSAA. In other words, a school could request permission for a junior varsity team to play in a varsity tournament, not to exceed the contest limitations rule at that level. E. In the case where a school or schools drop out of, or do not show up for, a tournament, appropriate byes must be scheduled. JV teams cannot be added without two (2) weeks prior notice. F. It is not permissible to divide a school’s team and play as two teams. This does not concern sports where the contest limitation is applied to individuals. G. Applications for inter-regional or inter-state meets must be submitted at least 30 days prior to the proposed meet and must be sponsored by a member school. Even though an event may be ongoing, application forms must be submitted each year. A processing fee of $100 may be assessed to those applications which miss the application deadline. Any school which violates Article 4 of the By-Laws will be fined as follows: The host school will be fined $200.00 and additional schools which participate in a non-sanctioned meet will be fined $50.00 each. This includes speech, the atre and music, as well as athletic events. H. Sanction applications for competitions with more than four schools will be approved for the following: 1. Any single or multi-day event in Utah provided no school time is missed by any participating school for any reason associated with the event (i.e. travel, participation, overnight stay, etc.) and all play occurs after 3:00 p.m. Tournaments scheduled on non-school days for all participating schools would not be bound to the 3:00 p.m. start time. 2. A two-day or three-day event in Utah when school time is missed by any participating school for any reason associated with the event provided: a. Participating schools do not miss any school the day prior to the tournament for travel or any other reason associated with the event. b. Participating schools do not miss any school time on more than one school day for any reason associated with the event. c. The second day of a two-day event is a non-school day for all participating schools. d. The second and third days of a three-day event are non-school days for all participating schools. Note: For 2-day and/or 3-day tournaments where school is missed on the first day by any team, the tournament host is strongly advised to schedule local schools after 3:00 p.m. 3. Any tournament consisting of non-border states sanctioned by the National Federation. 4. Any tournament in AZ, CO, ID, NV, NM or WY that has exclusive participation of schools in states that border the host state. Note: It is recommended that competitions within a region, dual-contests and tri-meets adhere to items 1 and 2 above. I. UHSAA athletic passes shall be accepted for admittance at all sanctioned events within the state. This includes all pre-season contests, region competitions, dual/tri meets, invitationals, endowment games, All-Star contests, etc. J. All-Star games sponsored by coaches associations for seniors only may be sanctioned upon request (see Interpretations & Guidelines 2.3.1: Activity Seasons): The playing or competition season shall end with the last state meet for any of the classifications or tournament in that activity. UHSAA jurisdiction for seniors shall end at that time. No meets or competitions will be sanctioned after the UHSAA state championships. Exceptions: All-Star games sponsored by coaches associations for seniors only may be sanctioned upon request. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 53 BY-LAWS ARTICLE 5: LICENSED TEACHERS, UHSAA COACHES TRAINING AND SUPERVISION OF STUDENTS BY-LAWS SECTION 1: Coaches’ Certification All coaches (paid or nonpaid) shall be certified prior to coaching. The responsibility for verifying the certification of the coaches lies with the schools, districts or governing boards of charter or private high schools. Interps & Guidelines 5.1.1: COACHES’ CERTIFICATION A. The Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA) and the Utah State Board of Education (USBE) requires that all individuals employed or acting as coaches meet specific training and certification requirements outlined by the UHSAA and USBE. B. Coaches’ certification includes eight components and shall be completed prior to the start of any coaching. The eight (8) components are: Background Check; First Aid Training; CPR Training ( Sudden Cardiac Arrest ); yearly Concussion Training; yearly Child Sexual Abuse Prevention Training; yearly Bullying, Cyber-bullying, Hazing, Harassment, and Retaliation Training; the NFHS “Fundamentals of Coaching” course; and to meet a set of professional standards that are consistent with the Utah Educator Professional Standards as described in USBE Rule R277-605 . The training must be completed through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. First Aid and CPR components require current certification through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. Yearly concussion training requires successful completion of the NFHS Concussion Course. C. School districts must verify compliance with all eight components required for coaches’ certification. (To confirm a coach has completed the NFHS Fundamentals of Coaching and the yearly NFHS Concussions course, go to nfhslearn.com and click on “User Lookup” in the top right hand corner. D. The “Fundamentals of Coaching” course shall be completed prior to coaching. Head coaches and assistant coaches with a major, minor or endorsement in physical education or dance and/or a minor in coaching are not required to take the “Fundamentals of Coaching” course. E. Certified coaches will be issued a UHSAA credential to be worn at all UHSAA sanctioned contests, including UHSAA postseason contests. Coaches who have not completed certification requirements will not be granted a credential and will not have access to coach in UHSAA postseason contests. F. Head coaches are required to attend the live UHSAA Rules clinic, or take the online UHSAA rules clinic appli cable to his/her sport. Failure to complete the UHSAA sport-specific rules clinic will be a fine of $50. Head coaches will be given a new deadline to complete the online clinic. If the clinic is not completed by the second deadline, schools will be fined an additional $100. The penalty for coaching without a credential is $100. Coaching without proper certification in $250 for an assistant coach and $500 for a head coach. Interps & Guidelines 5.1.2: ATHLETIC ADMINISTRATORS’ CERTIFICATION A. The Utah High School Activities Association recognizes the importance of having a Certified Athletic Administrator in its member schools. The UHSAA strongly recommends within 3 years that school-appointed Athletic Directors complete the NIAAA Athletic Administrators’ Certification (CAA). 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 54 BY-LAWS B. The training and certification must be completed through the National Interscholastic Athletic Administrators Association and includes becoming a Certified Athletic Administrator (CAA). The NIAAA Certification Program is a professional service to athletic administrators and is based on the premises of continuing education, professional growth and program development in the vocation of interscholastic athletic administration. It recognizes and incorporates the professional development opportunities provided by the Leadership Training Institute. The CAA includes $2,000,000 in liability insurance. The attainment of professional certification demonstrates the completion of a comprehensive plan for self-improvement that will enhance the ability of the athletic administrator to better serve the school, community and profession. The completion of a Master’s degree in Athletic Administration from any accredited University will also serve as evidence that the Athletic Director has been properly trained. SECTION 2: Supervision of Students A licensed faculty member or full-time faculty member must accompany his/her teams or students to all UHSAA state tournaments, meets or festivals for which they have qualified to participate unless arrangements are made with the Executive Director in advance for students to be under the supervision of a licensed or full time faculty member from another school. Teams or individuals without a licensed or full-time faculty representative will be barred from the activity. BY-LAWS ARTICLE 6: OFFICIALS SECTION 1: Certified Officials Required Only certified officials may be used in 9th grade, sophomore, junior varsity and varsity competition. Interps & Guidelines 6.1.1: UHSAA CERTIFIED OFFICIALS A. Any UHSAA sanctioned contest/event must use UHSAA certified officials. B. Only UHSAA certified officials, including adjudicators and judges, shall be used at high school varsity, junior varsity, sophomore and freshman contests, including festivals and performances. Any exceptions to this regulation should be reported promptly to the Executive Director and offenders will be subject to suspension and/or fine. C. To register as an official, including adjudicators and judges, one must be at least 18 years of age and cannot be a high school student. D. Applicants convicted of felonies may apply after five years from the date of conviction. Applicants convicted of a sexual offense felony may not register with the UHSAA at any time. All other sexual offense crimes will be reviewed by the UHSAA. The UHSAA reserves the right to deny any application. E. Applicants are approved through the process outlined in the UHSAA Officials Guidebook http://www.uhsaa.org/uhsaa-officials-home/ 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 55 BY-LAWS BY-LAWS ARTICLE 7: VIOLATIONS and PROTESTS SECTION 1: Responsibility of Principals A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the principal or equivalent executive officer of a member school to determine that participants have met all eligibility requirements, to assure institutional control over all athletic participation and to maintain an atmosphere of compliance throughout the school and among the parents and those with a particular interest in the athletic programs of the school, i.e. boosters. B. The Principal or equivalent executive officer shall be ultimately responsible for a school’s non-compliance with the Association’s Rules. SECTION 2: Halted or Suspended Game A. A game that has been stopped at any time after its start because of inclement weather, darkness, light failure or curfew may be continued by mutual agreement reached before that start of the contest by the competing member schools, or according to region or UHSAA state tournament policy, to a predetermined point of completion. Any such game must meet the conditions of each specific sport to be considered a regulation game . A halted game is for special conditions and is not intended to supersede the conditions of a regulation game. B. (Baseball Specific Language) A halted game must resume play at exactly the point of being halted, with lineups and batting order of both teams exactly the same, subject to the rules of substitution; any player (or pitcher) who played, or was announced as a substitute before the game was halted, must be in the lineup when play resumes or be ineligible for the remainder of the game. C. The Halted-Game Procedure also may be used in non-region games, but this agreement clearly should be understood and mutually be agreed upon by the coaches and directors of athletics of the member schools before the start of the contest. When the Halted-Game Procedure is agreed upon prior to the start of a non-region contest and contest cannot be finished; the unfinished game becomes “no contest” if the game has not met the conditions of a regulation game. No Game (baseball specific) 1. “No game” shall be declared by the umpires if play is terminated beford five innings have been completed by each team. Exception 1 - If the team last at bat is at bat in the last half of the fifth inning and equals, before the completion of that inning, the score of the side first at bat, the umpire shall declare the contest legally tied. If the team last at bat has made more runs at the end of the fourth inning, or before the completion of the fifth inning, than the team first at bat has made in five completed innings, the umpire shall award the game to the team second at bat; and it shall count as a legal game. Exception 2 - Teams previously have agreed to play by the halted-game rule. No Contest 1. There shall be no forfeit of a contest until the appropriate contest official has assumed jurisdiction of the contest in accordance with the applicable playing rules. 2. When a team does not appear (e.g., due to weather conditions, accidents, breakdown of vehicle, illness or catastrophic causes), a forfeit is not recorded. An member school shall not, for statistical purposes, declare a forfeit for nonfulfillment of a contract. Such instances shall be considered as “no contest”. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 56 BY-LAWS SECTION 3: Protest Procedures A. Complaints alleging a violation of rules or policies of the Association must be submitted to the Association in writing. B. Particular complaints involving sportsmanship, lack of crowd control and inappropriate actions of players, spectators and/or coaches may be submitted directly to the Board of Trustees or the Executive Committee. C. All protest concerning the outcome of a game or contest must be made and concluded by appropriate officials and school leaders prior to the end of the protested game or contest. After a game or contest has been completed, protests regarding the outcome are not allowed. No protest shall be considered if the protest is based upon a judgement call of an official. (The foregoing is not to be construed as prohibiting the Association from initiating action on a UHSAA rule or policy violation. Interps & Guidelines 7.3.1: NFHS Rules Book The UHSAA protest procedure, as outlined above in item C, is subordinate to any specific rule outlined in the NFHS rules book. SECTION 4: Withdrawal of a Team No member school may withdraw its representatives from an Association activity prior to the termination of the activity, except by mutual consent of the responsible faculty representatives from the participating schools. SECTION 5: Duty to Report and Cooperate A. It shall be the duty of the principal, athletic director, coach or other person connected with any sanctioned activity to report to the principal or equivalent executive officer of a member school any infraction of the UHSAA Constitution, By-Laws, rules, policies, or regulations. The principal or equivalent executive officer shall report such infractions to the Executive Director. B. It shall be the duty of the principal, athletic director, coach or other person connected with any sanctioned activity affirmatively to determine that all the participants under their jurisdiction who are to participate with and for the school are eligible. Anyone who has knowledge or information that places in question the eligibility of any student who is likely to participate in any contest has a duty to report such knowledge or information immediately to the principal or equivalent executive officer of the participant’s school who shall immediately forward the information to the Executive Director. Failure to do so shall be an indication of bad faith and shall constitute evidence of lack of institutional control. C. All representatives and personnel of member schools, including unpaid advisors and coaches, shall fully cooperate with the Executive Director, the Association’s Staff, the Region Board of Managers, the Executive Committee, the Board of Trustees or their counsel to further the objectives of the Association and its investigation and enforcement programs. The Association’s investigation and enforcement policies and procedures are an essential part of the athletic program of each member school and require full and complete disclosure of any information requested by the Association during the course of any investigation and/ or enforcement proceedings and full and complete compliance with all Association decisions, directives, sanctions and penalties. D. Failure to report infractions or respond fully and timely to requests from the Association for information related to any enforcement matter or claimed violation of the Rules or Constitution shall be deemed to demonstrate a lack of institutional control and the absence of an atmosphere of compliance. As such, it will be the subject of appropriate sanctions, which may include suspension from participation by the school until there is full compliance with the Association’s requests. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 57 BY-LAWS SECTION 6: Power of Association to Institute Enforcement Inquiries When The Association has information suggesting an infraction of the Constitution, a By-Law, a rule or a policy, by a school or a student, it may initiate such action as may be appropriate. SECTION 7: Ineligible Player/Participant A. Contests in which an ineligible player/participant competes shall result in the head coach at that level of competition (i.e., varsity, j.v., sophomore and freshmen) being suspended for all consecutive sport activities (contests, practice, meetings, etc.) and at all team levels for the number of contests in which the ineligible player/participant competed. Suspension will carry over to the next school year where applicable. Additional sanctions may be applied to the coaching staff and/or the school by the Region Board of Managers, the Executive Committee or the Board of Trustees. B. The player/participant remains ineligible until the student is deemed eligible by the UHSAA office. Interps and Guidelines 7.7.1: USE OF AN INELIGIBLE PLAYER/PARTICIPANT A. In applying Section 6: Ineligible Player/Participant, “contest” shall be defined as follows: 1. For the sports of basketball, baseball, football, lacrosse, soccer, softball and volleyball, a game/match as defined in the NFHS Rules Book for that sport is a contest. 2. For the sports of competitive cheer and drill, each competition is a contest. 3. For the sport of golf, competition in a match is a contest. 4. For the sport of cross country, competition in a race is contest. 5. For the sports of swimming and track & field, competition in a meet is a contest. 6. For the sports of tennis and wrestling, match competition in a single day is a contest. 7. For the activities of Esports, solo & ensemble festival, speech/debate, and theatre, competition is an ensemble, event or play. B. In the sports of competitive cheer and drill, if an ineligible student participates in a routine, that routine shall not receive a score nor shall it be considered for a place in that particular category. A school must receive a score for a routine in each of the three categories to place as a team in a competition. C. In the sports of cross country, golf, swimming, tennis, track & field and wrestling, an ineligible athlete will be dealt with according to the rules for that sport as if they were disqualified for the purposes of team scoring. A participant disqualified for ineligibility may not earn an individual place nor score any points for a team. D. In the activities of solo & ensemble and theatre, an ineligible participant shall not receive a rating in an individual event of solo. An ensemble or play which includes an ineligible participant may not receive a rating. E. In the activity of speech/debate, an ineligible participant shall be disqualified. In events in which competition takes place a partners, a partnership that includes an ineligible participant shall be disqualified. A participant or partnership disqualified for ineligibility may not earn a place nor score any points for a team. SECTION 8: Penalties A. Upon the determination that there has been a violation of the Association’s Constitution, a By-Law, a rule or policy, the Association may impose such penalties or fashion such relief as may be proper. Without limiting the Association’s ability to enforce its rules, these are among the actions the Association may consider: 1. Reprimand: An official letter to the individual and/or school concerned in regard to the offense committed and warning against acts of a detrimental nature which are contrary to the aims and philosophies of the Association. This letter will become a part of the permanent file of the individual and/or school involved. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 58 BY-LAWS 2. Probation: An official letter to the individual and/or school concerned in regard to the offense committed clearly stating what conduct, activity or behavior needs correcting. Offending individuals and/or schools would be advised that their continued participation in the Utah High School Activities Association would be on a probationary status for a period of one year. In addition, the offending individual and/or school would be warned that any failure to correct these specified problems may result in more severe action by the Association, including, but not limited to: Restriction, Suspension, Fines or any combination thereof. 3. Restriction: Action which would restrict participation in school, region/division or state level activities. The restriction may be applied to an individual, to a team or group or to a school. A restriction is often referred to as a suspension. 4. Suspension: The effect of a suspension shall be to drop the school from membership and prohibit participation in any or all UHSAA sponsored activities. The length of suspension shall be determined by the Board of Trustees. 5. Forfeit: The forfeiture of an interscholastic athletic contest, title or championship. 6. Vacating a Win: The effect of vacating a win is to nullify the result of a contest for the offending school or individual in contests won. Any team records achieved are to be vacated. Individual records achieved by an ineligible individual are also vacated. Award(s) won, including a championship/ place, are vacated for offending teams and, in applicable cases, team points reconfigured. Any award, including a championship/place won by an ineligible individual is vacated. The vacation of a contest, championship/place or award shall only be applied when a forfeit cannot practically be applied, such as in a case where an offending team or individual has completed at least the second round of tournament and an opponent could not be advanced without additional competition. 7. Fines: A coach, principal and/or school may be assessed a fine not to exceed $1,500 per infraction. 8. Costs: The Association may assess against a member school all or any part of the costs of investigtions, hearings, or litigation, including attorney’s fees, if the Association is required to act or to defend itself as a result of the failure of a member school to adhere to the Association’s Constitution or By-laws. SECTION 9: Breach of Contract In case of breach of contract, the regional board of managers shall have authority to assess a penalty from a minimum of $500 to a maximum of $1,500 against the offending coach and/or school. The amount shall be sent to the region chairperson, who shall remit that portion due to the offended school and deposit the balance in the regional treasury. In the event that the breach of contract occurs between schools of different regions, the regional boards of managers from the two regions shall resolve the case. The acceptance of a schedule of league games, pre-season or practice by the principals of the schools concerned shall be understood as constituting a contract. The above includes freshmen (where applicable), sophomore, junior varsity and varsity schedules. Interps & Guidelines 7.9.1: BREACH OF CONTRACT Any agreement to hold a contest between schools, whether written or oral, shall be subject to this rule. If a school has contracted for a varsity contest, an offer to substitute a junior varsity team or a lesser squad shall be considered to be a breach of the contract to hold a varsity contest. In assessing any penalty to be imposed, the appropriate boards shall consider the actual damages caused to a school by the breach of contract, including a reasonable projection of the loss of gate receipts. Additionally, the boards have authority to impose a fine 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 59 BY-LAWS related to the loss of opportunity not only for the participants in the contest but for the students and student organizations that otherwise would have been involved in the contest. In case of breach of contract, the offending school will recieve an automatic forfeit and cannot schedule a different opponent for that contest. The offended school will receive an automatic win for that contest. This constitutes a contest against their contest limitations for both schools. If both schools agree not to play, both schools would be allowed to play other opponents. If this occurs, breach of contract does not apply. It is strongly encouraged that member schools engage in written agreements when scheduling playing contests. SECTION 10: Defacement of School Property Defacement or marring of school property by members of another school may subject the offending school to suspension from the Association for one year. This offense shall be understood to include disfigurement of any sort, by means of paint, kalsomine, chalk or like material upon school property or upon any other property; also, the commission of any act by a member or members of another school which would tend to throw discredit upon the latter school. SECTION 11: Dishonesty Any student, principal, coach or other person representing a school who has been dishonest with the Association in connection with enforcement matters has committed a violation that significantly interferes with the Association’s ability to maintain fairness. Such person shall be subject to sanctions commensurate with the dishonesty, which shall include disqualification from further participation in this Association for one calendar year from date of infraction and/or a fine of up to $1,500 per infraction. SECTION 12: Gambling Betting on the part of a player on any contest in which he or she is participating shall disqualify him or her from participation in any athletic contest of this Association for one calendar year from date of infraction. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 60 BY-LAWS BY-LAWS ARTICLE 8: ELIGIBILITY LISTS SECTION 1: Member Schools Provide Eligibility Lists A. Each member school shall provide the UHSAA a list of all students who are eligible and who participate in each activity by adding students to a roster in Aktivate (RegisterMyAthlete). This list must be certified by the principal and submitted to the UHSAA prior to or as per established dates on the UHSAA calendar. In doing so, the principal is certifying that those students whose names are listed on a roster meet all of the requirements and are eligible under the Constitution and By-Laws of this Association. B. Certification shall be based on complete information concerning the student’s age and scholastic history. C. Participation on varsity, junior varsity, 10th grade or 9th grade teams is to be considered as a season of competition. Interps & Guidelines 8.1.1: STUDENT ELIGIBILITY LISTS A. Eligibility lists for each activity or sport shall be completed through Aktivate (Register My Athlete) http://www.aktivate.com no later than the deadline listed on the UHSAA calendar. BY-LAWS ARTICLE 9: EQUAL OPPORTUNITY SECTION 1: EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR ALL STUDENTS Equal opportunity shall exist for all students to participate in Association sponsored activities without regard to sex, religion, race or ethnic origin. Interps & Guidelines 9.1.1: PARTICIPATION IN SPORTS PROGRAMS The Association has listed its sanctioned sports and indicated whether certain teams are specific to boys or girls or mixed. If a team is designated for biological boys, biological girls may not participate on that team. Similarly, if a team is designated for biological girls, biological boys may not participate on that team. Girls and boys may participate on mixed teams as defined and identified as such by the Board of Trustees in ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES AND GUIDELINES 1.A. BY-LAWS ARTICLE 10: DRUGS, ALCOHOL and TOBACCO SECTION 1: UHSAA Drugs, Alcohol and Tobacco Policies A. The UHSAA supports the U.S. Supreme Court rulings regarding education. First, to prepare students to be good citizens and second, to teach them to be self-reliant and self-sufficient. Activities of the UHSAA con tribute to both of these goals. The use of alcohol, tobacco products or other drugs in almost every instance deters the realization of these goals. Every effort shall be made at the local, region and state levels of participation to eradicate the promotion, use or abuse of alcohol, drugs and tobacco with regard to participation in high school sports and activities. Limitation for participation of students in Utah high school activities regarding the use of alcohol, tobacco products and other drugs during a sports season, as defined in the Utah Code are: 1. First offense: Suspension from two consecutive games, meets, matches, competitions or performances at the same level of play (and any intervening levels as well). Practice may be continued following a personal assessment of the student by a licensed substance abuse intervention or treatment program and/or participation in a district, governing board of a charter or private school approved intervention program. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 61 BY-LAWS 2. Second offense: A six-week suspension from games, meets, matches, competitions or performances. Student participation in an assessment by a licensed substance abuse intervention or treatment program with prescribed follow-up is required. Practice may continue only after the assessment has been completed and positive participation in the prescribed follow-up is occurring. 3. Third offense: An eighteen-week suspension from all games, meets, matches, competitions, performances and practices. Reinstatement of eligibility at the end of the eighteen-week suspension is predicated upon successful completion of a formal assessment, intervention and treatment program. In all of the foregoing offenses, local school and/or district requirements which deal with discipline, suspension, corrective measures, parent/guardian involvement, rehabilitation and so forth, must be met. Interps & Guidelines 10.1.1: DRUGS, ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO A. Conditions of this policy include: 1. The use of electronic cigarettes or vapor products are prohibited. B. Implementation of Policy 1. Violations carry over year to year and sport/activity to sport/activity in a participant’s career (there is no “fresh start” each year). 2. Violations must occur and be discovered during a sport/activity season. 3. Any penalties for violation follow the student to any school to which he/she transfers. 4. Any violation beyond the third offense carries the same penalty as the third offense. SECTION 2: Local School or District Requirements Local school or district requirements may exceed those set forth in By-Laws Article 1 BY-LAWS ARTICLE 11: RIGHTS OF THE ASSOCIATION SECTION 1: Claim and Notice of Rights All rights to contests sanctioned by the Association and conducted within the jurisdiction of the Association, whether pre-season, regular season or post-season, are owned by the Association. The rights to these contests include rights to the images of the contest, filming, broadcast, reproductions or other intellectual property rights. The Association considers these rights to be valuable and any unauthorized use of pictures, descriptions, images or other intrusions into these rights will be prosecuted. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 62 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES 1. UHSAA Sports and Activities A. Sports: The interscholastic athletics within the jurisdiction of this Association are (as now constituted): B. Activities: The interscholastic activities within the jurisdiction of this Association are (as now constituted): Esports, Music, Speech/Debate and Theatre. Such other activities not enumerated above as may be approved by the Board of Trustees. 2. Guidelines for UHSAA Membership A. New schools applying for UHSAA membership shall meet all requirements outlined below and on the application for membership. The conditions of membership shall be set by the UHSAA Board of Trustees. Application for membership and declaration of conformance to the Constitution and By-Laws of the Association shall be submitted to the Board of Trustees after being signed by the President of the local board or presiding officer of private school governing board making application. B. The application for membership must be filed with the UHSAA by November 1 for acceptance the following school year. The membership application consists of the following criteria: i. Board of Education/Governing Body must adopt the membership resolution. ii. Schools seeking UHSAA membership shall meet one of the following accreditation requirements: a. Current accreditation by the Northwest Association of Schools and Colleges. b. Current accreditation through other appropriate accreditation agencies, including third party accrediting groups or agencies directly associated with the school’s purpose and mission. c. UHSAA/USBE accreditation/validation through the use of guidelines established in Utah State Board of Education Administrative Rules, 277-410-4. Transfer of Credit using those guidelines to qualify for UHSAA membership. d. Schools not demonstrating yearly accreditation will be placed on probation that year and will lose membership from the Association if they do not gain acceptable accreditation the following year. Girls Teams Basketball Cross Country Golf Lacrosse Soccer Softball Swimming Tennis Track & Field Volleyball Wrestling Boys Teams Basketball Cross Country Golf Lacrosse Soccer Swimming Tennis Track & Field Volleyball Wrestling Mixed Teams Baseball Competitive Cheer Drill Team Football 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 63 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES C. Stable enrollment figures required on the membership application must be accurate and current. D. Facilities and equipment must meet the requirements of each sport or activity rulebook. E. An on-site committee inspection is required by the Board of Trustees before membership is approved to ensure adequate facilities, seating, dressing rooms, etc. F. Participation in activities each year. Those participating in sports should fill the varsity level first and are recommended to field teams for lower level competition (i.e. JV, Soph, Freshman). G. 1A and 2A schools accepted for initial membership with the intent of participating in athletics will be designated as “Independent” members prior to approval as full members during the subsequent realignment. During realignment, any Independent can petition for full member status. Approval as a full member requires compliance to UHSAA rules, positive evaluations from UHSAA member schools in regards to facilities, scheduling and readiness to participate as demonstrated while an Independent. H. Schools on Independent Status: i. May participate at all levels of play: Varsity, JV, Sophomore, Freshman. ii. May schedule contests with any UHSAA member school whether a full member an Independent. iii. May participate in pre-season, regular season UHSAA sanctioned competitions. iv. Are not post-season eligible. Independents shall not participate in play-ins or state qualifying tournaments/meets for any UHSAA sports (individual or team). v. Will be assigned to a UHSAA Region for administrative purposes but will not have voting rights. I. Full member schools who schedule an “Independent” will receive an additional game, at each level scheduled, beyond their contest limitations in that particular sport or possibly two to allow for home and away scheduling within assigned region. 3. Three Categories of UHSAA Membership A. Full Members: schools approved by the BOT as full members and in good standing in the Association, which includes attendance at region meetings. Only full member schools are post-season eligible. A school must field teams in each of the three sport seasons. Anticipated failure to comply with this requirement must be declared by March 1 of the year prior to non-compliance. The member school could seek a waiver. Schools not meeting this membership requirement shall be designated as an “independent” rather than a full member. i. To be eligible for post-season competition in girls’ team sports, a full-member school must participate in at least one girls’ sport activity per sports season. ii. To be eligible for post-season competition in boys’ team sports, a full-member school must participate in at least one boy’s sport activity per sports season. B. Associate Members: schools approved for membership to participate in “Activities” only. An Associate member shall have all rights and privileges for voting representation and participation in music, speech/debate, theatre. The dues structure will remain the same. C. Independent Members schools which: i. 1A and 2A schools accepted for membership during an established alignment period with the intent of participating in athletics; ii. schools of any classification that do not meet the qualifications for post-season competition and 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 64 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES iii. established member schools who identify themselves as an Independent in a given sport(s). A “UHSAA Memo of Understanding” shall be created for each independent sport(s) and must be approved by the UHSAA Executive Committee. 4. Emerging Sports Policy A. Purpose i. The Emerging Sport Program (the “Program”) was developed with the oversight of the UHSAA Female Equity Committee. The purpose of the Program is to grow meaningful inter scholastic athletic participation opportunities for student-athletes, particularly for female student athletes, in sports that have the potential to reach the required number of student participants to be considered for UHSAA-sanctioned, state tournament status. ii. The Program will be managed by the Emerging Sports Committee at the UHSAA (the “Committee”). Members of the Committee shall be appointed by the Executive Director of the UHSAA, subject to the approval of the Board of Trustees of the UHSAA (the “Board”). Committee membership and contact information shall be set forth on the UHSAA’s webpage. The Committee oversees the application process for emerging sports, notifying the Board of sports added to or removed from the list of emerging sports and activities and making recommendations to the Board on whether an emerging sport or activity should be sanctioned. iii. As set forth in Article VI, the Emerging Sports Program shall apply equally to activities. B. Definitions i. Sport: A sport shall: (1) Be defined as an institutional activity involving physical exertion for the purpose of competition against teams or individuals within an interscholastic competition structure; and (2) Operate under standardized rules. ii. Activities: For purposes of Article VI, an activity shall: (1) Be defined as an institutional activity involving competition against teams or individuals within an interscholastic competition structure; and (2) Operate under standardized rules. iii. Emerging Sport: An emerging sport is an activity that: (1) Meets the definition of a sport; and (2) Is accepted and recognized by the Committee under the guidelines set forth herein as an emerging sport. iv. UHSAA Sanctioned Sport: A sanctioned sport activity is (1) a varsity interscholastic sport, (2) for which qualified participants receive the member school’s official varsity awards, (3) under the jurisdiction of the UHSAA that is subject to the UHSAA’s Constitution, By-Laws and Administrative Policies and Guidelines, as amended and updated from time to time, and (4) for which a state championship event is sponsored by the UHSAA. v. UHSAA Non-Sanctioned Sport: A non-sanctioned sport is a sport that has been accorded that status by a member school that satisfies the following conditions: (1) It is a sport that has not been accorded varsity status; and (2) It is a sport in which student-athletes compete in interscholastic competition. vi. Interscholastic: Interscholastic refers to a game, match, exhibition, scrimmage, competition, or joint practice session with another member school’s sanctioned or non-sanctioned team, regardless of its formality, in which competition in a sport or activity occurs between an athletics team or individual representing a member school and any other team or individual not representing the athletics program of the same member school. In the case of a 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 65 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES non-sanctioned sport, interscholastic competition includes competition in a sport between an athletics team or individual representing a member school or schools and any other team or individual not representing the program of the same member schools. vii. Member school: A member school is any Utah high school that is a member of the UHSAA. viii. Classification and Region: Classification and Region shall mean and refer to the classification and region to which a member school is assigned pursuant to Article 5 of the UHSAA Constitution, as amended from time to time. C. Requirements to be added as an Emerging Sport; Recordkeeping i. The Committee shall maintain a list of sports designated as emerging sports. The list shall be published and kept up-to-date on the UHSAA’s website. ii. A sport for female student-athletes shall be designated as an emerging sport once a minimum of 10 percent of all member schools have students participating in a specific non- sanctioned sport or activity. Provided, however, that in order to count toward the 10 percent threshold, the number of participants for a member school must be sufficient to field a team able to engage in interscholastic competition. iii. A sport for male or coed student-athletes shall be designated as an emerging sport once a minimum of 20 percent of all member schools have students participating in a specific non- sanctioned sport. Provided, however, that in order to count toward the 20 percent thresh old, the number of participants for a member school must be sufficient to field a team able to engage in interscholastic competition. iv. A sport shall be undesignated as an emerging sport and removed from the emerging sport list should participation by member schools fall below the threshold for one competitive season during one academic year. a) In order for the Committee to maintain accurate records of emerging sports, on or before October 1 of odd calendar years, the Committee shall send a questionnaire to each member school asking the member schools to identify student interest and participation in non-sanctioned sports and to provide other information that the Committee determines is relevant and helpful to the management of this Program, which information may include the numbers of participants in non-sanctioned sports. b) An emerging sport’s governing body or a UHSAA member may request that the UHSAA provide limited services to the emerging sport by submitting a fully completed Emerging Sport Limited Services Application to the UHSAA. Incomplete Applications shall not be considered, including those applications that are not signed and verified as being truthful and accurate. Limited services shall be provided by the UHSAA to the emerging sport for which a proper application is submitted. c) The limited services that the UHSAA may choose to provide to an emerging sport or activity do not include (1) rules meetings or online rules clinics; (2) assigned rules interpreters; (3) specific sport policy area listed on the UHSAA website or in the UHSAA Handbook; and (4) region or state championship administered by the UHSAA. d) The UHSAA may, in its discretion, cease providing limited services to an emerging sport after 5 years. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 66 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES D. Gov ernance of Emerging Sports i. Inter scholastic competition for emerging sports shall not be restricted by districts, classifications, or by varsity and sub-varsity designations. ii. Emerging sports requesting limited services shall be subject to the following: (1) By-laws Article 1, Section 2 (age rule); (2) By-laws Article 1, Section 3 (sports season rule); (3) By-laws Article 1, Section 4 (years of eligibility); (4) By-laws Article 1, Section 8 (scholastic rule); (5) Use of registered officials, as applicable; and (6) National Federation of State High School Association game rules or game rule codes specified by UHSAA for member school competition, as applicable. iii. Contest limitations, individual player limitations, and the applicable season of participation will be determined by agreement of participants. Adherence to By-laws other than those listed in this Section are optional, as determined by the organizing body. E. Becoming A Sanctioned Sport i. An emerging sport shall be considered for becoming a sanctioned sport upon the following: a) For female-only emerging sports: When it is sponsored as an emerging sport at a minimum of 20 percent of member schools. b) For coed or male-only emerging sports: When it is sponsored as an emerging sport at a minimum of 30 percent of member schools. ii. Upon a sport reaching the threshold set forth in Section V.A., the Committee shall consider an emerging sport for elevation to a sanctioned sport or activity. In this evaluation, the Committee may consider any factor it believes is relevant, including but not limited to the following: a) The impact on Title IX compliance b) The percentage of member schools that facilitate interscholastic competition in the emerging sport. c) Participation in community-sponsored leagues for the sport d) Whether other state high school athletic associations sponsor or sanction competition in the sport e) University, college, and junior college opportunities for participation after high school f) Whether the sport is a lifetime sport or activity, easily accessed in later life, that contributes to public health or fitness g) Whether the NFHS or other recognized governing body publishes rules for interscholastic competition in the sport h) Assistance available for growing the sport from national governing bodies, in-state coaches association, and/or in-state officials associations i) Significant obstacles to growing the sport, such as lack of facilities, expensive equipment, risk of injury, lack of experienced coaches and officials j) The opportunity for student-athletes to participate equally from all socio-economic backgrounds k) Whether sanctioning the sport will divert participants from and weaken an existing sanctioned or emerging sport l) Whether there is significant competition for student-athletes to participate in this sport outside of school m) The length of time the sport has been an emerging sport 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 67 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES n) The burden on member schools, districts and on the UHSAA of sanctioning the emerging sport o) Utah Division of Risk Management concerns and input iii. The Committee shall make a recommendation to the Board of Trustees as to whether or not an emerging sport or activity should be sanctioned in the November BOT meeting of the academic year following the academic year in which the emerging sport or activity met the threshold requirements set forth in Section C. The Board shall make the final determination on sanctioning in the following March BOT meeting. iv. Should the Board of Trustees sanction a sport or activity, interscholastic competition as a sanctioned sport or activity shall begin by the third academic year following the academic year during which the Board approved sanctioning. By way of example, if an emerging sport met the qualification thresholds during the academic year 2025-2026, the Committee would provide its recommendation to the Board in the November 2025 BOT meeting, and the Board would make a final decision in the March 2026 BOT meeting. If the Board approved sanctioning the sport, sanctioned competition would begin no later than the 2029-2030 academic year. v. An interested party may request reconsideration of a Board decision only if new information is presented that was not reasonably available to the Board at the time of the original decision. Reconsideration may be requested by emailing or mailing a letter to the Committee within 30 calendar days from the date of the Board decision. An explanation must be submitted to clarify the reasons the new information was not originally available. Any additional or repetitive information that was originally available to the Committee and to the Board may not be submitted for reconsideration. The chair of the Committee shall determine if the new information standard is met for all reconsideration submissions. If the reconsideration standard is met, the Committee will reconsider the new information within 30 days of the reconsideration submission and shall promptly provide its recommendation to the Board. The Board shall consider the Committee’s recommendation and render a final decision on sanctioning at its next regularly scheduled meeting. F. Activities i. The foregoing policies and procedures for the Emerging Sports Program shall apply equally to activities and all the requirements for and benefits to sports under the Emerging Sports Program shall apply to and be available to activities. 5. Sportsmanship Policy A. INTRODUCTION - The effective Utah secondary school should support both an academic program and an activities program. These programs should do more than merely coexist, they should be integrated and support each other in “different” arenas. The concept of “sportsmanship” should be taught , modeled, expected and reinforced in the classroom and in all competitive activities. B. PHILOSOPHY - Activities are an important aspect of the total education process in Utah schools. They provide an arena for participants to grow, to excel, to understand and to value the concepts of SPORTSMANSHIP and teamwork. They are an opportunity for coaches and school staff to teach and model SPORTSMANSHIP, to build school pride and to increase student/community involvement. This ultimately translates into improved academic performance. Activities are also an opportunity for the community to demonstrate its support for the participants and the school, and to model the concepts of SPORTSMANSHIP for our youth as respected representatives of society. Sportsmanship is good citizenship in action! 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 68 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES C. GENERAL SPORTSMANSHIP GUIDELINES The Sportsmanship Page at uhsaa.org provides resources for schools and information on the UHSAA statewide sportsmanship program, “Raise the Bar.” The UHSAA Sportsmanship Handbook, posted on-line, discusses required behavior. The Handbook alerts administrators, coaches, players, fans, and spectators that the UHSAA can and will take action against those who fail to meet the standards listed therein. All individuals associated with UHSAA activities shall read the Sportsmanship Handbook. Required responsibilities include the following: i. Be courteous to all (participants, coaches, officials, staff, fans, and spectators) ii. Know the rules. Abide by and respect officials’ decisions. iii. Win with character and lose with dignity. iv. Display appreciation for good performance regardless of the team. v. Exercise self-control and reflect positively upon yourself, the team, and the school. vi. Do not criticize officials or openly question the integrity of an official, especially in media outlets. If said action is shown to have taken place, the UHSAA reserves the right to fine, suspend and/or sanction parties who are involved in the violations. For the purpose of this rule, the use of social media is considered to be a media outlet. vii. Permit only positive sportsmanlike behavior to reflect on your school or its activities. D. GENERAL STATEMENT OF POLICY i. The Utah High School Activities Association believes that all individuals should be treated with respect and dignity. Students should be able to participate in UHSAA-sponsored activities in an environment that is free from racial slurs, racial harassment, and racial discrimination. Furthermore, the UHSAA disapproves of any form of taunting which is intended to embarrass, ridicule or demean others under any circumstances including on the basis of race, religion, gender, sexual orientation, creed, or national origin. It shall be a violation of this policy for a participant in UHSAA activities to engage in racial harassment, racial violence, or taunting. For the purpose of this policy, the UHSAA considers participants to include student-athletes, coaches, parents, and fans. E. DEFINITIONS i. Racial Harassment: Racial Harassment consists of conduct relating to an individual’s race when the conduct: 1. Has the purpose or effect of creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive environment. 2. Has the purpose or effect of emotionally or unreasonably interfering with an individual’s performance. ii. Racial Violence: Racial violence is a physical act of aggression or assault upon another because of, or in a manner reasonable related to race. iii. Taunting: Taunting includes any actions or comments by coaches, players or spectators which are intended to bait, anger, embarrass, ridicule or demean others. F. ADMINISTRATORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES i. While each participant in UHSAA activities is responsible for playing a role in creating a safe, educational experience, the UHSAA believes as a matter of policy that school principals and administrators are ultimately responsible for the conduct of groups associated with their school community during the regular season and postseason. It shall be the responsibility of each member school principal to exercise control over all individuals to the extent necessary to ensure safety and fair play for all participation and adherence with these standards. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 69 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES G. POLICIES REGARDING PLAYERS, COACHES, FANS, and SPECTATORS The UHSAA policies regarding players, coaches, fans, and spectators can be found at https://www.uhsaa.org/sportsmanshippolicies.pdf PLAYERS MAY NOT APPEAL AN EJECTION, UNLESS on of the following stiuations occur: When a player is ejected from a contest that has a bearing on participation in a state championship tournament, or a player is ejected for fighting (regular season or post season), or a coach is ejected (regular season or post season), a responsible administrative officer of that school may appeal that ejection to the UHSAA Director of Officials. A $250 fee still applies for coaches ejections as listed in section G below. For the purposes of this rule, a contest is defined as one having a bearing on a state championship is as follows: 1. Last regular season contest 2. Region tournament 3. State tournament contest 4. Only advancing team in 1-2-3 above The procedure of hearing an appeal will be as follows: 1. Appeal must be filed within 24 hours of the contest 2. The initial Appeal Request & School Ejection Report must be submitted in writing by an authorized administrator from the member school to the UHSAA Director of Officials using the electronic forms. 3. The UHSAA Director of Officials will form a committee to review the ejection and any evidence submitted. The appeals committee will be comprised of equal number so Athletic Directors and officials/UHSAA Staff, with the added stipulation the AD representatives deciding on an appeal cannot be from the same region as the one appealing. 4. The decision of the appeal committee is final. i. A player who is restricted or ejected shall remain in the bench area with the team. A coach who is ejected shall leave the vicinity (out of sight and out of sound) of the playing or contest area immediately and is prohibited from any further contact (direct or indirect) with the team for the remainder of the game or contest. When serving an ejection penalty, a coach is prohibited from attending any games at any level (out-of-site, out-of-sound). ii. The UHSAA Executive staff is empowered to enact suspension penalties for flagrant or violent acts whether detected or not by officials. iii. A one-game suspension may be enacted against any coach or player who approaches an official at the conclusion of a game in an unsportsmanlike manner. A thirty-minute cooling off period is in place after a contest where coaches and players are banned from approaching officials. This includes dressing room areas, parking lots or any other area where game officials are located. The report will be made by the official to the UHSAA and the ejection notice will be forwarded to the coach through the principal. iv. The head coach may leave the confines of the bench or box when a fight breaks out or has broken out. Additional coaching staff may assist ONLY if NFHS rules allow. Bench personnel not authorized to leave the confines of the bench or box during a fight are disqualified from the game and shall leave the vicinity of the playing or contest area immediately. Any player who leaves the bench area during a fight, or who participates in a fight during the season or tournament play, will be ejected from that game and shall remain in the bench 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 70 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES area with the team. The penalty for such an ejection is stated above. v. Schools are not allowed to schedule games or contests to avoid the ejection policy penalty. vi. Sportsmanship conduct rules apply to all competitions (i.e. preseason, region and post-season play). H. COACH EJECTION APPEAL PROCESS Following is the process for handling an appeal from a coach who has been ejected in a contest (players may not appeal). No appeals will be allowed if the appeal occurs on Friday with a subsequent Saturday game or with multiple games in a tournament other than the state tournament. If such appeal cannot be arranged, the ejection stands. Upon fulfilling all the following guidelines, an appeal may be granted or denied. Pre-Appeal Procedures: i. To initiate the process, the ejected coach’s administrator must request, in writing, that an appeal take place. ii. The principal of the affected school must post an appeal fee of $250.00. Depending on the appeal site, at least two of the jurists involved will travel (the ADAC member from the respective Region of the Executive Committee member, and the Officials Association representative) and their expenses will come from the appeal fee. This fee will also serve as a fine to the ejected party. Each panelist will receive a minimum $25 fee and an additional current mileage rate for expenses. This fee is automatic. If the appeal is successful, the coach/school will be refunded the remaining funds. If the appeal is unsuccessful, the remaining funds belong to the appealing school’s region. iii. The appeal should take place as soon as possible after the ejection occurs to ensure the coach a fair opportunity to be available for the next scheduled game. To accommodate this there are 20 different appeal sites throughout the state located in proximity to member schools. If there is not enough time to convene the hearing’s panel, the ejection will stand. 6. Compliance The UHSAA complies with the following: The Open and Public Meetings Act, The Government Records Access and Management Act, The Utah Public Officers’ and Employees’ Ethics Act, The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, and the Student Data Protection Act. 7. FERPA A. The term “educational entity” as used herein, includes the private corporation the Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA), for convenience and in conjunction with R277-487-3 . B. The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) is a federal law that affords parents the right to have access to their children’s education records, the right to seek to have the records amended, and the right to have some control over the disclosure of personally identifiable information from the education records. When a student turns 18 years old, or enters a postsecondary institution at any age, the rights under FERPA transfer from the parents to the student (“eligible student”). The FERPA statute is found at 20 U.S.C. § 1232g and the FERPA regulations are found at 34 CFR Part 99 . ( All of the statues referenced under ‘C’ can be found using this link) C. FERPA permits the disclosure of personal information from students’ education records, without consent of the parent or eligible student, if the disclosure meets certain conditions found in §99.31 of the FERPA regulations. Except for disclosures to school officials, disclosures related to some judicial 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 71 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES orders or lawfully issued subpoenas, disclosures of directory information, and disclosures to the parent or eligible student, §99.32 of the FERPA regulations requires the school, or educational entity to record the disclosure. Parents and eligible students have a right to inspect and review the record of disclosures. A school, or educational entity may disclose personal information from the education records of a student without obtaining prior written consent of the parents or the eligible student – i. To other school officials, including teachers, coach(es), within the educational entity or institution whom the school, or educational entity has determined to have legitimate educational interests. This includes contractors, consultants, volunteers, or other parties to whom the school, or educational entity has outsourced institutional services or functions, provided that the conditions listed in §99.31(a)(1)(i)(B)(1) - (a)(1)(i)(B)(2) are met. (§99.31(a)(1)) ii. To officials of another school, school system, or institution of postsecondary education where the student seeks or intends to enroll, or where the student is already enrolled if the disclosure is for purposes related to the student’s enrollment or transfer, subject to the requirements of §99.34. (§99.31(a)(2)) iii. To comply with a judicial order or lawfully issued subpoena. (§99.31(a)(9)) iv. To appropriate officials in connection with a health or safety emergency, subject to §99.36. (§99.31(a)(10) v. Information the school, district, or educational entity has designated as “directory information” under §99.37. (§99.31(a)(11)) D. The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA), a Federal law, requires that schools, district, and educational entities with certain exceptions, obtain parental written consent prior to the disclosure of personally identifiable information from your child’s education records. However, may disclose appropriately designated “directory information” without written consent, unless you have advised the educational entity to the contrary in accordance with (FERPA) procedures. The primary purpose of directory information is to allow the educational entity to include this type of information from your child’s education records in certain educational entity publications. Examples include: showing your student’s role in a speech or theatre production at a state competition; the annual yearbook and/or record book; honor roll or other recognition lists including but not limited to academic all-state annual awards; and sports activity sheets, and/or state programs, such as, but not limited to wrestling, volleyball, boys’ and girls’ basketball, baseball, softball and football showing weight and height of team members. E. Education Records Defined i. For the purposes of this policy, the term “education records” means those records, files, documents, and other materials that contain information directly related to a student and are maintained by an education agency or institution or by a person acting for such agency or institution. 1. The term “education records” does not include: a. Records that contain only information about a student after he or she is no longer a student in the schools, educational agency, or institution. b. Records made by schools, educational agency, or district personnel that are kept in the sole possession of the maker and are not accessible or revealed to anyone other than a temporary substitute for the maker of the record. c. Records maintained by a law enforcement unit of the educational agency or 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 72 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES institution that were created by that law enforcement unit for the purpose of law enforcement. d. Records relating to an individual who is employed by an educational agency or institution, that: i. Are made and maintained in the normal course of business; ii. Relate exclusively to the individual in that individual’s capacity as an employee; and iii. Are not available for use for any other purpose. e. Records relating to an individual in attendance at the school who is employed as a result of his or her status as a student are education records and not excepted under paragraph (4). 2. Records on a student who is eighteen (18) years of age or older that are: a. Made or maintained by a physician, psychiatrist, psychologist, or other recognized professional or paraprofessional acting in his or her professional capacity or assisting in a paraprofessional capacity; b. Made, maintained, or used only in connection with treatment of the student; and c. Disclosed only to individuals providing the treatment. i. For the purpose of this definition, ``treatment’’ means any action, or prescribed action by licensed health care providers are part of the program of instruction at the agency or institution. F. Notification In Case of Breach i. If there is a release of a student’s personally identifiable student data due to a security breach, the District, or educational agency shall notify: 1. The student, if the student is an adult student; or 2. The student’s parent or legal guardian, if the student is not an adult student. G. Sharing Student Data i. Beginning with the 2017-18 school year, the educational agency may not share a student’s personally identifiable student data except in conformance with the requirements of this policy and with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (“FERPA”) and related provisions under 20 U.S.C. §§ 1232(g) and 1232(h) . H. Student Data Collection by the UHSAA i. Student data is collected by the UHSAA for the purpose of student/parent generated requests for transfers, and academic all-state nominations. Student transfers are generated at the parent, student, and/or school levels. Transfers are a process for students to change educational environments for specific and outlined reasons. Student data received by the UHSAA from parents, students, and/or schools assist in the transfer process. Information collected is as follows: 1. The sending and receiving schools upload student information as needed; 2. Parent/student names; 3. Student date of birth, with appropriate grade level; 4. Current and previous addresses; with 5. Proof of residency by providing two documents showing current addresses; 6. Documentation of the criteria for transfer request; and 7. Student transcript for eligibility. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 73 I. Parents Opting Out i. Parents can opt-out of the transfer process using “RegisterMyAthlete” (RMA) by doing the following: 1. Not marking the box that says: I agree to the terms and conditions set forth by RMA; 2. Initiate a transfer through the sending/receiving school; or 3. Deliver all the required documentation and information in person to the UHSAA, using certified USPS, and/or electronically through personal email to submit@uhsaa.org . J. Third Party Contractors i. The educational entity may provide a third-party contractor which may include, but not limited to “RegisterMyAthlete” with personally identifiable student data received under a contract with the educational entity strictly for the purpose of providing the contracted product or service. ii. When contracting with a third-party contractor, the educational entity shall require the following provisions in the contract: 1. Requirements and restrictions related to the collection, use, storage, or sharing of student data by the third-party contractor that are necessary for the educational entity to ensure compliance with the provisions of the Student Data Protection Act and State Board of Education rules; 2. A description of a person, or type of person, including an affiliate of the third-party contractor, with whom the third-party contractor may share student data; 3. Provisions that govern requests by the educational entity for the deletion of the student data received by the third-party contractor from the educational entity; 4. Except as provided in this policy and if required by the educational entity, provisions that prohibit the secondary use of personally identifiable student data by the third- party contractor; and 5. An agreement by the third-party contractor that, at the request of the educational entity, the educational entity or its designee may audit the third-party contractor to verify compliance with the contract. * A third-party contractor’s use of personally identifiable student data shall be in accordance with Utah Code §§ 53A-1-1410 and 53A-1-1411. Utah Code § 53A-1-1410 (2016) Utah Code § 53A-1-1411 (2016) , R277-487-3 8. Hearings Procedures A. Pursuant to the authority granted by the constitution and by-laws of the Utah High School Activities Association a hearing panel is convened to take evidence and make a determination of the eligibility of (name of student) for participation in activities under the jurisdiction of the Association. All interested parties have the right to attend, be represented by counsel, call and examine witness, and offer evidence. This is an open meeting. If there is evidence a party wishes not to be presented in an open hearing, that party should immediately inform the Association staff. Counsel represents the panel and may assist it in the conduct of the hearing. Counsel and the panel may examine and cross-examine witnesses. The presentation of the parties is limited to fifteen (15) minutes. The panel may also permit rebuttal evidence following the initial presentations, if the panel deems it useful. The technical rules of evidence will not apply. The panel may exclude any evidence which it determines to be irrelevant, immaterial or unduly repetitious. The examination of witnesses shall be orderly. ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 74 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES B. The following questions will be asked during the hearing: i. Is there any reason any party cannot fairly proceed at this time? ii. Participation in the hearing will be considered a waiver of any objection not otherwise raised. iii. Does anyone have an objection? iv. Is there any reason the hearing cannot conclude at this time? C. At the conclusion of the hearing, the record is closed and the panel takes the matter under advisement and renders a decision. 9. Filming The UHSAA does not have policy restricting filming of games. It was determined by the Executive Committee that filming at state tournament games will be allowed, including the filming of future opponents. Individual regions, schools, or coaches’ associations may establish policies on filming. Responsibility for enforcement would be the responsibility of the group(s) which established the guidelines. Film or videotape may not be used for any commercial purposes other than customary news reporting without prior permission from the school involved. If the event is a post season contest, permission must be obtained from the UHSAA. 10. Practice at State Tournament Sites No practice, contest or game is allowed at the site of state competitive cheer, drill team, football, basketball, baseball, lacrosse, softball, soccer, swimming and diving, volleyball, track or cross country meets within two (2) weeks of the state competition, except if that site is the HOME site of a particular school, then they may play and/or practice according to their usual home schedule. Tennis and golf may practice at the state site. 11. Access to Facilities Every consideration should be given to all visiting teams regarding facilities for videotaping, radio broadcasts, dressing areas, coaching, etc. 12. Field and Court Markings Playing fields and courts must be properly marked following the National Federation rule book specifications. If game officials determine that a field is marked improperly, a school could forfeit a game played under protest where not otherwise specified by rule. 13. Drugs, Alcohol and Tobacco Advertising Advertising imprinted with logos, slogans, pictures or writing which condones, promotes or encourages student use of tobacco, alcohol or drug products may not be used in connection with any UHSAA sponsored activity. 14. State Tournament Advertising & Awards A. Selling advertisement or distribution of materials at state tournament events can only be done through sponsorship of the UHSAA. B. Awards other than those made by the UHSAA will not be allowed without prior approval. This includes extra team trophies, all-state teams, outstanding coach, etc. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 75 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES 15. Banners and Signs There are to be no banners or signs of any kind, except those of corporate sponsors or signs of welcome, displayed at any state meet or tournament. 16. Sideline Cheerleaders Sideline Cheerleaders are recognized as a performing group at high school sports and activities and will be subject to regulations and safety guidelines as outlined for state tournaments or meets. 17. Duplicate Trophies In activities where a tie breaker can be established, team ties will be broken. In activities where team titles end in ties, duplicate trophies will be awarded for second place ties. First place ties will be given duplicate trophies but no second place trophy will be awarded. 18. Academic All-State A. For up to two weeks after the initial posting of the Academic All-State list, member schools can submit students who weren’t submitted on time to the deadline and those students will be added to the Academic All-State list. Member schools who have late submissions will be put on a list and they will be read at a following meeting of the UHSAA Executive Committee. B. The Executive Committee Chair and Association Executive Director/Staff will send a letter to violating member schools. A violation is defined as having a student or students who were not submitted by the initial application deadline for a given block of activity seasons. The four blocks are: Fall Sports, Winter Sports, Fine Arts (Music, Speech/Debate, Theatre) and Spring Sports. C. On second violations within an academic year, the Executive Committee will fine member schools. D. On subsequent violations in an academic year, the fine will escalate, subject to action by the Executive Committee. 19. Blood Pathogens & Communicable Disease Precautions A player or coach who is bleeding, who has an open wound or who has blood on his/her uniform shall be prohibited from participating further in the game until appropriate treatment has been administered. If medical care or treatment can be administered in a reasonable amount of time, the individual will not have to leave the game. The length of time that is considered reasonable is up to the judgment of the referee/umpire. 20. Lost or Stolen Articles The UHSAA is not responsible for lost or stolen articles. Teams and spectators must secure their own valuables. 21. Catastrophic Insurance Procedures Each year the UHSAA secures a contract with an insurance company to provide catastrophic insurance for participating students. All students participating in UHSAA sanctioned activities are covered. Below are some key points to remember about catastrophic insurance: A. The policy is catastrophic in nature, which means that it covers those accidents which are extreme, e.g. coma, paralysis, dismemberment and death. B. The catastrophic insurance medical policy is subject to a $75,000 deductible and pays on a secondary basis, meaning that it will pay only the portion of expenses that are not paid by other insurance coverage (family medical plan, etc.). 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 76 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES C. The catastrophic insurance also has a cash benefit portion. A copy of the contract is available for review if needed. D. The policy covers eligible insureds while participating in school sponsored and directly supervised games and official practice sessions of all Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA) sanctioned interscholastic sports and activities including but not limited to band, cheerleaders, majorettes and non-athletic activities including speech, music, theatre and debate. Coverage includes sport specific out-of-season practices, camps, clinics, games and non-athletic activities as allowed by the Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA) rules and conducted under the direction of the assigned coaches of the member schools and sponsored by those schools and covered travel*. *Covered travel means team or individual travel, for purposes of representing the Participating School or Sponsoring Organization, that is to or from the location of a Cover Events and is authorized by the Insured Person’s Participating School or Sponsoring Organization, provided the travel is paid for or subject to reimbursement by the Participating School or Sponsoring Organization. Covered Travel to a Covered Event will commence upon embarkation from an authorized departure point and terminate upon arrival at the location of the Covered Event. Covered Travel from a Covered Event will commence upon departing from the location of the Covered Event and terminate upon return to the authorized place from which such Covered Travel to the Covered Event began. E. This coverage does not include events or sessions in the prescribed moratoriums of the Utah High School Activities Association (UHSAA). The moratoriums comprise approximately five to six weeks of the calendar year. F. Claims must be reported within 30 days of the occurring incident. All injury accidents should be reported immediately to the UHSAA office on a form provided on the UHSAA website. CLAIMS FILED MUST INCLUDE THE PRINCIPAL’S SIGNATURE. G. Most districts require individual students to show proof of medical insurance before they are allowed to participate. The UHSAA strongly endorses this type of district policy. 22. Due Dates A. There will be a $100.00 fine to the region or school responsible for not meeting the region entry deadline due dates for all activities. B. There will be a $100.00 fine to the school for not meeting the game entry deadline in http://www.arbitersports.com for each sport. 23. Post-Season UHSAA Ticketing Procedures A. Financial reimbursement policies for hosting UHSAA state contests, where UHSAA tickets are sold. Maximum allowed costs for hosts: i. Schools are encouraged to stay under the maximum allowed costs. These are not guaranteed maximum amounts. Finacial reports must itemize expenses. ii. Officials’ game fees and travel costs are not included in the above costs. These will be paid by the UHSAA. iii. A host school may request a variance in advance of the contest. Football 8-Player $700 1A $800 2A $900 3A $1000 4A $1200 5A $1400 6A $1600 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 77 24. Post-Season Non-UHSAA Ticketing Procedures Policy established by the UHSAA Executive Committee for post-season games not ticketed by the UHSAA is that the host school shall receive all revenue. 25. Financial Claims All financial claims should be submitted within 45 days following an Association activity. Claims received after the 45-day period will be discounted 25%. No claims will be paid after June 20th. With the exception of team sports, participants’ names must be listed on the back of the claim form. 26. Event Ticketing Except for competing teams or individuals with UHSAA athletic passes, everyone must have a ticket for admission to state contests where admission is charged, including cheerleaders, drill teams, mascots, bus drivers, photographers, etc. 27. UHSAA Passes A. UHSAA athletic passes shall be accepted for admittance at all sanctioned events within the state. This includes all pre-season contests, region competitions, dual/tri meets, invitationals, endowment games, All-Star contests, etc. B. The Executive Committee has authorized purchase of an athletic pass for sports officials who have retired with fifteen years of service as a UHSAA sanctioned sports certified official. 28. UHSAA Silver Pass A. The Board of Trustees has authorized that those who have been active Utah high school music, speech/ debate or theare speech/debate advisors, athletic coaches, athletic directors or high school administrators for twenty (20) or more years are eligible to receive a Silver Honorary Pass upon the verification of the Principal or Superintendent of the last high school where they worked. The individual must then be approved by the UHSAA based on the qualifications stated above. B. Those who have been a district superintendent in Utah for ten (10) or more years, and who are not currently serving as a district superintendent, are eligible to receive a Silver Honorary Pass upon approval of the UHSAA. C. The Board of Trustees has authorized the purchase of a UHSAA athletic pass for Utah high school music, theatre or speech/debate advisors, athletic coaches, athletic directors or high school administrators who have met the qualifications for fifteen (15) years, but do not meet the required twenty (20) years for a Silver Honorary Pass. The individual must then be approved by the UHSAA based on the qualifications stated above. 29. Annual Rules Clinics for Coaches and Officials On an annual basis, all HEAD COACHES and OFFICIALS are required to attend a UHSAA Live Rules Clinic or complete a UHSAA Online Clinic and quiz for their designated sport. If you attend a live clinic you are required to sign the roll to receive credit, and if you complete the online clinic you are required to submit a quiz for credit. Schools will be fined $50 if the head coach fails to attend an annual live UHSAA Rules Clinic or successfully complete the annual UHSAA Online Rules Clinic and quiz for their designated sport by the established deadline. ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 78 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES 30. Heat Acclimatization Before participating in the preseason practice period, all student-athletes should undergo a pre-participation medical examination administered by a qualified medical professional. The examination can identify predisposing factors related to a number of safety concerns, including the identification of youths at particular risk for exertional heat illness. The heat-acclimatization period is defined as the initial 14 consecutive days of preseason practice for all student athletes. The goal of the acclimatization period is to enhance exercise heat tolerance and the ability to exercise safely and effectively in warm to hot conditions. This period should begin on the first day of practice or conditioning before the regular season. Any practices or conditioning conducted before this time should not be considered part of the heat-acclimatization period. Regardless of the conditioning program and conditioning status leading up to the first formal practice, all student athletes (including those who arrive at preseason practice after the first day of practice) should follow the 14-day heat-acclimatization plan. During the preseason heat acclimatization period, if practice occurs on 6 consecutive days, student-athletes should have 1 day of complete rest (no conditioning, walk-throughs, practices, etc). Days on which athletes do not practice due to a scheduled rest day, injury, or illness do not count toward the heat-acclimatization period. For example, an athlete who sits out the third and fourth days of practice during this time (e.g., Wednesday and Thursday) will resume practice as if on day 3 of the heat-acclimatization period when returning to play on Friday. Definitions A practice is defined as the period of time a participant engages in a coach-supervised, school approved, sport or coaching related physical activity. Each individual practice should last no more than three (3) hours. Warm-up, stretching, and cool down activities are part of the 3-hour practice time. Regardless of ambient temperature conditions, all conditioning and weight-room activities should be considered part of practice. A walk-through is defined as a teaching opportunity with the athletes not wearing protective equipment (e.g., helmets, shoulder pads, catcher’s gear, shin guards) or using other sport-related equipment (e.g., footballs, blocking sleds, pitching machines, soccer balls, marker cones). The walk-through is not part of the 3-hour practice period, can last no more than 1 hour per day, and does not include conditioning or weight-room activities. A recovery period is defined as the time between the end of 1 practice or walk-through and the beginning of the next practice or walk-through. During this time, athletes should rest in a cool environment, with no sport or conditioning related activity permitted (e.g., speed or agility drills, strength training, conditioning, or walk-through). Treatment with the athletic trainer is permissible. Requirements A. Days 1 through 5 of the heat-acclimatization period consist of the first 5 days of formal practice. During this time, athletes may not participate in more than one (1) practice per day. B. If a practice is interrupted by inclement weather or heat restrictions, the practice should recommence once conditions are deemed safe. Total practice time should not exceed 3 hours in any one (1) day. C. A 1-hour maximum walk-through is permitted during days 1–5 of the heat-acclimatization period; how ever, a 3-hour recovery period should be inserted between the practice and walk-through (or vice versa). D. During days 1–2 of the heat-acclimatization period, in sports requiring helmets or shoulder pads, a helmet is to be the only protective equipment permitted. During days 3–5, helmets and shoulder pads are permitted. Beginning on day 6, all protective equipment may be worn and full contact may begin. i. On days 3–5, contact with blocking sleds and tackling dummies may be initiated. ii. Full-contact sports: 100% live contact drills should begin no earlier than day 6. E. A minimum of 1 rest day shall occur following 6 consecutive practice days. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 79 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES F. Beginning no earlier than day 6 and continuing through day 14, double-practice days must be followed by a single-practice day. On single-practice days, 1 walk-through is permitted, separated from the practice by at least 3 hours of continuous rest. When a double-practice day is followed by a rest day, another double-practice day is permitted after the rest day. G. On a double-practice day, neither practice shall exceed 3 hours in duration, nor shall student-athletes participate in more than 5 total hours of practice. Warm-up, stretching, cool-down, walk through, conditioning, and weight-room activities are included as part of the practice time. The two practices should be separated by at least 3 continuous hours in a cool environment. Football Game Day Heat Stress Accommodations A. If we are in RED on the Kestrel Heat Stress monitor: A 5-MINUTE break will be allowed at the end of each quarter to allow for equipment removal (helmets/ shoulder pads) of athletes with open water and Ice towels utilized to cool them down. B. If we are in ORANGE on the Kestrel Heat Stress monitor: A 4-MINUTE break will be allowed at the end of each quarter to allow for helmet removal of athletes with open water and ice towels utilized to cool them down. The goal is to allow the person’s body to have a cooling period and then resume play after the break. Because the risk of exertional heat illnesses during the preseason heat-acclimatization period is high, it is strongly recommended that an athletic trainer be on site before, during, and after all practices. 31. Lightning At all UHSAA sanctioned events that are held in outdoor venues the host school shall designate an individual to monitor weather. This individual shall meet with the head official for the event prior to the contest. At that meeting the following will be discussed: A. The Guidelines on Handling Contests During Lightning Disturbances which appears in all NFHS Rules Books. B. Responsibilities of the individual charged with monitoring the weather and those of the head official relative to possible weather disturbances. C. Contingencies regarding possible suspensions of p lay due to lightning. The head official in consultation with the individual assigned to monitor weather will affect any suspension due to lightning. 32. UHSAA PA Announcers, School Bands & In Stadium Music Policy A. No PA, Band or In Stadium Music will be played during game play. B. All PA announcements or dialogue, and any music will cease when the offensive team breaks the huddle. Teams who run a hurry up offense, or don’t huddle as a team, the PA announcements or dialogue and any music must stop when the offensive team lines up for the snap. C. This policy also applies to the huddle of the kick-off team. D. PA, Band, or In Stadium music should be limited to dead ball situations: After a touchdown, quarter breaks, halftime, and timeouts. E. PA announcers must always remain neutral. They are considered part of the game administrative team at the school before, during, and after the contest. PA announcers must never talk about opponents, make disparaging remarks about officials, coaches, and players. Their job as an announcer is to create an environment of respect for both teams and communities. 33. UHSAA State Event Guidelines Those attending or participating in UHSAA State Events shall adhere to the “UHSAA State Event Guidelines” outlined in the chart on the following page. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 80 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES & GUIDELINES LEGEND: BB - Baseball CC - Cross Country GO - Golf SB - Softball TR - Track & Field BSK - Basketball DR - Drill Team LAX - Lacrosse SW - Swimming VB - Volleyball CCH - Competitive Cheer FB - Football SC - Soccer TE - Tennis WR - Wrestling BB BSK CCH CC DR FB GO LAX SC SB SW TE TR VB WR NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO YES NO NO YES YES NO NO YES NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO NO YES NO NO NO YES NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Confetti, confetti cannons, shredded paper Powdery and/or airborne substances of any kind Laser lights/pointers Miniature sports balls thrown into crowd In the chart below, ONLY those items marked “Yes” will be allowed as support items at UHSAA state tournaments and meets. It is recommended that schools follow these same regulations during regular season and region tournament play. Sportsmanlike vocal cheering and support from team bench area are encouraged. One school flag, designated and controlled by school administration, will be allowed at State. At indoor venues the school flag must remain stationary; at outdoor venues it may be mobile if it does not disrupt spectators and remains on the sidelines nearest the school’s section. Cannons, muskets, whistles Drones UHSAA STATE EVENT GUIDELINES Artificial noise makers (shakers, clickers, bells, cow bells, buzzers, thunder sticks, latex gloves, drums) Air horns, sirens, electronic bull horns, horns, vuvuzelas Banners on wall, except welcome or corporate sponsor Banners for teams to run through, Handheld signs of any kind Poms (subject to Venue restrictions) Megaphones (non-electronic) School Bands (including drums) Shirts on fans, spectators faces must be identifiable Recorded music over PA system by approval only Rally Towel Practice or Compitition at State Site 2 weeks prior. Balloons 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 81 POSITIONS STATEMENTS The purpose of these guidelines is to provide a default policy to those responsible for making decisions concerning the suspension and restarting of contests based on the presence of lightning. The preferred sources from which to request such a policy for your facility would include your state high school association and the nearest office of the National Weather Service. Proactive Planning 1. Assign staff to monitor local weather conditions before and during events. 2. Develop an evacuation plan, including identification of appropriate nearby shelters. 3. Develop criteria for suspension and resumption of play: a. When thunder is heard, or a cloud-to-ground lightning bolt is seen the thunderstorm is close enough to strike your location with lightning. SUSPEND PLAY AND TAKE SHELTER IMMEDIATELY. b. THIRTY-MINUTE RULE. Once play has been suspended, wait at least 30 minutes after the last thunder is heard or flash of lightning is witnessed to resuming play. c. Any subsequent thunder or lightning after the beginning of the 30-minute count, reset the clock and another 30-minute count should begin. 4. Hold periodic reviews for appropriate personnel. The UHSAA advocates the following on lightning safety for outdoor activities: The vast majority of lightning casualties can be easily prevented through simple easy to follow safety guidelines. The keys to lightning safety are education and preparedness. Preparedness must begin long before the athletic event. Following are some safety considerations: 1. Plan ahead . Have a lightning safety plan. Know where people will go for safety and how much time it will take for them to get there. Have specific guidelines for suspending the event or activity so that everyone has time to reach safety. Follow the plan without exception. 2. Monitor the weather and postpone activities if necessary. Prior to a practice or event, check the latest forecast. Look for darkening skies, flashes of lightning or increasing wind, which may be signs of a developing or approaching thunderstorm. Listen for thunder. If you can hear thunder...you are in danger of begin struck by lightning! If thunderstorms are forecast, consider postponing activities early to avoid being caught in a dangerous situation. 3. Get everyone to a safe place. If you hear thunder, suspend your activity immediately and instruct everyone to get to a safe place. Substantial buildings provide the best protection. Stay away from isolated tall trees, towers or utility poles as lightning tends to strike the taller objects. Stay away from metal bleachers, backstops and fences as lightning can travel long distances through metal. Spread out to reduce the risk of multiple lightning casualties. Get everyone out of the water if a pool activity is underway. NFHS Guidelines on Handling Contests During Lightning Disturbances 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 82 For a shelter to provide protection from lightning, it must contain a mechanism for conducting the electrical current from the point of contact to the ground. On the outside, lightning can travel along the outer shell of the building or may follow metal gutters and down spouts to the ground. Inside a structure, lightning can follow conductors such as the electrical wiring, plumbing, and telephone lines to the ground. Once inside, stay off corded phones and away from any wiring or plumbing. Avoid sheds, small or open shelters, dugouts, bleachers or grandstands. If no sturdy building is nearby, a hard-top vehicle with windows closed will offer some protection as the steel frame of the vehicle provides some protection if you are not touching metal. 4. Adhere to the NFHS Thirty-Minute Rule. Activities should NOT be resumed until 30 minutes have passed since the last thunder was heard. For more detailed information, refer to the “Guidelines for Lightning Safety” contained in the NFHS Sports Medicine Handbook. www.nfhs.org POSITIONS STATEMENTS NFHS Position Statement and Recommendations for the USE of Energy Drinks by Young Athletes National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) Sports Medicine Advisory Committee (SMAC) Background: Energy drinks continue to be popular among adolescents and young adults. These beverages are specifically marketed to young athletes who look to energy drinks as a quick and easy way to maximize athletic and academic performance. The energy drink market also includes energy shots (a more concentrated form with high caffeine content) and energy drink powder mixes that can be combined with water or juice. The marketing of these beverages to adolescents and young adults through social media and other advertisements has significantly increased in recent years. In 2016, about $2.8 billion was spent on energy drinks. For complete NFHS recommendations and guidelines please click on the link below: https://www.nfhs.org/media/1014749/nfhs-energy-drinks-position-statement-final-april-2018.pdf 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 83 NFHS SUGGESTED GUIDELINES FOR MANAGEMENT OF CONCUSSION POSITIONS STATEMENTS A concussion is a traumatic brain injury that interferes with normal brain function. An athlete does not have to lose con - sciousness (be “knocked out”) to have suffered a concussion. COMMON SYMPTOMS OF CONCUSSION INCLUDE: • Headache • Fogginess • Difficulty concentrating • Easily confused • Slowed thought processes • Difficulty with memory • Nausea • Lack of energy, tiredness • Dizziness, poor balance • Blurred vision • Sensitive to light and sounds • Mood changes-irritable, anxious, or tearful SUGGESTED CONCUSSION MANAGEMENT: 1. No athlete should return to play (RTP) or practice on the same day of a concussion. 2. Any athlete suspected of having a concussion should be evaluated by an appropriate health-care professional that day. 3. Any athlete with a concussion should be medically cleared by an appropriate health-care professional prior to resuming participation in any practice or competition. 4. After medical clearance, RTP should follow a step-wise protocol with provisions for delayed RTP based upon return of any signs or symptoms. For further details, refer to “NFHS Guidelines for Management of Concussion” contained in the NFHS Sports Medicine Handbook. www.nfhs.org NFHS SMAC* Position Statements: NFHS.ORG/SMAC *SMAC: Sports Medicine Advisory Committee 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 84 BASEBALL BASEBALL Policies & Pairings UHSAA Pitch Count Rule Approved Nov 9, 2016 - Revised June 2017 Effective Spring 2017 Baseball Season Pitching Limits All-Levels Pitches Required Rest 80-110 3 days 61-85 2 days 36-60 1 day 1-35 0 days* Additional Notes: • • • • Game Days are determined by the day that the game is scheduled to begin. Penalty for Exceeding Pitch Count: • First offense: Coach suspension for two games . • Second and subsequent offenses: Forfeiture of contest. • Post-season violations: Automatic forfeit. Non-Reporting of Pitch Counts: • 7/7/2026 JJC The Region Board of Managers will handle any violations related to non- reporting. Reports are due within 24-hours and failure to report will be fined $250 per incident payable to the region. (approved in EC 3/23/25) Important: Umpires are NOT responsible for monitoring pitch counts. Any concerns should be directed to the Athletic Director or UHSAA. The revised pitching policy in Rule 6-2-6 for 2016 from the NFHS requires state associations to adopt a pitch count rule instead of the existing 14 maximum innings per calendar week. *No pitcher may throw more than 75 pitches over two consecutive days. If they reach 75 pitches in two days , they must take one full day of rest . A pitcher may finish a batter if they reach 110 pitches during an at-bat, but they must exit the game immediately afterward. Each contest must be recorded with the opposing team, noting pitcher names and pitch counts. This data must be entered into PitchKount Software within 24 hours of the game. State Championship Pairings State Championship pairings will be determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Please refer to the specific classification bracket on how to determine the home team. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 85 BASEBALL PitchKount Software • 24-hour Entry: It is required to enter your pitch counts into the system within 24-hours of the completion of each game. Please see section three of this memo for details on how we handle failure to report. • Schedule Updated: With additions and deletions, please keep your schedule updated in the system. We have more than a hundred games that havent been played that are still in the system. Please update them ASAP. • Disputes/Violations: Thank you for how you are handling your disputes with the pitch counts, please handle this as soon as possible. If you have questions on violations, please reach out to me, refer to section three of this memo for penalties associated with violations. Wilson will be the official game ball. Adhere to UHSAA & NFHS Rules The National Federation of High Schools (NFHS) provides the rules for high school baseball. Coaches, athletes and officials must adhere to the NFHS rules and the rules outlined in the UHSAA Handbook. To review the NFHS baseball rule changes for this year, go to the UHSAA baseball page at www.uhsaa.org or the NFHS website at www.nfhs.org (click on the “Sports” tab then baseball). Both sites provide valuable updates and resources for softball coaches and officials. Adhere to UHSAA Suspended Game Procedure Schools should adhere to the suspended game rule as stated in the UHSAA Handbook and UHSAA Official’s Guidebook. The NFHS suspended game rule will NOT be in effect. UHSAA Requires Double First Base (Begins with the Spring 2027 season) For safety reasons, the UHSAA requires a double first base in all scheduled games and championships. Fifteen Run Rule & Ten Run Rule A fifteen run rule will be used after four innings of play. A ten run rule is in effect after five innings of play. A game will end anytime after 4 1/2 innings or 5 innings when a team is 10 or more runs behind and has completed its term at bat. This rule is in effect for all non-region, region and post-season games. Speed Up/Courtesy Runner Rules The UHSAA will use the NFHS stated adoption (Section 33) for speed up/courtesy runners. Warm-up and Stretching A team’s warm-up/stretching area must take place near the foul line closest to team dugout in all games. Uniforms The home team shall wear their white or lightest colored uniform and the visiting team will wear their darkest colored uniform. Modified Options for Sub-Varsity Contests (JV, Sophomore, Freshman) This memo serves as a reminder of the modified rules and options available for sub-varsity baseball contests: Time Limit A two-hour time limit will be used for sub-varsity games, or 7 innings, whichever comes first. No new inning may begin after the two-hour time limit has expired. Mercy Rule The mercy rule is no longer in effect by default. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 86 BASEBALL Optional Mercy Rule by Agreement By mutual consent of both coaches, a 10-run rule after five innings or a 15-run rule after four innings may be used. If this option is chosen, the umpire must be notified during the pregame plate meeting. Lineup Cards and Extra Hitter (EH): • Lineup cards are required for all games. • Teams may use 10 batters. The 10th player must be listed as an Extra Hitter (EH). • Both coaches must agree to use this option and confirm it during the pregame plate meeting. Doubleheader Transition Time Umpires are instructed to minimize the time between games of a doubleheader, with a target of 20 minutes between contests. Season End Date for Sub-varsity games The season end date for sub-varsity games is the Friday before Memorial Day. This year it is May 28, 2027. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 87 BASKETBALL BASKETBALL Policies & Pairings Wilson is the official game ball of UHSAA basketball. The EVO NXT will be the official game ball for the state tournaments. Note: The 1A play-in games shall be held at the state tournament site the day prior. The higher seeded team shall be the designated home team. State Tournament Pairings State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. 35 Point Rule: An alternate timing rule is in effect for all levels (i.e., varsity, junior varsity, sophomore, fresh- men) of Utah high school basketball games when after halftime is over , a team’s lead exceeds 34 points. Modified Rule: The clock shall run continuously for the remainder of the game, except for the following reasons: a. An official’s time-out b. A charged team time-out c. Free throws are taken If the differential drops below 35 points, the clock still runs continuously until the game is over, except for the stated three reasons. The shot clock will still be utilized regardless of the score differential. This rule is in effect for all non-region, region and post-season games for both boys and girls. By State Adoption Beginning with the 2024-2025 Basketball Season NFHS 9-10-1a (NEW), 4-10: Allows state associations to adopt a modification to the closely guarded rule, if they have adopted the 35-second shot clock, allowing player to dribble the ball for more than five (5) seconds while closely guarded and maintain that a player my not hold the ball for five (5) seconds or more. Once the ball crosses into the front court, the five (5) second count will not be enforced while the ball is being dribbled. Once the ball is held, the five (5) second count will begin by the official. Please be advised that this modification will begin for the 2024-2025 Basketball Season. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 88 COMPETITIVE CHEER 1. Instill the Highest Ideals of Character The mission of education-based activities is to promote the positive development of our youth. Coaches have a responsibility as educators to use their influence to reinforce valuable life lessons and universal values. Coaches should never place the value of winning above the value of instilling the highest ideals of character. As role models, coaches are expected to be an advocate for good sportsmanship and follow all the rules and regulations with the intent for which they were written. See the “Coaches Code of Ethics” in the back of the NFHS Spirit Rule Book for a list of responsibilities. 2. Complete UHSAA Coaches’ Certification and Register My Coach (See UHSAA Handbook) Sideline and Competitive Cheer Coaches must be certified through Register My Coach. All Competitive Cheer athletes must register in Register My Athlete. Certification includes eight components: Background Check, First Aid Training, CPR Training, yearly Concussion Training, yearly Child Sexual Abuse Prevention Training, yearly Bullying, Cyber-bullying, Hazing, Harassment, and Retaliation Training; the NFHS “Fundamentals of Coaching” course; and to meet a set of professional standards that are consistent with the Utah Educator Professional Standards as described in USBE Rule R277-515. The training must be completed through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. First Aid and CPR components require cur rent certification through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. Yearly concussion training requires successful completion of the NFHS Concussion Course. Complete the UHSAA State Cheer Safety Certification. Contact your Principal or School AD about certification. 3. Complete an Annual UHSAA Competitive Cheer Rules Clinic On an annual basis, head coaches are required to attend the live UHSAA Competitive Cheer Rules Clinic or complete the online UHSAA Competitive Cheer Rules Clinic prior to the designated deadline. Failure to attend the live rules clinic, watch the Demonstration Clinic, and/or complete the online rules clinic by the deadline will result in a $100.00 fine to the school . New coaches are strongly encouraged to attend the live rules clinic. Information regarding the live and online UHSAA Competitive Cheer Rules Clinic will be available on the UHSAA Competitive Cheer page at www.uhsaa.org . 4. Adhere to UHSAA and NFHS Rules and all State Risk retrictions, During Practices and Performances To maintain participant safety, coaches must adhere to UHSAA and NFHS Spirit Rules during all practices , performances and competitions . For UHSAA rules refer to the Competitive Cheer section of the UHSAA Handbook. Competitive Cheer is considered a co-educational sport. Coaches should bookmark the Competitive Cheer page at www.uhsaa.org for the latest info. 5. Adhere to UHSAA Contest Limitations Competitive Cheer teams may only compete in a TOTAL of four (4) competitions prior to the divisional and state competition. Participation in a UHSAA Live Judging Practicum does not count towards the contest limitations. Teams are limited to (1) entry per category. Competitive Cheer teams may only participate in UHSAA sanctioned competition. 6. Adhere to UHSAA Budget Restrictions for State Competition Routines To create a level playing field between all participating programs and to limit the financial burden incurred by the participants, coaches shall operate their programs within the stated limitations. Donated supplies and all monies, including budgeted school funds, out-of-pocket expenses, fund raised or donated funds for costumes and supplies which are used for state competition routines performed during the competitive cheer season (competition start date through the state competition) must not exceed $800 times the number of team members . The budget must include the following: props, rental transportation, uniforms, accessories, music fees (i.e. Mixing, and Thumb Drives, audio devices), choreography fees, and any costs incurred for state competition routines. The UHSAA budget restrictions exclude expenses that do NOT pertain to the state routines (i.e. travel, camps, day uniforms, auxiliary routines, sideline expenses). Coaches are responsible to monitor the costs associated with their competitive cheer team program. Judging sheets shall not reflect if the uniform is new or used. Routines, props and music may be used from year to year. COMPETITIVE CHEER Policies 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 89 COMPETITIVE CHEER 7. Submit a UHSAA Budget Declaration Form Coaches are required to submit a “UHSAA Competitive Cheer Budget Declaration Form” by the second Monday in February. Expenses should be recorded and documentation (i.e. receipts, bills, etc.) should be kept on file at the school. 8. Submit “Dead Time Period” Form to UHSAA by January 15 Head coaches shall submit a completed “Competitive Cheer Moratorium Form” to the UHSAA office by the deadline of January 15 to avoid a school fine. Each head coach shall select the sport specific competitive cheer moratorium, for their team, which shall consist of two, two-week blocks (the blocks may be consecutive). During that time, coaches and facilities shall adhere to UHSAA policies regarding moratoriums (See UHSAA Handbook By-Laws Article 2). Each week of the dead time period must include at least seven (7) consecutive days. Forms available on Competitive Cheer page. 9. Practice Rule There will be a twenty (20) hour practice rule per week beginning August 1st through June 1st. 10. Limited Team Membership Rule A high school competitive cheerleader may compete in up to two (2) national qualifying competitions, not sponsored by their school, with a private cheer organization. The cheer athlete must gain approval after completing an online form on the UHSAA website to participate in these events. 11. Safety Safety is our priority. All Utah cheer teams are required to follow the safety rules in the most current issue of the National Federation of State High School Association Spirit Rules Book and Utah State Risk Management Cheer Restrictions. All cheer teams competing must be NFHS safety certified. Each team is required to use the correct number of spotters while stunting. The competition will provide additional spotters as needed for safety. All participating high school cheer team members and coaches must be 2026-2027 safety certified by Utah State Risk Management. UHSAA coaching credentials must be worn at all times when supervising teams. 12. Competitive Cheer Classifications Teams must qualify for the UHSAA State Cheer Competition through a division qualifier. Teams who enter all three sanctioned categories and finish in the top seventy percent (70%) of the overall calculated score, in each classification, will advance to the state competition. If a team enters all three sanctioned categories and does not place in the overall top seventy percent (70%) but places first in any one category, they will advance to state in that category only. Teams who enter in less than three sanctioned categories will advance to the state competition in categories where they place first in that category. To be eligible for the overall championship, teams must qualify for state in all three sanctioned categories. Teams will be assigned to a specific division unless there are extenuating circumstances. The goal is to make the invitational and division qualifiers the most important and valued competitions for our Utah schools to compete in and something to be proud of. The division assignments will be based on one or both of the following scenarios: A. Classification Numbers B. Geographical area 13. Categories Show Cheer • Varsity All Girl Show Cheer • Varsity Co-Ed Show Cheer: Co-ed divisions consist of one (1) or more male athletes including male mascots • Varsity Co-Ed Show Cheer: 1A through 6A Schools: Co-ed divisions consist of one (1) or more male athletes including male mascots. If you are entered in the Co-Ed division, you must have at least one (1) male in each category (Show and both Game time categories) . Game Time • Varsity All Girl Game Time • Varsity Co-Ed Game Time: Co-ed divisions consist of one (1) or more male athletes. • Game Time Categories • Sideline/Timeout Cheer • Sideline/Timeout Dance REVIEW THE SCORE SHEETS PRIOR TO COMPETING. CAPTION SCORING WILL AGAIN BE USED. ALL SCORE SHEETS CAN BE FOUND AT UHSAA.org . 14. Scoring Final scores will be determined using TOTAL POINTS. Three (3) score sheets will be combined for a total of 135 points per show routine, 100 for Sideline/Timeout Cheer, Dance. All penalties and deductions will be subtracted from the combined scores to provide the FINAL ADJUSTED score. The team with the highest final adjusted score will be declared the winner. See the TIE BREAKER rule below in case two (2) or more teams earn the same final adjusted score. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 90 COMPETITIVE CHEER 15. Tie Breaker If there is a tie in category placement after the TOTAL ADJUSTED SCORES (including deductions and penalties) have been determined, the following three tiers will be used, in order, to break the tie: 1. Total ADJUSTED EXECUTION Score(s): The school with the highest adjusted total execution score will win. 2. ADJUSTED STUNTS & PYRAMIDS Score: Applicable for the Show category only. The school with the highest adjusted stunts & pyramids score will win. 3. DEDUCTION Score: The team with the least number of deductions will win. After that, if a tie still exists, both teams will be awarded the tie and given the same overall placement. If there are more than two teams tied for overall places, the same above process will be followed until one team is awarded the highest or lowest placement. The process will then be repeated until all teams are awarded a place or deemed tied. 16. Qualifying for the State Championship Overall Champions: Overall classification and division champions will be awarded at the UHSAA Division Qualifiers and State Cheer Competition. There will be separate classification champions for the All Girl and Co-Ed divisions. Overall classification and division winners will be determined by: In order to make the Show and Game Time categories equally weighted, each will need to be multiplied by the numbers above. After that, a true 70% and 30% can be determined for the overall calculations. In case of an overall classification tie , the team with the better Show category placement will be awarded overall champion. After that, the tie-breaking system outlined above will be utilized except the total execution scores and deductions from ALL score sheets will be combined to determine placement. CAPTION SCORING SHOW CATEGORY CLARIFICATION 17. Team Majority 1A,2A,3A,4A,5A,6A Majority is 50% of any team doing the skills. This means that if a team is competing with 15 athletes, 50% would be 7.5. Round Up. To have majority, this team will need at least eight (8) participating in stunts or tumbling to get the difficulty points. For example: If you have a team of 12 athletes with 3 stunt groups, the majority rule of 50% puts them at 1.5 stunt groups. The requirement would be to round the number UP to two (2) stunt groups. CO-ED PARTNER STUNT MAJORITY: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A & 6A Majority is 50% of male athletes involved in partner stunts. Ex: 5 total male athletes, 50% would be 2.5 rounded up to 3 male athletes. (If you have one athlete on the team you must use that athlete for majority credit. *BASKET TOSS MAJORITY RULE CHANGE* A front spot (5th athlete) will no longer count towards team majority number. A front spot may be used but will not be included in your majority. *PARTNER STUNT MAJORITY RULE* Three athletes (Base, Flyer, Spotter) in Partner Stunts will be included towards the majority. . 18. Pyramids/Stunts (one judge, one score sheet) This judge scores stunts and pyramids throughout a show routine EXCEPT for those that are in the cheer section. To earn points on the Stunts/Pyramid score sheet teams must perform them in the music section. The judge will give a score for the difficulty of the stunts/pyramids as well as an execution score for the stunts/pyramids. They will also work with the cheer judge as the second set of eyes to help determine the cheer score. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 91 COMPETITIVE CHEER 19. Cheer The Cheer judge will score stunts (DIFFICULTY) and technique in the cheer and overall cheer execution. (stunting is a required skill in the cheer caption and must be used to lead the crowd). Example: If a team does: Full Ups that end in an extension in their cheer, they will earn points for that stunt in the cheer caption scoresheet NOT THE STUNTS AND PYRAMIDS SCORESHEET! Another example: If a team does a pyramid in their cheer, there are no difficulty points available for that on the cheer score sheet so they would not get difficulty credit for a pyramid unless it is in the music section NOT THE CHEER. REMINDER: 1A-6A: The point values on the difficulty sheet are awarded when 50% of the team performs the skill AT THE SAME TIME OR IN THE SAME PHRASE. ALL MAJORITY STUNTS NEED TO BE PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME OR IN THE SAME PHRASE, TO RECEIVE DIFFICULTY POINTS. 20. Jumps, Tumbling, Dance (two judges, one scoresheet): These judges will be judging jumps, tumbling, and dance throughout the entire show routine. Example: If a team does running, tumbling during their music section, this judge will score it. Example: If a team jumps or tumbles in the cheer, this judge will score it. IMPORTANT: If teams want to be guaranteed majority difficulty points for running tumbling and standing tumbling, the majority of the team must execute these skills at the same time and majority running tumbling and standing tumbling need to be performed separately. This judge will also score execution for all jumps, tumbling, and dance. Co-ed Difficulty is the SAME as above. 21. Tumbling Definitions “Running” means a forward motion - roundoff, cartwheel, aerials, either a power hurdle or running a few steps. “Tumbling” means an additional skill(s) such as a handspring, multiple handsprings, whip, etc. REMINDER: 1A-6A: The point values on the difficulty sheet are awarded when 50% of the team performs the skill AT THE SAME TIME OR IN THE SAME PHRASE. STANDING TUMBLING AND RUNNING TUMBLING NEED TO BE PERFORMED SEPARATELY. THIS WILL ALLOW MAJORITY SKILLS TO BE CLEAR FOR THE OFFICIALS. PYRAMID DEFINITIONS: Pyramid Majority: for SUPERIOR and ELITE: Must use more than 50% of group stunt majority top girls involved in Superior/Elite Skills and Elite Transitions for Superior and Elite Pyramids. Whatever your majority is for your stunts applies for your Pyramid. ex: Majority Number is 15 equals 4 stunt groups, must use more than 50% which equals 3 stunt groups executing the elite skills or transitions. This Pyramid Majority is for all classifications . Structure: A structure is the connected stunt skill from the STUNT section boxes on the Stunts & Pyramids scoresheet, executed during the pyramid. Transitions: A transition is a transitional skill performed before or after a structure. Transitions do not need to be connected. Structure Examples: Depending on which section you wish to score in, use skills from that stunt box section and execute them in your pyramid. For example, an “Elite” structure would come from the “Elite” stunt box section of the scoresheet and “Superior” from the “Superior” section, etc. For Advanced, Superior and Elite pyramids, you must execute at least two of these skills. For an Intermediate pyramid, you only need one structure. T ransition Difficulty: Elite transition examples would be flips, rolls, inversions, twisting, etc. All other transitions that are more simplified such as straight up and down, show and go and ball up, would be considered Intermediate and Advanced transitions. See structure and transition requirements for each pyramid level below. PYRAMID REQUIREMENTS: 1. All Girl Elite Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures with variety from the Elite Stunt box and two or more Elite transitions using more than 50% of group stunt majority top girls involved in Elite skills and Elite transitions. 2. Co-Ed Elite Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures with variety from the Elite group stunt box (must use a minimum of one Superior Partner Stunt Structure and one Elite Group Stunt Structure and two or more Elite Transitions using more than 50% of Group Stunt majority top girls involved in Elite Group and Superior Partner skills and Elite Transitions. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 92 COMPETITIVE CHEER 3. All Girl Superior Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures with variety from the Superior Stunt box and two or more Elite transitions using more than 50% of group stunt majority top girls involved in Superior skills and Elite transitions. 4. Co-Ed Superior Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures with variety from the Superior group stunt box (must use a minimum of one Superior Partner Stunt Structure and one Superior Group Stunt Structure and two or more Elite Transitions using more than 50% of Group Stunt majority top girls involved in Superior Group and Superior Partner skills and Elite Transitions. 5. All Girl Advanced Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures from the Advanced group stunt box and two or more transitions. No majority rule required. 6. Co-Ed Advanced Pyramid: Required to have at least two or more braced structures from the Advanced group stunt box and two or more transitions. Must include at least one Advanced Partner Stunt skill. There is no majority rule required. 7. All Girl Intermediate Pyramid: Required to have at least one braced structure(s) with or without level change or transitions. Transitions are not required. 8. Co-Ed Intermediate Pyramid: Required to have at least one braced structure(s) with or without level change or transitions. Must include at least one Intermediate Partner Stunt skill. Transitions are not required. 22. Deduction Scoring • Stunt Fall: Everyone is safely caught, and athletes don’t hit the ground • Stunt Drop: Any athlete hits the ground • Pyramids Collapse: When the pyramid structure is complete, one deduction for a fall for each structure. If the pyramid never hits or hits, then falls, it is a collapse. Double deductions (a structure falling and a pyramid collapse) will not be given. 23. Show Cheer (Minimum of 2 minutes and maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds) : Teams will be judged on execution, difficulty, incorporated skills, strength of motions, overall entertainment, and crowd effect. Deductions will be given for falls etc. please make yourself familiar with the deduction sheet on the website(s). 1A and 2A classifications will continue to use the modified score sheet with a 50% majority. 24. Game Time There will be two categories in this division for teams to enter; Sideline/Timeout Cheer, Sideline/Timeout Dance. 2026-2027 UHSAA GAME TIME CATEGORIES WILL BE (SIDELINE/TIMEOUT CHEER AND SIDELINE/TIMEOUT DANCE . 25. Sideline/Timeout Cheer: Caption Scoring Your best sideline, crowd-leading material. Only the use of signs, poms, flags, and megaphones are allowed. Jumps are no longer required but you can still perform them. 1. Forty-five (45) seconds to one (1) minute time limit 2. Emphasis on crowd involvement 3. At least two components are required from the following: cheers, chants, traditional yells, and/or drum cadences 4. No music permitted, but a single drummer allowed 5. No baskets, sponge, elevator, or similar type tosses permitted 6. No inversions 7. Single leg stunts are limited to liberties and liberty hitch body positions (you may go straight up, full up or switch up) 8. Maximum difficulty in tumbling is limited to standing tumbling 9. Running tumbling is permitted only during team entrance 10. Performed on a mat 11. Incorporation of Specialties needs to enhance crowd leading and not take away from it. SPECIALTY EXAMPLES: STUNTS, STANDING TUMBLING, KICKS, JUMPS, VISUALS WITH POMS, FLAGS, PROPS (refer to video and live training) 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 93 COMPETITIVE CHEER 26. Sideline/Timeout Dance: Caption Scoring Perform your favorite time-out dance. Only the use of signs, poms, flags and megaphones are allowed, but not required. 1. Forty-five (45) seconds to one (1) minute time limit 2. Traditional sideline uniforms required, (i.e. skirt and top) 3. Emphasis on Crowd Engagement and Crowd Leading 4. No stunts or tumbling permitted, including Aerials and Forward Rolls and all skills considered tumbling. 5. Performed on the Mat 6. Only recorded music is permitted (MUSIC MUST BE TRADITIONAL RECORDED BAND MUSIC OF YOUR CHOICE) Definition of Traditional Band Music: must have no lyrics or voice overs. A few options of sites for music is J.W. Pepper, Ian Hess (just to name a few). 7. Props can be used but are not required. 27. General Rules DIVISION QUALIFIERS JUMP OFF: Each team will enter 3 girls and or 3 boys for the jump off competition. At the Division Qualifiers: each athlete will compete in their classification. • Any medical accommodations such as Daith piercings etc. must receive an accommodation from UHSAA prior to participation. The head coach must request an accommodation and present medical documentation to UHSAA and receive a waiver for participation. Failure to get approval for that athlete will prohibit them from performing. To get approval you must send it to the UHSAA Office. Forms can be found on the UHSAA Cheer page. • In all categories, routines will be performed on a competition area of 54’ x 42’ with approximately a 5’ buffer around the competition surface. This buffer space may vary depending on the facility at the host school. Teams may line up anywhere outside the competition area. During the routine team members may not leave the competition area/boundaries. All stunting and tumbling must be completed in the competition area. If a team member goes out of bounds, they are subject to a penalty. The following will be the only exception: Injury of a Cheer Athlete on the performance surface, during a routine: Coaches and competition directors should take every precaution to ensure the safety of participants. Should an injury or sudden illness occur during a routine, the following protocol should take place: 1. Stop the music and attend to the injured participant 2. Determine the care the injured participant may need (first aid, athletic trainer, EMT services). 3. ALL NFHS page 10 & 12 Rule 1 Art 17, 18, 19 must be strictly adhered to. 4. Competition directors at the site will determine when/if the team will be allowed to continue/finish the routine. 5. An injured participant that wishes to perform, may not return to the competition unless the competition officials receive clearance from the on site medical personnel. • In categories where allowed, teams may use signs, megaphones, cheer flags, and poms, but no other props will be allowed. • Before teams compete, they should walk into the competition area and place their poms or signs down, then go quickly to their starting positions. If teams enter the floor with introductions, spell-outs, they will be considered part of the routine and the timing will start. You may do a quick chant off to the side of the floor in place before moving onto the floor, please make it clear it is not part of the competition routine. • SPORTSMANSHIP: A participant, coach, substitute, trainer, or other team attendants must not commit an unsporting act. They must not disrespect or contact an official and indicate resentment. They must not use profane or inappropriate language, music, or gestures. If a sportsmanship violation is submitted, the sportsmanship committee will convene, talk to the teams involved and then decide if penalty points will be deducted from the category score where the violation occurred. • TIME LIMITS: All routines (with the exception of Game Time routines – see above for details) must have a minimum duration of two (2) minutes and up to a maximum duration of two (2) minutes and 30 seconds. Timing will begin with the first note of music, the first motion, (excluding a set-motion), or the building of any stunt or pyramid. Timing will end the instant the team starts to exit (after hitting their ending position). Pre-building, partner stunts, or pyramids will not be allowed before the timing starts. Teams will be allowed 30 seconds for set up if needed (signs, poms, etc.) and 30 seconds to exit (last cheerleader leaves the floor). The routine may include a cheer portion and choreography to music, but may also be choreographed entirely to music. All routines must have a cheer section. PLEASE REVIEW THE SCORESHEETS TO MAKE SURE ALL ELEMENTS/REQUIREMENTS ARE INCLUDED! 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 94 COMPETITIVE CHEER If teams choose to enter the Show category and perform straight through with music, they must still have a cheer section, or will lose those points. • A representative of each team must be present at the announcer’s table when their team is performing to cue the music. The sound crew takes no responsibility if a team representative is not present (penalty is two (2) points for disrupting the flow of competition). This person must remain at the sound table for the duration of the performance. The sound crew will not turn off your music or start it over. Music should be recorded on a MP3 player with a backup in case of incompatibility or lack of battery power. If using a phone, you must place your phones on airplane mode. We strongly suggest setting phones (if using them) to a manner in which that does not happen. The sound crew will not turn off your music or start it over. This is your responsibility and then at that point the Safety Judge will determine if there is a penalty deduction. No live music is allowed. Exception one small drum. > Inappropriate content or vulgar music lyrics are not allowed and the point deduction will be left to the discretion of the routine judges (maximum is disqualification). • Appropriate cheer shoes are required and all NFHS uniform requirements must be followed. No costuming will be allowed. • PENALTIES: Make sure music is timed accordingly to prevent overtime penalties. Teams must know and follow all copyright laws. UHSAA will not be held accountable for any music played that does not follow the law. Copyright laws have not changed since 2016. NFHS offers a free copyright short training if you have questions (www.nfhslearn.org). > There will be a two (2) point penalty deduction for every ten seconds over the time limit or ten seconds under the time limit. This will be assessed by the penalty judge (i.e. 2:33= 2 points penalty, 2:41 = 4 points penalty). Teams should give themselves a timing leeway because of the variability in sound systems. There will be a three (3) second leeway before a penalty is given. > Coaches will not be allowed to “take the penalty.” Athletes will not be allowed on the floor with intentional safety violations. > There will be a two (2) point penalty deduction for any team or coach that disrupts the flow of the competition due to but not limited to: teams that have long fingernails that have to be clipped or jewelry that has to be removed, coaches that approach floor judges during the competition, e.g. > A two (2) point penalty deduction will be given for each safety infraction. If the penalty judges feel that a team does not have a clear understanding of the safety rules due to excessive rule infractions, they can disqualify a team. > Minor safety infractions: A (.5) penalty for each of the following: boundary violations, stepping on signs or poms, and wardrobe malfunctions. > Every effort must be made to gently set down a sign or pom in a routine but in the event the judges feel it is excessive, a (.5) deduction will be given (follow the new NFHS prop discard rule). > A two (2) point deduction for UHSAA Rules Violation. > Spectators: The use of rally towels or small spectator poms may be used only when the team is off the mat but once they enter the mat they may not be used during the duration of the routine and while the team is on the mat. • VIDEO REVIEW: There will be a new video review process implemented. Video review of SAFETY RULES, DEDUCTIONS and DIFFICULTY SKILLS (not including execution) will be allowed at the Divisional and the State Championships. Coaches will have access to their scoresheets during the competition. Challenges will be made electronically via a QR code givin at check in. If a coach requests a video review the following could happen: 1) If the review was successful, then the scoresheet will be adjusted. 2) If other (non-documented) violations are seen during the review, they will be added to the scoresheet. 3) The judge’s initial decision will stand!!! Execution scores cannot be challenged. *See training for detailed challenge rules. • Host school information will be sent out (such as entrances, exits, parking, etc.) prior to each competition. 28. Judges Judges must register and certify with the UHSAA on an annual basis. For information on the registration process and the training required for certification, go to the Competitive Cheer page at www.uhsaa.org . Judges will be required to attend a UHSAA Competitive Cheer Judges Clinic or view the online clinic at www.uhsaa.org . Judges must attend the UHSAA live Judging Practicum. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 95 COMPETITIVE CHEER 29. Tabulation Protest A team has 24 hours after the conclusion of the competition to PROTEST TABULATION ERRORS. That protest must be received by the UHSAA office, in writing, to be valid for the State Competition. Protests for Divisional competitions shall be sent to the competition director. Only tabulation errors may be protested after the competition. Tabulators are required to email the final spreadsheet results to the UHSAA by 7 a.m. the morning following a competition. 30. Awards Dates for Academic All-State nominations can be found on the UHSAA calendar at uhsaa.org. The UHSAA will present first and second place trophies to the overall winners and first and second place plaques in each category and classification will be awarded at the UHSAA State Competitive Cheer Competition. For the 2026-2027 season awards will be given in both Sideline Timeout Dance and Sideline Timeout Cheer The UHSAA will also award medals (first, second and third place) in each classification to the winners in the Jump Off competition. The academic all- state award will be mailed to the recipients. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 96 CROSS COUNTRY Policies & Pairings CROSS COUNTRY State Qualifying Process If the number of schools in a classification is 20 or more then there will be a divisional race to determine those teams that will compete at the final UHSAA State Cross Country Meet. In classifications with 19 or less teams all schools will advance to the UHSAA State Cross Country Meet. Divisional Information When registering for the Divisional Race, teams must declare the top-seven varsity runners for both boys’ and girls’, plus two alternates for each gender. These must be submitted within the registration window that is set by the Divisional Meet management. 6A SCHOOLS (17 schools no divisional) 75% of full teams and the top-6 individuals from non-qualifying teams from each divisional section will advance to the State meet. Regions 1 and 3 will send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even-numbered finishing teams to section B. Region 2 would send odd number teams to section B and even-number teams to section A. The region splits will alternate each year. 5A SCHOOLS (30 schools divisional needed) 75% of full teams and the top-6 individuals from non-qualifying teams from each divisional section will advance to the State meet. Regions 4 and 6 will send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even-numbered finishing teams to section B. Regions 5 and 7 would send odd number teams to section B and even-number teams to section A. The region splits will alternate each year. 4A SCHOOLS (29 schools divisional needed) 75% of full teams and top 6 individuals from a non-qualifying team, from each section, will advance to the final round. Regions 8 and 10 would send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even to section B. Regions 9 and 11 would send odd number teams to section B and even number teams to section A. The region splits to go to section A and B would alternate each year. 3A SCHOOLS (16 schools no divisional) 75% of full teams that have participated this season and the top-6 individuals from non-qualifying teams from each divisional section will advance to the final round. Regions 12 would send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even to section B. Regions 13 would send odd number teams to section B and even number teams to section A. Regions 14 would send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even to section B. The region splits to go to section A and B would alternate each year. 2A SCHOOLS (25 schools divisional needed) 75% of full teams that have participated this season and the top-6 individuals from non-qualifying teams from each divisional section will advance to the final round. Region 15 would send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even to section B. Region 16 would send odd number teams to section B and even number teams to section A. Region 17 would send their odd number finishing teams to section A and their even to section B. Region 18 would send odd number teams to section B and even number teams to section A. The region splits to go to section A and B would alternate each year. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 97 1A SCHOOLS (no divisional) 50% of full teams (5-7 members) competing in the region meet will qualify. For scoring purposes, a team in 1A will consist of four (4) runners and a maximum of seven (7) runners. A region with an odd number of teams competing shall round up the number of qualifying teams, 2 out of 3, 3 out of 5, 4 out of 7, etc. The following individuals will also qualify: 1. The top 3 individual finishers at the region meet who are not on a qualifying team. 2. Any individual who is not on a qualifying team and who did not qualify through item 1 who finishes in the top 10 overall at the region meet. Substitution Rule When you need to substitute a runner in your top-seven, the substitute must be one of the alternates. The substitute must have been submitted on your roster in the time period set by the Divisional Meet management. Individuals not on qualified teams may NOT be substituted. State Championship Roster When registering for the State Championship Race, teams must declare the top-seven varsity runners for both boys’ and girls’, plus two alternates for each gender. These must be submitted within the registration window that is set by the State Championship Meet management. A team consists of a minimum of five runners and a maximum of seven runners. No practice is allowed at the site of the state meet within two (2) weeks of the state competition. This includes walking the course as a team or as an individual. CROSS COUNTRY 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 98 DRILL TEAM DRILL TEAM Policies 1. Instill the Highest Ideals of Character The mission of education-based activities is to promote the positive development of our youth. Coaches have a responsibility as educators to use their influence to reinforce valuable life lessons and universal values. Coaches should never place the value of winning above the value of instilling the highest ideals of character. As role models, coaches are expected to be an advocate for good sportsmanship and follow all the rules and regulations with the intent for which they were written. See the “Coaches Code of Ethics” in the back of the NFHS Spirit Rule Book for a list of responsibilities. 2. Complete UHSAA Coaches’ Certification and Register My Coach (See UHSAA Handbook) Certification includes eight components: Background Check, First Aid Training, CPR Training, yearly Concussion Training, yearly Child Sexual Abuse Prevention Training, yearly Bullying, Cyber-bullying, Hazing, Harassment, and Retaliation Training; the NFHS “Fundamentals of Coaching” course; and to meet a set of professional standards that are consistent with the Utah Educator Professional Standards as described in USBE Rule R277-515. The training must be completed through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. First Aid and CPR components require current certification through an approved or recognized program which complies with USBE requirements. Yearly concussion training requires successful completion of the NFHS Concussion Course. Contact your Principal or School AD about certification. 3. Complete an Annual UHSAA Drill Team Rules Clinic On an annual basis, head coaches are required to attend the live UHSAA Drill Team Rules Clinic or complete the online UHSAA Drill Team Rules Clinic prior to the designated deadline. Coaches must also watch the NFHS/UHSAA Drill Safety Clinic which can be found on the drill page of the UHSAA website. Failure to attend the live rules clinic, watch the Demonstration Clinic, and/or complete the online rules clinic by the deadline will result in a $100.00 fine to the school . New coaches are strongly encouraged to attend the live rules clinic. Information regarding the live and online UHSAA Drill Team Rules Clinic will be available on the UHSAA Drill page at www.uhsaa.org . 4. Adhere to UHSAA and NFHS Rules During Practices and Performances To maintain participant safety, coaches must adhere to UHSAA and NFHS Spirit Rules during all practices , performances and competitions. For UHSAA rules refer to the UHSAA Handbook and Drill Team section. Drill is designated as a mixed gender sport. Coaches should bookmark the Drill page at www.uhsaa.org for the latest info. 5. Adhere to UHSAA Contest Limitations Drill teams may only compete in a TOTAL of four (4) competitions prior to the state competition (this includes a region competition). Teams that participate in a region or divisional competition may only compete in three qualifying competitions. Teams that do NOT participate in a region or divisional competition may compete in a total of four qualifying competitions. Participation in the UHSAA Live Judging Practicum does not count towards the contest limitations. Teams are limited to (1) routine per category. 6. Adhere to UHSAA Budget Restrictions for State Competition Routines To create a level playing field between all participating programs and to limit the financial burden incurred by the participants, coaches shall operate their programs within the stated limitations. Donated supplies and all monies, including budgeted school funds, out-of-pocket expenses, fundraised or donated funds for costumes and supplies which are used for state competition routines performed during the drill team season (competition start date through the state competition) must not exceed $1,000 times the number of participants on the team . The budget must include the following: costumes, accessories, music fees (i.e. Mixing, and Thumb Drives, audio devices), choreography fees, and any costs incurred for state competition routines. The UHSAA budget restrictions exclude expenses that do NOT pertain to the state routines (i.e. travel, camps, day uniforms, auxiliary routines). Coaches are responsible to monitor the costs associated with their drill team program. Schools are encouraged to maintain a “uniform closet” for flexibility and originality without the expense of new uniforms. Judging sheets shall not reflect if the uniform is new or used. Routines, costumes and music may be used from year to year. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 99 DRILL TEAM 7. Submit a UHSAA Budget Declaration Form by the Second Friday in February Coaches are required to submit a “UHSAA Drill Budget Declaration Form” by the second Friday in February. Expenses should be recorded and documentation (i.e. receipts, bills, etc.) should be kept on file at the school. 8. Submit “Dead Time Period” Form to UHSAA by January 15 Head coaches shall submit a completed “Drill Team Moratorium Form” to the UHSAA office by the deadline of January 15 to avoid a school fine. Each head coach shall select the sport specific drill moratorium for their team, which shall consist of three , two week blocks (the blocks may be consecutive). During that time, coaches and facilities shall adhere to UHSAA policies regarding moratoriums (See UHSAA Handbook By-Laws Article 2). Each week of the dead time period must include at least seven (7) consecutive days. Forms available on Drill page. 9. Adhere to UHSAA Guidelines for Qualifying and Region Competitions Teams will be assigned to all qualifying competitions. A full panel of judges is NOT required for auxiliary routines, but a technical safety and floor judge shall be included. Teams will be notified as to which qualifying competitions they are assigned by September 1, 2026. Judges for each qualifying competition will be assigned by UHSAA and competitions not in compliance with UHSAA policies and guidelines may result in a loss of UHSAA sanctioning and/ or other penalties. Qualifying competition venue/host will determine the competition director and tabulator. Coaches and judges should submit, in writing, any allegations relating to violations not in compliance with the UHSAA rules, to the UHSAA. Qualifying competitions must use the UHSAA score sheets posted on the Drill page (uhsaa.org). Qualifying competitions must use UHSAA-certified judges, competition directors and tabulators. For the UHSAA state categories, qualifying competitions will be assigned. Five (5) routine judges, one (1) difficultly judge, and two/ three (2/3) technical judges, per panel. For solo competitions and/or auxiliary routines, judges must also be UHSAA certified; a full panel of judges is NOT required but a technical judge shall be included for each panel. Solo competitions shall adhere to UHSAA and NFHS rules. A region who fails to select a competition director will have one assigned by the UHSAA Arbiter. It is the responsibility of the competition director to arrange for a UHSAA certified tabulator who uses the current UHSAA tabulator’s computer program for scoring. Judges for all competitions will be assigned by the UHSAA Arbiter. Any routine performed by a drill team or drill team membermust follow the NFHS Spirit Safety Rules and UHSAA rules. Soloists are not exempt from these requirements and must adhere to these rules and be assessed penalties for violation(s) of said rules in UHSAA sanctioned competitions. Soloists must be eligible members of UHSAA high school drill team programs. 10. Drill State Qualifying: • Each school will receive a rating at qualifying competitions based on how they finish in each category and overall finish. 20% Military, 20% Dance, 20% Show, and 40% Overall. • Schools will receive ratings at region competitions. • Schools will compete in 3 qualifying competitions and one region competition. • Schools in a region that chooses not to hold a competition, can compete in 4 qualifying competitions. • The top 12 ranked teams will have a bye into the semifinal round at the tournament site for the 4A, 5A and 6A classifications. The Quarter Finals will be held to advance the final four teams for 4A, 5A and 6A. • 2A and 3A teams will be placed in PODS for the semifinal round based on their final rating. • Teams will compete in their respective pod during the semifinal round of the state competition. The top two (2) teams from each pod will move on to the final round. A next qualifying team from each session will be determined using the ranking system. This team will be determined at the conclusion of each pod sessions, per classification. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 100 DRILL TEAM Qualifying Competition Dates: December 5th, 12th, 19th, & January 9th, 16th Quarterfinal Round: 4A, 5A & 6A January 25th Semifinal Round: 5A & 6A January 27th. 2A, 3A & 4A January 28th Final Round: 2A 3A & 4A January 29th 5A & 6A January 30th SEMIFINAL POD PLACEMENT 3A, 4A 5A, 6A SEMIFINAL POD PLACEMENT 2A 11. Hiring of Drill Team Judges and Payment of Officials A. Payment of certified drill officials for region, qualifying and state competitions includes the following: 1. Region judges and tabulators will be paid $28 per hour . 2. State judges will be paid as follows: Semi Finals $30 per hour; Finals will be paid $30 per hour. 3. Region Competition Directors’ fee varies $400 to $600 and will be negotiated at the region level. 4. Drivers will also be paid .50 cents per mile for all miles over 50 miles round trip. Riders will be paid an additional .15 cents per mile for all miles traveled over 50 miles round trip. Since regions will not pay all judges to drive, drivers will be assigned by the UHSAA arbiter based on years of experience and availability of the driver. Judges will be asked to ride together. 5. QUALIFYING COMPETITIONS: Judges must be paid a minimum $28 per hour and compensated for mileage. 6. All judges pay will be submitted through Arbiter Pay. B. The region should make any decision regarding payment of the certified competition director and the person who may call Drill Down. C. The payment of all qualifying, region competition officials and personnel, including judges, is the responsibility of each region and competition director, not the UHSAA. 12. Competition Directors: must register as a competition director and pay a $50/$60 registration fee through Arbiter Sports. Directors must attend the annual live training in August. Payment of competition directors for qualifying and regional competitions may vary. Information found at www.uhsaa.org click on officials. 13. Tabulators: must register, certify and pay annual registration fee with the UHSAA on an annual basis. For information on the registration process and the training required for certification, go to the Drill page at www.uhsaa.org click on officials. 14. Judges: must register and certify with the UHSAA on an annual basis. For information on the registration process and the training required for certification, go to the Drill page at www.uhsaa.org . Judges will be required to attend the UHSAA Fall Drill Team Clinic or view the online clinic at www.uhsaa.org . Judges must attend one (1) UHSAA live Judging Practicum. 15. Drill Clinics: Go to the UHSAA Drill page at www.uhsaa.org for information on the UHSAA Drill Clinics and clinics sponsored by the UDJA (Judges’ Association) and the UDDA (Drill & Dance Coaches’ Association). POD 1 SEED 1 SEED 8 SEED 9 SEED 16 POD 2 SEED 3 SEED 6 SEED 11 SEED 14 POD 3 SEED 2 SEED 7 SEED 10 SEED 15 POD 4 SEED 4 SEED 5 SEED 12 SEED 13 POD 1 SEED 1 SEED 8 SEED 9 POD 2 SEED 3 SEED 6 SEED 11 POD 3 SEED 2 SEED 7 SEED 10 POD 4 SEED 4 SEED 5 SEED 12 SEED 13 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 101 DRILL TEAM 16. State Drill Routines: To be eligible for an overall team ranking at the state competition, a team must earn a qualifying score and ranking score in each of the three categories. 17. State Competition: Drill teams are NOT allowed to practice or compete at the state tournament site within two (2) weeks of the state competition. The first day of the quarterfinals is considered the start of the State Tournament. There is no outside food or drink allowed inside the UVU arena with the exception that each team will be allowed to bring in one cooler. Only team members on state qualifying teams are eligible to compete in the Drill Down at the State Competition. State Drill Info at www.uhsaa.org . Following the announcement of the teams moving on to the Finals, there will be a draw for order of performance and seating for all finals. A ticket link for Finals seating will be distributed immediately following the semi-final round of competition. . 18. State Competition Categories: At the 2027 State Drill Competition, drill teams shall compete in the following three categories: Military, Dance and Show. MILITARY: The emphasis of this category is on precision, clean and sharp movements, maneuvering and formations. Any basic military maneuvers or steps such as pinwheels, blocks, ranks and files, etc. may be used. Kicks and ripples may be used. No dance steps, no jazz hands, no head rolls, no body rolls, no hip movements, no jazz runs, no pyramids, (exception: Pyramids at prep level or below are allowed) no arch backs, no toe touches (Russian or Straddle), no tumbling (exception; handstand) may be used. School uniforms or military style costumes shall be worn. Props/ backdrops/sets are prohibited. Prep level, in this category, is defined at shoulder level or below. Distracting Facials and Vocals are prohibited. See training roll clarifications ILLEGAL BODY ROLLS IN MILITARY 1. Rolls that make a complete rotation for example: (Start flat in a prone position front make one complete rotation without stopping and end in the same prone position. Same rule applies if you start on your backs) Head over heels rotation 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 102 DRILL TEAM 2. Upright body rolls that isolate the torso are illegal in miltary. 3. Head over shoulder rotation is illegal in military. EXAMPLE: a. Shoulder Roll b. Forward Rolls and Backward Rolls on the ground or using them to get into a stunt, LEGAL BODY ROLLS IN MILITARY 1. If there is a break/stop in the rotation for at least two counts it will NOT be considered an illegal roll, here is an example: 2. Rolls in stunts are legal. A continuous rotation occurs during a stunt/partner stunt/lift (page 10 definition). Safety rules still apply. Legal exception: HANDSTAND INTO A STUNT/PARTNER OR STUNT/LIFT (for example, handstand into shoulder sit). DANCE: The emphasis of this category is technique, style and interpretation. The overall focus of this routine should be on DANCE. Any stylized dance movement is accepted. Kicks, leaps, turns and any dance steps may be used. Tumbling and lifts, which adhere to UHSAA and NFHS rules and safety guidelines, may be included. The movement, music and uniform may be stylized but cannot carry a storyline or portray a character. School uniforms or modest dance attire which adheres to NFHS rules shall be worn. Props/backdrops/sets are prohibited. STA RT BACK TOSTART min. 2 count stop ROLL 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 103 DRILL TEAM SHOW: For the 2026-27 season, Show routines will include the following performance (dance) styles: Hip Hop and Character/ Thematic Concept. This category is meant to spotlight your team’s strengths and to allow teams to put the most entertaining and creative material on the floor. Both genres need to be clearly demonstrated and developed. A “thematic concept” refers to a clear, cohesive idea or storyline that ties together the costume, music and choreography to create a complete and immersive performance. No props will allowed in the show category. HIP HOP: Hip Hop is a high energy routine with contracted dance movements to a bass beat with tempo variations. Pop and lock techniques, break dancing and other high energy dance styles can be choreographed into the routine. Backdrops/sets, stages, props and scenery are prohibited. JAZZ: Jazz encompasses any range of jazz movements, including but not limited to, traditional jazz, contemporary, lyrical, musical theatre jazz, and jazz funk. Important characteristics include, stylized, dance movements, and combinations, visual effects, and technical elements. Emphasis is placed on proper technical execution, control , musical interpretation, and team uniformity. Backdrops/sets, stages, props and scenery are prohibited. CHARACTER: The emphasis and focus of this thematic routine shall be the portrayal of a character (real or fictional) through creative choreography and movement. Technical dance skills must be included. Music and costuming should complement and enhance the portrayal of the character. The routine may include theme development and musical interpretation. Backdrops/sets, stages, props and scenery are prohibited. KICK: The focus of this category is KICK and the emphasis is on technique, style, variety of kicks and presentation. The choreography shall include a variety of kicks that may include, but is not limited to, high kicks, low kicks, diagonal kicks, fan kicks, jump kicks, flat kicks, walk kicks, etc. Precision, timing, control, technique, and uniformity of height are to be emphasized. The movement, music, and uniform may be thematic (i.e. Latin music, Latin costumes), but cannot carry a storyline. Props/backdrop/sets are prohibited. POM: Pom routines should contain the following important characteristics: synchronization, visual effects, clear and precise motions, strong pom technical skills (pass, toss, levels etc.), and the incorporation of dance technical elements. Poms should be the focal point during this segment of the show choreography. COSTUME GUIDELINES FOR NON PROP CATEGORIES: No props of any kind are allowed, which includes detachable costume elements. Costume manipulation is allowed . The costume shall be appropriate for the routine performed and support the spirit, intent, and category definition. The costume worn shall not increase the risk of injury to the dancers nor hinder the ability of the judges to evaluate the technical skills performed. If a piece of the costume is taken off and manipulated, then it is considered a prop, and there are no props allowed. A costume change/alteration, such as, a pinned-up piece of material on chest is pulled down to reveal a different color on the chest, or a short skirt is pulled down to make a longer skirt, would be legal. A hat taken off and danced with is a prop and would be illegal. Removing a fan, towel, etc. from your costume and waving it around would be illegal and result in a penalty. The penalty will be assessed by the floor judge. If you have a question if something on your costume (because of the way you are using it) is legal or not, please contact the UHSAA OFFICE. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 104 DRILL TEAM 19. The UHSAA does not allow all skills included in the NFHS Spirit Rules Book to be performed by UHSAA Drill Team. UHSAA Drill Teams are PROHBITED from practicing, performing or including the following skills from the NFHS Spirit Rules Book: A. Headstands (weight on the head and feet off the ground; assisted or unassisted) including elbow-based headstands. This also includes any headsprings and head spins. B. Shoulder Stands are illegal in Utah. Exception: Top person has hands-to-hands contact withthe base/posts, and steps on the shoulders of a seated base (see picture). C. Pyramids, Hanging Pyramids, Totem Poles, Roll Down T Lifts, Backward Leap Frog and Leap Frogs, (found in Rule 4 section 4 NFHS rule book.) Exception A: Flatback Extended Connec ted Stunt will be allowed with a limit of two stunts connected. (two top persons connected) Rationale: With the changes in the NFHS rule book concerning connected extended stunts, a flatback is a safe alternative to a full pyramid and will allow teams to create a safe level change. Exception B: Pyramids at Prep level or below will be allowed. Rationale: Prep level and below level pyramids have a minimal risk of injury used in Drill Routines as a safe skill to create shapes and depth. ILLEGAL SHOULDER STAND UTAH ILLEGAL SHOULDER STAND UTAH LEGAL SHOULDER STAND 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 105 DRILL TEAM D. Release Stunts (NFHS Rule 3, Section 5, Release Stunts) E. Swinging Stunts (NFHS Rule 3, Section 6 Art. 5) F. Cradle Dismounts (NFHS Rule 3, pg. 36 Definitions) Exception A: Cradle Positions/Sits (NFHS Rule 3, pg. 36 Definitions) G. Any Load-ins. H. Foot to foot feet to feet position I. Non-Release transitions that begin from below prep level that include a Pop or Pitch type movement that is initiated by a base/post (this would include their feet) that increases the height of the top person and is not a suspended roll from the floor. (See Training video for examples) J. Using a Pop or Pitch type movement that is initiated by another drill team member (this would include their feet) that excessively increases the height of the top person at any level. Exception A: Legal suspended roll, at prep level, with the base on floor (skill is demonstrated as assisting on the safety video) Exception B: Legal suspended rolls K. Back handsprings landing on forearms or elbows are illegal . 20. A LEGAL stunt that stops at prep level or above (NFHS Rule 3, Section 4, Non-Release Stunts) are prohibited unless, the top person is transitioned to a legal stunt/skill from a legal position and returns to a legal position. Transitioning is allowed, for example, from a flatback to a triple base straddle sit or an extended split to a triple base straddle sit etc. Transitioning from any position to a vertical stationary inversion prep level or above is illegal**. **Illegal positions: all load ins, all step ups, cradle, cradle position, foot to foot, feet to feet EXCEPTION: A faceup flatback may begin from a cradle position and end in a cradle position. 1. NOTE: When doing the exception (going from a cradle position to a flatback or flatback to a cradle position) contact must be continuous with all three of the bases and the top person. Any release from a base will result in an illegal skill. 21. Roll Down T Lifts and Backward Leap Frogs are illegal. (found in Rule 3 Section 4, NFHS Rule Book). EXCEPTION: A skill in which a participant on the floor places his/her hand on the back of another person on the floor, vaults over the person’s back in the straddle and returns to the floor is legal. 22. Dance Skills that will be allowed and offer a great alternative for Front and Back Load ins. The step up is a dance move that has minimal risk of injury but allows for creative dance lifts. a. Front Step Up: Must begin from the performing surface, the top person steps one foot either the side or front into a base who has interlocking hands at or below waist level. A base and back spot is required. Skills allowed, are one leg Ronde Jambe or grande’ battement. Top person must end on the performing surface once the skill is completed. b. Back Step Up: Mu st begin from the performing surface, the top person steps from the back of the base who has interlocking hands with one foot at or below waist. A base and back spot is required. Skills allowed, stepping straight up and a grande’ battement. Must end on the performing surface one the skill is completed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 106 DRILL TEAM c. Double Base Step Up: Begins from the performing surface, the top person steps up one foot at a time, to each base who has interlocking hands at or below waist level. Two bases and spotter are required. Choreographed arms are allowed, top person must dismount down one foot at a time. d. No building beyond waist: Moving the top person forward or backward is allowed by the two original bases. Top person must end on the performing surface once the skill is completed. 23. Definitions: a. Props: items that are manipulated during a routine for the purpose of enhancing the routine or the development of the character. (i.e. cane, suitcase, hat) b. Backdrops/Sets/Stage Props: stationary objects used for visual enhancement only. c. Storyline: conveying a specific message, idea, or event with choreography. The routine progresses through various stages within the story. d. Prep Level: A top person’s base of support is at approximately shoulder height. e. Character: Portraying a persona, a person, a role, an era etc. 24. Costumes: Any costume must have been worn on the school’s home floor before wearing it at the region or qualifying competition. Uniforms and dress for a performance is at the discretion of the team or coach as long as they comply with the category and NFHS rules. Appropriate attire must be approved by the school’s administration. School and UHSAA administrators are concerned with the continued suggestiveness of some uniforms and advise discretion in choosing uniforms for all competitions. 25. Footwear: According to NFHS Spirit Rule 3 Section 1 Article 3a: “Dance, drill and pom teams must wear footwear that is appropriate for the activity involved. At a minimum footwear must cover the ball of each foot.” For example, teams including connecting tumbling or hard landing skills in their choreography, such as but not limited to: series of back handsprings, round off back handsprings, standing back tucks, etc, should wear appropriate shoes for those activities (i.e. jazz shoe, athletic shoes). Drill team participants shall wear footwear that follows NFHS and UHSAA rules and interpretations. As stated in the NFHS Rule 3.1.3a, footwear must cover the ball of each foot. Footwear that covers the entire foot/feet and have non-slip soles must be worn for: 1. Stunts/lifts at prep level or above in which the top person’s foot/feet are in the hand(s) of the base(s). 2. Airborne tumbling with the exception of front and side aerials, kip ups and roundoffs. UHSAA REQUIRES: The footwear shall be appropriate for the routine performed and support the spirit, intent and category definition. The footwear worn shall not increase the risk of injury to the dancers nor hinder the ability of the judges to evaluate the technical skills performed. If traditional footwear is not selected, the school/coach shall request a ruling from the UHSAA rule interpreter prior to the performance/competition. If necessary, the UHSAA may seek input from the NFHS prior to communicating the final determination to the school. Precaution should be taken so the performing area is not marred. In general, good quality leather, crepe or softoled shoes may be worn. Any shoes that will scuff floors must be taped with non-marking tape. The coach is responsible for having shoes checked at the specified time. A floor judge will check shoes prior to performance, and any shoe not in compliance must be corrected before the performance or the shoes cannot be used. Shoes will also be checked as you leave the floor. Any violations will result in a two (2) point penalty per routine judge to be assessed by the floor technical judge. Teams shall not remove protective coverings on their shoes after the initial shoe check. If damages occur to the floor, a fine will be assessed. 26. Injury of a Drill Athlete on the performance surface, during a routine: A Certified Athletic Trainer should be present at all competitions. Coaches and competition directors should take every precaution to ensure the safety of participants. Should an injury occur during a routine, the following protocol should take place: A. Stop the music and attend to the injured participant B. Determine the care the injured participant may need (first aide, athletic trainer, EMT services). C. NFHS pages 8 & 9 (Rule 1 Art 17, 18, & 19) must be strictly adhered to. D. Competition director/administrators at the site will determine when/if the team will be allowed to continue/finish the routine. E. An injured participant, that wishes to perform, may not return to the competition unless the competition officials receive clearance from the onsite medical personnel. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 107 DRILL TEAM 27. Music: A. No musicians may be used as musical accompaniment, not including musical props used by team members. No drums used on entrance or exit. B. All music should be sent in a digital file format to the competition director or designee by the deadline determined by the competition director. Issues with wrong files sent will result in a penalty assessed by the floor judge. C. A representative of each team must be present at the announcer’s table when their team is performing to cue the music. No responsibility is taken by sound crew if no one is there (penalty is 2 points per routine judge for disrupting flow of competition). At the State Competition a certified coach must be present at the announcers table to cue music. D. If the DJ and Competition Director agree that any problems associated with the music are NOT the fault of the coach or team and are in fact technical difficulties, the team will be given the opportunity to exit the floor and re-enter to begin the performance from the start without penalty (before the next team in that classification and category performs). Order of performance will not be disrupted. E. A representative must immediately contact the competition director or their designee during the performance with any music concerns. F. State Music: Competition music for the state competition must be sent in a digital file format prior to January 22nd. More details will sent to qualifying teams. G. Schools should follow all copyright laws. It is up to each school to ensure that any music used is done so in accordance with the level of permission obtained to make changes to any music. Should a school be found in violation, the school bares total responsibility should any legal action be taken. 28. Special Effects: No provisions will be made for special effects. The use of fire, fog, dry ice, water, smoke, or compressed air device WILL NOT be allowed. A violation of this will results in two (2) points per routine judge p e n a lt y. 29. Outside Control of Effects: Any control over a permitted effect (such as lights on a costume or prop) must be controlled by a participating member of that routine, and cannot be controlled by a coach, parent, a dancer not participating in the routine, etc. A violation of this will results in two (2) points per routine judge penalty. 30. Ballet Turn Boards: Turn boards, training aids, and products designed to give dancers an advantage are illegal. A two (2) point penalty will be assessed for a violation of this rule. 31. Moving backdrop: A team member in a costume, that acts as scenery and does not do any choreography with the team is not allowed. Example: A person dressed up as a tree, moves side to side etc. and never does any team choreography. The Floor Technical Judge will assess this deduction. 32. Cultural Appropriate Material: School should avoid themes that might demonstrate cultural appropriation. Choreography and costuming should be approved by school and district administrators. Schools should never adopt cultural elements in an exploitative, disrespectful or stereotypical way. 33. Costume Management: Excess feathers or other costume embellishments that are not removed during a teams floor exit, by the performers in the routine, wiil be penalized by the floor judge. 34. Costuming Manipulation: Any costume that is manipulated by an individual dancer must stay attached to the body. A costume may only be manipulated by the individual dancer wearing the costume. 35. Rosin: Shoe rosin is prohibited at all competition venues. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 108 DRILL TEAM 36. Sportsmanship: A participant, coach, substitute, trainer or other another team attendant must not commit an unsporting act. This includes, but is not limited to, acts or conduct such as: a. Disrespectfully addressing or contacting an official or gesturing in such a manner as to indicate resentment. b. Using profane or inappropriate language, music or gestures. c. Baiting or taunting an opponent (NFHS Rule 1 Section 2 Art. 1) Unsportsmanlike conduct by a participant, coach, substitute, trainer or other team attendant immediately prior to, during, or at the conclusion of the competition will result in a two (2) point penalty per routine judge for each violation. Protests or complaints alleging a violation of this rule must be made and submitted in writing, using the protest form, by a coach and an appropriate school official (i.e. athletic director, school administrator), to the UHSAA Tournament Director within the time frame of the current competition (semifinals/finals). The time frame of the competition is defined as beginning with the first performance, and the protest must be filed, and received, BEFORE the announcement of teams moving on to the finals (semifinals) and/or final placement announcements are made (Finals). At the state competition, the UHSAA Tournament Committee may assess these points. The points would be deducted before the ranking scores are given and would be assessed to the routine category being performed nearest the infraction. d. A sportsmanship penalty may be assessed to any team who changes costumes inside the performance arena. 37. PENALTIES: All NFHS safety violations or UHSAA prohibited skills violations are two (2) point penalties per routine judge, except where noted. Examples include: safety, disrupting the flow of competition, footwear violation, prop guideline violations, and timing violations. A. Minor Safety Violations: .5 pt. penalty per routine judge a. During the routine, teams and all props or sets must stay within the inside edge of the boundary lines of the competition floor. The lines are considered out-of-bounds. b. All team members must not step out-of-bounds, meaning team members must have weight bearing contact within the boundaries of the competition floor. The boundary lines are the four inside edges of the basketball court on the floor where the competition is being held, regardless of its size. Penalty will be assessed by the floor technical judge. c. NFHS Rule 1.1.7a page 8. Performing surfaces and areas must be reasonably free from objects and/or impediments. The top person receives primary support from a base(s) who is /in direct, weight bearing contact with the performing surface (NFHS has interpreted this rule as: if you are stunting or dancing on the prop it is a safety violation.) B. For teams that disrupt the flow of the competition, such as: not being ready to enter the floor; entering the floor out of schedule order; entering and exiting from the wrong side of the floor; marching all the way across the back of the floor and performing an about-face to enter the actual floor from the opposite end; problems associated with music or removing props or sets, etc. a two (2) point penalty per routine judge will be assessed. A penalty of this nature will be assessed by the floor technical judge. C. If a safety penalty of two (2) or more points per judge is given, the offending school will be notified via text, by the competition director, after that category has been completed. D. A floor judge will check shoes prior to performance, and any shoe not in compliance must be corrected before the performance or the shoes cannot be used. Shoes will also be checked as you leave the floor. Any violations will result in a two (2) point penalty per routine judge to be assessed by the floor technical judge. See additional information on shoes in #25. E. Not following the prop guidelines in any category will result in a two (2) point penalty per routine judge to be assessed by the floor technical judge. F. At the State Competition, any coach stepping outside of the designated coaches’ area will result in a (2) point penalty per judge and will be deducted from the routine being performed at that time. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 109 DRILL TEAM 38. Timing Penalties: A. Length of the routine will be 1:45 - 2:30 minutes/seconds. There will be a two (2) point penalty per routine judge for every ten (10) seconds over 2:30 minutes/seconds or under 1:45 minutes/seconds to be assessed by the Safety Technical Judges. (i.e. 2:31= 2 points/routine judge, 2:41 = 4 points/routine judge). B. All teams are to be ready one team ahead. Teams must stay out of view. Teams must not get into an entrance position until the announcer specifically says, “Team, take your position.” All team members will enter and exit from the north end of the gym at the state competition. Only drill members who are participating in that particular routine will be allowed onto the floor. Teams must enter and exit the floor without choreography. EXAMPLE: No arm movements, must move directly to the routine starting position. Penalty will be assessed by the Safety Technical Judge. A slap to call team to attention is not considered choreography. C. Judging and timing will start with the first note of music. The entrance and exit (including show) must be concise and direct. Entrances and exits are not to be judged by the routine judges. D. Judging and timing will stop with the last note of music. An entrance and exit shall not exceed 30 seconds each for any competition routine. Additional time is not allowed for the Show routine. The technical judge will deduct two (2) points per routine judge for every 10 seconds over the entrance or exit time. Timing of the entrance will start when the team and/or props or break the plane of the floor boundary. 39. Scoring: The “true” ranking scoring system will be used at all invitationals, region, and state competitions for the overall winners. Ranking points are assessed in the tabulating room. It is important that judges keep a running total so they do not give ties. Dropping of the high and low placement ranking (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) will take place. For an individual routine judge who may have a tie between teams as a result of penalty point(s), the ranking points for that individual judge will be split for the teams tied. All other teams will stay in the ranked order and will receive the appropriate ranking points for that position. Note: Judges may use .25 increment scores when judging routines. For example, routine scores of 75, 75.25, 75.5, or 75.75 are acceptable. The scores from the state preliminary competition will NOT be used to determine seeding for the State Finals. The military category will be randomly drawn, by the state competition director at the conclusion of the semi- finals, and from there a schedule will be made giving each team an opportunity to perform at the beginning, middle and end of a category. Schools may pick up their score sheets and tabulation sheet at the conclusion of each day of competition. Tie Breaker In the event of a category tie, the following steps will be used to determine the winner only proceeding to the first step that breaks the tie. Step 1. Head-to-head rankings of the tied teams for each of the five rouine judges. The rankings will include Difficulty Scores and Penalties. The team with the better ranking by a majority of the judges will be declared the winner. Step 2. The Total Rank for the category will be used. The team with the lower total will be declared the winner. Step 3. Head-to-head score from the Execution Scores. The team with the better score by a majority of the judges will be declared the winner. Step 4. Head-to-head score from the Choreography Scores. In the event of an overall tie, the following steps will be used to determine the winner only proceeding to the first step that breaks the tie. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 110 DRILL TEAM 40. Video Review: Video review for safety infractions is allowed for penalties given at all events. Coaches must have the section of choreography in question cued on their mobile device to be reviewed immediately following the category in question. The video review will occur in a secure area away from spectators, athletes and other coaches. 41. End of Competition Protocol and Procedures: At the end of each category, routine judges shall turn in their judging sheets for that category and all scores shall be final. Technical judges shall turn in their penalty sheets when decisions are final, but prior to the start of the next category. Judges shall adhere to the UHSAA drill competition protocols and procedures as outlined on the UHSAA Drill Page (under competition materials). 42. Tabulation Protest: A team has 24 hours after the conclusion of the competition to PROTEST TABULATION ERRORS. That protest must be received by the UHSAA office, in writing, to be valid for the State Competition. Protests for Invitational competitions shall be sent to the competition director. Protests for Region Competitions shall be sent to the competition director and region chairperson. Only tabulation errors may be protested after the competition. Tabulators are required to email the final spreadsheet results to the UHSAA and Head Tabulator by 7 a.m. the morning following a competition. 43. Awards: Dates for Academic All-State nominations can be found on the UHSAA calendar at uhsaa.org. The UHSAA will present first and second place trophies to the overall winners and first and second place plaques in each category and classification will be awarded at the UHSAA State Drill Competition. The UHSAA will also award medals (first, through fifth places) in each classification to the winners in the Drill Down competition. The academic all- state award will be mailed to the recipients. The drill down competition will be held on the final day of the State Tournament. Only individuals whose team has participated in the finals are qualified to participate in the drill down. Step 1. Head-to-head ranking of the tied teams for each of the five judges for all three categories separately. The rankings will include Difficulty Scores and Penalties. The team that wins the majority of the fifteen (15) comparisons will be declared the winner. Step 2. The Net Rankings from all three categories will be added together. The team with the lower total will be declared the winner. Step 3. The Total Ranks from all three categories will be added together. The team with the lower total will be declared the winner. Step 4. Head-to-head score from the Execution Scores for all three categories separately. The team that wins the majority of the comparisons will be declared the winner. Step 5. Head-to-head score from the Choreography Scores for all three categories. If a tie still exists, both teams will be awarded the tie and given the same overall placement. In the event of a tie between more than two teams, the same process will be used to eliminate one team at a time (high or low). The process should start over from Step 1 with the remaining teams until all teams are awarded a place or deemed tied. RPI Tiebreaker: In the event of a tie in the Drill RPI, the following steps will be used to determine final ranking fo r seeding purposes. Step 1. Head-to-Head overall rankings of the teams from qualifying competitions. Step 2. The totals ranks from all four (4) competitions each team competed in. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 111 FOOTBALL FOOTBALL Policies & Pairings State Tournament Pairings State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Throughout the tournament, the team with the higher seed will be the designated home team. Home teams wear dark jerseys. 35 Point Rule: 35 Point Rule: An alternate timing rule is in effect for all levels (i.e., varsity, junior varsity, sophomore, freshmen) of Utah high school football games when after halftime is over, a team’s lead exceeds 34 points. This applies to 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, and 6A classifications. However, in 8-Player Football, if at any time during a game when a team’s lead exceeds 34 points the clock shall run continuously. Modified Rule: The clock shall run continuously for the remainder of the game, except for the following reasons: a. An official’s time-out b. A charged team time-out c. After a change of possession (clock continues to run during extra point try). If the differential drops below 35 points, the clock still runs continuously until the game is over, except for the stated three reasons. The play clock will still be utilized regardless of the score differential. After the third quarter is over, if a team’s lead exceeds 44 points the game is over. This applies to all classifications and all levels of play. This rule is in effect for all non-region, region and post-season games. Game Film: For state football tournaments, teams shall exchange game film for the previous game and one other game as mutually agreed by the two coaches. Game film is to be available by noon the day following competition. Overtime Procedure: The NCAA overtime procedure will be in effect for all levels (i.e. varsity, junior varsity, sophomore and freshman) of play. More information regarding the overtime procedure will be listed in the football section of the UHSAA website. Official Game Ball: The UHSAA has designated the Wilson GST as the official state championship football. A legal Wilson football complying with NFHS standards must be used during ALL post-season play starting opening round games (round of 16) through the championship game. Officials have been asked to ensure that only Wilson footballs be used during post-season play. During all rounds of state tournament play, UHSAA state event prices should be charged. Default time for State tournament games played at home sites will be Friday at 6 p.m. except when at least one team is involved in a playoff game earlier in the week. In that instance, the default time is Saturday at 12:00 p.m. PA Announcers, School Bands, & In Stadium Music Policy 1. No PA, Band, or In Stadium Music, will be played during game play. 2. All PA announcements or dialogue, and any music will cease when the offensive team breaks the huddle.Teams who run a hurry up offense, or don’t huddle as a team, the PA announcements or dialogue and any music must stop when the offensive team lines up for the snap. 3. This policy also applies to the huddle of the kick-off team. 4. PA, Band, or In Stadium music should be limited to dead ball situations: After a touchdown, quarter breaks, halftime, and timeouts. 5. PA announcers must always remain neutral. They are considered part of the game administrative team at the school before, during, and after the contest. PA announcers must never talk about opponents, make disparaging remarks about officials, coaches, and players. Their job as an announcer is to create an environment of respect for both teams and communities. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 112 UHSAA ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES: 1. The UHSAA administers and support both a Fall and a Spring golf program during each school year as follows: a. Fall Golf – Boys 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A b. Spring Golf- Boys 1A and Girls 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A 2. UHSAA Officials shall establish and govern all policies regarding the administration of High School Golf including player eligibility. 3. As with all other UHSAA sanctioned sports and activities it is the responsibility of school Coaches and Athletic Directors to follow all UHSAA policies concerning eligibility, travel, and schedules. 4. The Utah Section PGA in conjunction with UHSAA Officials shall administer the State Championship Golf events. The Utah Section PGA will also interpret and apply the current “Rules of Golf” as outlined and published by the United States Golf Association, to include “Local Rules and Notice to Competitors”. 5. Mandatory Rules and Etiquette Clinics are required to be held on a school or region basis. Clinics for Spring Golf (1A Boys and 1A-6A Girls) must be concluded by April 15 each season. Clinics for Fall Golf (2A through 6A Boys) must be completed by September 15. The Utah Section PGA can assist in setting up these important clinics by supplying clinic presenters. 6. All head coaches must complete an online or recorded Golf Coaches Rules Clinic. All Coaches Rules Clinics for Spring Golf (1A Boys and 1A-6A Girls) must be concluded by April 15 each season. The Coaches Rules Clinics for Fall Golf (2A through 6A Boys) must be completed by September 15. 7. All head coaches must declare they have had communication with the golf professional at their home course on the number of players on their roster. The declaration form can be accessed from the resources/rules clinic tab on the UHSAA website. 8. Special player accommodation needs to be applied for in advance of the golf season or event. Accommodation approval will be reviewed and approved or denied as per UHSAA procedures. MAXIMUM STROKE PLAY SCORING FORMAT: 1. ALL UHSAA Golf Championships (boys and girls) will use a Maximum Stroke Play Scoring System. Contestants will PICK UP after reaching a maximum score of nine (9) strokes on any hole of a competition. 2. Markers will record a 9 on any hole where the maximum score is scored and then it will be circled on the card for easy identification of that score. 3. All designated Region events should use this scoring system. This will provide consistent and fair qualifications for the state competitions and All-State considerations. 4. The advantages of using this system are increased speed of play and less pressure to finish a very bad hole. This system will also use the modification for penalties and disqualification penalties that are listed under USGA Rules of Golf; Rule 21.2. GOLF Policies & Procedures HIGH SCHOOL GOLF 2026-2027 GOLF 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 113 GOLF REGION and STATE COMPETITION POLICIES: 1. Region Match Schedules: For both Fall and Spring Golf it is recommended that Regions hold at least six 18- hole matches. a. It will also be the responsibility of the Region Coaches to administer fair and equitable Region events based on the most current “Rules of Golf” and UHSAA Rules and Procedures. b. A maximum of 8 varsity players will be allowed to play in all Region varsity matches. If the facility can accommodate additional players, permission from the UHSAA must be given on a case-by-case basis. c. A Region Representative must declare the six 18-hole matches that will be used for state qualifications by the golf start date. 2. State Tournament Format: a. Both Fall and Spring Golf Competitions will be played according to the MAXIMUM STROKE PLAY SCORING FORMAT. See details above. b. Both Fall and Spring Golf Teams will consist of six (6) player teams with the low four (4) “MAXIMUM STROKE PLAY SCORING FORMAT” scores counting for the team total. A team may compete for team honors provided they have a minimum of four players. 3. Coaching/Caddies: a. Two certified coaches will be allowed per school. The two coaches will be the only people allowed to give advice to a player. b. Coaches are not allowed to play during the Region matches. c. One golf cart will be assigned to each school. d. You may not “switch out” a coach during official play. Once the two coaches are declared at the beginning of the round, they will be the coaches for the remainder of that day. e. At the State Championship, coaches are not allowed on the putting surface during official play. 4. Golf Cart Use Policies: a. Players may not use motorized golf carts during the play of any competition except when the Rules Committee determines that a player may be transported between holes to help with pace of play; or when a rules official allows a player to ride back to a previous position to put another ball in play during a rule situation. b. Push/Pull carts are not considered motorized carts and are acceptable for players use. c. Any appeals for cart use based on a chronic medical condition must be heard and approved by UHSAA Officials prior to the start of the golf season. Region officials do not have the authority to hear or rule on cart use issues. 5. Distance Measuring and Electronic Devices: Participants may use “distance measuring devices” that conform to the Rules of Golf- Rule 4.3.. This limits the distance measuring to only measure distance and not slope, wind, or barometric pressure, etc. a. In fairness to the field: a player using a “distance measuring device” must allow a fellow competitor within their grouping to use the information from that device upon request. If the player does not comply, permission to subsequently use of the device will be withdrawn. 6. Dress Code: Appropriate golf attire is required for all golfers and coaches at all UHSAA sanctioned events. a. Each team must dress in golf style uniforms (shirts/tops). b. Team uniforms and golf attire must comply with all standards that are set by the various host courses. c. Male participants may wear long pants or golf appropriate shorts. Host course dress restrictions (including the state championship venues) take precedence over all other policies so consider this when selecting uniforms. Denim, basketball, or cargo style shorts are not recommended. Collared shirts or mock turtleneck shirts are recommended. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 114 GOLF d. Female participants may wear long pants, slacks, or golf appropriate shorts, skorts or skirts. Host course dress restrictions (including the state championship venues) take precedence over all other policies so consider this when selecting uniforms. Denim, basketball, or cargo style shorts are not recommended. Collared shirts or mock turtleneck shirts are recommended. Players may wear a well-structured tee shirt provided it is consistent with the team uniform concept and is modest in design. e. We recommend that coaches wear the team uniform at their competition, and they are required to conform to the above dress code policies. f. Violations of any of the above dress code policies will be referred to the UHSAA. 7. Uniform Logo Rules: a. The uniform may display the competitor’s name, school name, school nickname, and/or the school logo. b. Any form of advertising on the uniform is prohibited. c. A single visible manufacturer’s logo/trademark/reference, no more than 2 ¼ square inches with no dimension more than 2 ¼ inches is permitted on each item of the uniform. d. One American flag, not to exceed 2 inches by 3 inches, may be worn or occupy space on each item of uniform apparel. By state adoption, to allow for special occasions, commemorative, or memorial patches, not to exceed 4 square inches, may be worn on the uniform without compromising its integrity. 8. Contest Limitations: a. The number of events under the contest limitations is 10. b. One (1) multi day event will count as 1 contest towards the contest limitations for golf. 9. Rules Assistance: The Utah Section PGA will provide “Call-in Rules Help” should the Region committees or school coaches need additional help. Please call or text the following numbers for Rules Help: Devin Dehlin (801) 556-0393; Aaron Goodman (801) 910-2159; Annie Fisher (801) 558-2410; Scott Whittaker (801) 913-0779. FALL (Boys) and SPRING (Girls, 1A Boys) CHAMPIONSHIPS: 1. Formal online entries on the UHSAA Website are due by 3:00 p.m. MST the Tuesday prior to the week of the State Championship event. Region Golf Tournaments should be scheduled and played prior to these deadlines! All teams that qualify for the state competition must have their correct team selections made by the deadline. Late entries will be referred to the UHSAA. 2. Region Representatives will turn in the team averages of 6 players from every Region Team and qualifying individuals from each Region by the deadline. Region representatives should contact Aaron Goodman with the PGA to be given an access code to report scores. agoodman@pgahq.com 3. Team rankings will be determined by each Region. Player Rankings will be determined by each school (coach). The Utah Section PGA will pair teams for the State Tournament based on season averages as per current UHSAA guidelines. 4. Availability for scheduling both Region events and practice rounds at the state championship site will be determined by the championship host site per their policies & availability. 5. Practice rounds and play ARE allowed the day before the State Championship at the State Championship site. 6. UHSAA will not provide athletic trainers on site at State Golf Tournaments. 7. If bad/severe weather dictates that alternate formats/number of holes be used to complete the event, when or if necessary, the new format will be determined by UHSAA and UPGA Officials onsite. 8. In case of a tie for first place in team standings, there will be a sudden-death playoff. Four golfers from each tied team (as designated by the coach) will tee off together and play a hole or holes as designated by the Rules Committee until one team scores a cumulatively lower score than the other(s). 9. A tie for individual medalist honors will be broken by sudden-death playoff. If all players tied for medalist honors are in a playoff with their respective team, no separate medalist playoff will be held but will be determined from scores earned during the team playoff. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 115 BOYS STATE CHAMPIONSHIPS REQUIREMENTS : 1. The Boy’s State Championships 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A, will be 36-hole events held over two days of play. 2. There will be a team cut after the first day of play. The low 60% of the team field and including ties for the final spot will play the second or final day. See the qualifying procedure below. 3. Individual players that shoot a score on the first day of play that is within ten shots of the individual leader; or shoots a score that is in the top ten individuals on the first day; or shoots a score of 79 or better will make the cut and play the second day. A minimum of 9 individuals will make the 1st day cut. If 9 individuals are not determined from the above stated list, they will be added in order of position in the event. This guarantees a minimum of 9 individuals per classification making the 1st day cut. 4. There will be a $450. team or $75. individual registration fee charged to all participants at the boys’ state championships. This fee will cover green fees, practice balls, and other administrative costs. This registration fee should be paid to the Utah Section PGA who administers at the State Championship events. Payment may be made onsite at the State Championships in the form of cash, check, or credit card. 5. Boy’s Championship Qualifying Process: (These qualification policies are subject to UHSAA modification). a. 6A Boys- Team Qualification: All schools who field a full team (minimum of four players) will qualify for the state championship. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages for pairings will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 3 individuals from Region 1, 4 individuals from Region 2, and 3 individuals from Region 3 may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. b. 5A Boys- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 4 individuals from each 5A Region may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. c. 4A Boys- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 4 individuals from each 4A Region may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. d. 3A Boys- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. GOLF 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 116 e. 2A Boys- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. f. 1A Boys- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. GIRL’S STATE CHAMPIONSHIPS REQUIREMENTS 1. 1A and 2A: 18-hole event (one day) 2. 3A; 4A; 5A; and 6A: 36-hole event (two days). There will be a team cut after the first day of play. The low 60% of the team field including ties for the final spot will play the second day. 3. Individual players that shoot a score on the first day of play that is within ten shots of the individual leader; or shoots a score that is in the top ten individuals on the first day; or shoots a score of 85 or better will make the cut and play the second day. A minimum of 9 individuals will make the 1st day cut. If 9 individuals are not determined from the above stated list, they will be added in order of position in the event. This guarantees a minimum of 9 individuals per classification making the 1st day cut. 4. Registration Fee: There will be a registration fee charged for all participants at the girls’ state championships. This fee will cover green fees, practice balls, and other administrative costs. This registration fee should be paid to the Utah Section PGA who administers at the State Championship events. Payment may be made onsite at the State Championships in the form of cash, check, or credit card. ● 1A & 2A Fees: $225. team or $38 individual ● 3A, 4A, 5A & 6A Fees: $450. team or $75. individual 5. Girl’s Championship Qualifying Process: (These qualification policies are subject to UHSAA modification). a. 6A Girls- Team Qualification: All schools who field a full team (minimum of four players) will qualify for the state championship. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages for pairings will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 3 individuals from Region 1, 4 individuals from Region 2, and 3 individuals from Region 3 may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. b. 5A Girls- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 4 individuals from each 5A Region may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. GOLF 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 117 GOLF ALL-STATE SELECTION: The Utah Section PGA All-State Tournament and Awards Banquet will be held the last week of May. Every First Team All-State team member will be invited (120 players total). The selection of All-State Golf Teams is not a function of the UHSAA and questions concerning the process should be directed to the Utah Section PGA. (801) 566-1005 • First Team All-State is the top 10 players in each classification. Second team and honorable is also 10 players. Visit utahpga.com for a full All-State Team list. • All-State Team Selection: The number of region scores used in the All-State Selection process needs to be uniform across the state. The number of matches to be turned in to the Utah PGA to use in the All-State Team selection process is as follows: (These matches will need to be declared before the season begins.) • THE MAXIMUM STROKE PLAY SCORING FORMAT must be used in region play for scores to be turned in for All-State Team calculations. • All Girls- Turn in 4 scores, 3 will be used for All-State Selection • 1A Boys- Turn in 4 scores, 3 will be used for All-State Selection • 2A & 3A Boys: Turn in 7 scores, 5 will be used for All-State Selection c. 4A Girls- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: An additional 4 individuals from each 4A Region may qualify based on individual score averages from predetermined Region events. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state championship. d. 3A Girls- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. e. 2A Girls- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. f. 1A Girls- Team Qualification: The top 16 schools with full teams will qualify by an overall average TEAM score. A TEAM TOTAL will be submitted with scores for four players at six matches. The team averages will be determined using the official course rating for the tees played. Matches must be declared before the season begins. The declared matches must be the same for every school within the Region. Individuals: If an individual does not qualify with their team and is in the top ten (10) for individuals in their Region, they could qualify as an individual. No more than 8 athletes may represent their school at the state tournament. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 118 GOLF • 4A, 5A & 6A Boys: Turn in 8 scores, 6 will be used for All-State Selection • Can be combined, NOT doubled. (Example: 8 - 9 hole scores OR 4 - 18 hole scores) • All-State Team Selection is on a 45% Region score / 55% State score formula. • Region score reporting forms will be provided by the PGA one week prior to the State Championships. Contact the following people for clarification or additional questions: Jan Whittaker, UHSAA jwhittaker@uhsaa.org Devin Dehlin, Utah Section PGA ddehlin@pgahq.com Annie Fisher, Utah Section PGA afisher@pgahq.com Aaron Goodman, Utah Section PGA agoodman@pgahq.com 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 119 LACROSSE State Tournament Pairings Format State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Region scheduling formats will be the decision of the region. Throughout the tournament, the team with the higher seed will be the designated home team. Playing Lines The UHSAA allows school discretion to use any NFHS-approved lines, per the NFHS rule book. However, the Association supports the usage of the NFHS-approved modified lines as schools add facilities that don’t have preexisting lines. Official Game Ball The UHSAA does not have an official game ball in lacrosse in the regular season. However, the ball must meet the NCAA/NOCSAE standard, designated by a stamp of approval on the ball. Balls for the state tournament semifinals and finals will be provided by the UHSAA. Uniforms and Equipment All uniforms and equipment will have to meet the NFHS standards for high school play. Officials will verify equipment compliance as per NFHS rules. NOCSAE standards should be used where prescribed in the NFHS rules. Ejections The ejection policy for lacrosse will follow existing UHSAA ejection policies. Officials will be encouraged to fill out ejection reports for lacrosse, but it will be the responsibility of a program’s coaches and administrators to ensure that the UHSAA ejection protocol is followed according to the rule. Fouling out will not qualify as an ejection. Clock Protocol The UHSAA will follow all NFHS clock protocol rules, including the mercy rule. Overtime Procedure The UHSAA will follow NFHS procedures for overtimes. The Association will use a golden goal in overtimes to determine a winner. Financial Responsibilities in Postseason Events Officials for postseason events are paid by host schools when games are contested at home sites. UHSAA will cover officiating costs at UHSAA-controlled venues, typically in the semifinals and finals LACROSSE Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 120 SOCCER State Tournament Pairings Format State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Throughout the tournament, the team with the higher seed will be the designated home team. Ejection/Red Card Suspension For the purposes of applying UHSAA Administrative Policies and Guidelines 4-d, an ejection by an official shall be considered to be any coach, player or bench personnel who has been disqualified (red card) in accordance with the NFHS Soccer Rules Book, Rule 12, Section 8, Art. 2. According to the Soccer Rules when such a card is issued, the individual is disqualified and may not be substituted, the team must play short. In accordance with UHSAA Administrative Policies and Guidelines 4-d, players disqualified on a red card (pursuant to NFHS Soccer Rules 12-8- 2) will be required to sit out the next regularly scheduled game at that level (varsity, J.V. etc.) and any intervening levels of play as well. A disqualified coach, player or bench personnel is considered to have been ejected. Goal Differential Rule A match will end and the team which has scored the most goals declared the winner when there is an 8 goal differential after 10 minutes have elapsed in the second half of the match. This rule is in effect for all non-region, region and post-season games for both boys and girls. Overtime Procedure For tie games in pre-season play, regular season play and state tournament play; A maximum of two 10-minute “sudden victory” overtime periods will be played. If a team scores within an overtime period, that team will be declared the winner. If, at the conclusion of two 10-minute “sudden victory” overtime periods, a tie still exists, items 3, 4 and 5 from the tie game procedure from the National Federation Soccer Rules Book will be used (shoot out). Suspended Game If less than one half of a contest has been played, the game is restarted from the point of suspension. See “Suspended Game Procedure” in the Administrative Policies and Guidelines section of the UHSAA Handbook and Rule 7 Section 1 of the NFHS Soccer Rules Book for further details. Caps Players may wear soft and yielding caps during inclement weather *Home teams for state tournament. Officials are to be paid by the home team at the post-season rate for first round and quarter-final state tournament games. SOCCER Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 121 SOCCER Process for Club Approval & Next Level Opportunities 1. An Association Partnership Committee (the UHSAA/UYSA Committee) has been established to manage the applications of soccer Academies/Clubs wishing to have teams and/or players eligible to participate in the partnership program between UHSAA and UYSA which permits players from high school soccer teams to compete with Academy/Club teams during the high school season (the “Partnership Program”). Academies/Clubs wishing to participate in the Partnership Program must meet basic criteria designed to enhance the programs available to players and reduce erroneous applications, thereby reducing the chances of abuse. 2. This is a (2) step process: (Step #1) A. Clubs must complete the power-point presentation listed below. Once the power-point is complete, the academy/club will submit the required documentation to the Utah Youth Soccer Association, who will present the request to the UHSAA/UYSA committee for approval. Clubs must be approved by the UHSAA/UYSA Committee before a request is submitted to attend Next Level Opportunities. Approved Clubs will be listed and updated on the soccer page of the UHSAA website. UHSAA.org REQUIREMENTS FOR CLUB APPROVAL The following can be in PowerPoint format, written format, or a combination of both. i. What is the History of the club? a. How long has the club been in existence, and what are some of the recent accomplishments for the club, and for the coaches/players: b. Explain your club’s history of creating next level players: c. Explain your club’s history of creating, or being invited to next level opportunities: ii. Is the club “Registered, Recognized, and in good Standing with UYSA”? What has your partnership been with the UYSA? a. Give some background on your relationship with the UYSA: iii. What is the legal status of your club team? a. 501 (c): Explain? b. Is your club for-profit: Explain? c. Is your club non-profit: Explain? d. What kind of “Board of Directors” or oversight does your club have: Explain? iv. Please share any other information you feel would be beneficial to the UHSAA/UYSA Committee that would help us make a decision on behalf of your club: a. General club philosophy, coaches certification/licensing, relationship with UHSAA schools/districts, future goals, any other points of interest or clarifications. (Step #2): B. Once the club has been approved by the UHSAA/UYSA Committee, the club can then request attendance at up to two Next Level Opportunities (NLO) by filling out the Approved Club Team Next Level Opportunity form and submitting the form to the UHSAA/UYSA Committee to determine if the NLO meets the requirements. This request for Next Level Opportunities must be submitted at least thirty (30) days in advance of the NLO. Once the NLO has been approved, each player on the club team must omplete individual paperwork for EACH NLO . Paperwork must be submitted to the UHSAA for final approval. High School Soccer players are “NOT” allowed to play in any club soccer tournament during the soccer season that hasn’t been approved. If a soccer player participates in a non-approved tournament, the student becomes ineligible for post season play. Approved Next Level Opportunities will be listed and updated on the soccer page of the UHSAA website. UHSAA.org 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 122 SOFTBALL State Championship Pairings Format State Tournament pairings are determined by a schools Post-Season Ranking within that schools classification. Throughout the championship, the team with the higher seed will be the designated home team. Per UHSAA Executive Committee ruling, teams must participate in a determined minimum number of contests to be eligible for the postseason. Softball 12 Adhere to UHSAA & NFHS Rules The National Federation of High Schools (NFHS) provides the rules for high school softball. Coaches, athletes and officials must adhere to the NFHS rules and the rules outlined in the UHSAA Handbook. To review the NFHS softball rule changes for this year, go to the UHSAA Softball page at www.uhsaa.org or the NFHS website at www.nfhs.org (click on the “Sports” tab then softball). Both sites provide valuable updates and resources for softball coaches and officials. Official Optic Yellow Game Ball Wilson A9011 will be the official ball for the state championships. The color “white” was removed from the list of permissible colors for softballs. All softballs used for competition must now be optic yellow (NFHS Softball Rules). UHSAA Requires Double First Base (Begins with the Spring 2027 season) For safety reasons, the UHSAA requires a double first base in all scheduled games and championships. Time Limits for Sub-Varsity Games Only A 1 1/2 hour time limit will be in effect for all (1A-6A) sub-varsity games. Time limits will NOT apply to varsity level games (1A-6A). Occasionally, member schools will play softball on city or county park properties that may impose a specific time limit. If a facility restriction is in place, a 1 and 1/2 hour time limit may be used. There will be no time limit for playoffs and championship games in any classification. Adhere to UHSAA Suspended Game Procedure Schools should adhere to the suspended game rule as stated in the UHSAA Handbook and UHSAA Official’s Guidebook. The NFHS suspended game rule will NOT be in effect. Fifteen Run Rule & Ten Run Rule A fifteen run rule will be used after four innings of play. A ten run rule is in effect after five innings of play. A game will end anytime after 4 1/2 innings or 5 innings when a team is 10 or more runs behind and has completed its term at bat. . This rule is in effect for all non-region, region and post-season games. International Tie-Breaker After 7 innings of play or at the beginning of the first full inning after the time limit expires, the international tie-breaker will be implemented. At the start of the 8th inning before the first batter begins her turn at bat; the last batter who hit in that team’s half of the last inning will assume a position at 2nd base. This means that the first batter in the top of the 8th will bat with a runner on 2nd base and no one out. The same procedure will continue in each half inning until a winner is determined. State Softball Championships Go to the UHSAA online calendar link ( uhsaa.org ) for the dates and locations of the state softball championships. If you have any questions, please contact Jeff Cluff, Director of Sofball: jeffcluff@uhsaa.org SOFTBALL Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 123 SWIMMING Adhere to UHSAA and NFHS Rules The National Federation of High Schools (NFHS) provides the rules for high school swimming and diving. Coaches, athletes and officials must adhere to all UHSAA and NFHS rules and regulations. In addition: • Athletes must be affiliated with a member school in good standing with the UHSAA to swim in all High School Swim Meets. • NO videoing or picture taking on the deck behind the starting block area at all High School Swim Meets. Qualifying Meets and Times The results of all dual, invitational, district, and region meets will be sent to the State Top 100 Committee. These times will be kept by them and published on a timely basis during the year. In order for the times of the meets listed above to be used in consideration of qualifying for state competition the following conditions must be met: • The meet must be run using electronic timing. • There must be two certified officials at each meet from the list of officials published by the Utah Swim Coaches Association. • Results must be signed by both officials and the head coaches. • The date of the meet and the time the meet ended should be placed on the result sheet(s) and sent to the State Top 100 Committee. • Meets swam in meter pools will be converted by taking the time swam in the meter pool in seconds and dividing it by 1.11 (HY-TEK). • Meet results and results sheet must be submitted to compiler within one week after competition is completed. • The Region Swimming Championships will be the final meet prior to the State Swimming Championships in all Classifications. Contest Limitations 14 meets per individual. Region & State Championships do not count as part of the 14-meet limit. Sport Specific Moratoriums Sport Specific Moratoriums must be declared yearly online . https://uhsaa.org/swimmoratorium/ USCA Fee for Maintaining Top 100 The Utah Swimming Coaches Association (USCA) requires a $35 annual fee from participating schools to maintain the Top 100 times on the USCA website at www.utswimcoach.com . This list will be used for seeding into the State Swim Meets. To have times posted, the required $35 fee shall be paid to the UHSAA by November 1. The UHSAA will invoice each school for the participation fee. Any times achieved prior to this due date, will not count towards state qualification if the fee has not been paid. State qualifying times will not count until after the fee has been paid. Times achieved prior to fee being paid are not retroactivie. If you have questions regarding the USCA fee contact the USCA President, Chad Starks at chadstarks@gmail.com State Meet Format & Qualifiers A state swim meet will be held in the 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A classifications The 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A classifications will hold a two-day meet. A preliminary round will be held for all Individual Events and Relay Events on day 1. On day 2, all Individual and Relay Event Finals will be held. The 2A classification will hold a 1 day, timed final meet. 2A Divisions for final meet prior to the 2A State Meet Northern Division Maeser Prep, North Summit, Rowland Hall, South Summit, St. Joseph, Vanguard Academy Southern Division Beaver, Grand County, Gunnison Valley, Millard, Parowan, Wasatch Academy For information on the state meets go to the swim page at www.uhsaa.org . SWIMMING Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 124 SWIMMING Event qualifiers will be based on the best verifiable times from the top 100 to a total of 24 swimmers per individual event for 2A , 32 swimmers per individual event for 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A. There will no longer be automatic relay event qualifiers to the state meet from the region championship meets. Relay Event qualifiers will be based on the best verifiable time from the top 100 list (see criteria above for qualifying meets) to a total of 16 relays in 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A meets. State Meet Items NO food, coolers, personal chairs or loungers allowed on the pool deck. Teams are encouraged to bring their own lap counters, BYU lap counters will be available but they can only be put in and out. NO up and down or side motions! Any damage to BYU lap counters will be assessed to the school who damages them. State Meet Break Times (All Classifications) • 15 minute break after the final heat of the Men’s 50 Freestyle • 10 minute break after the final heat of the Men’s 500 Freestyle • 10 minute break following the final heat of the Men’s 100-yard Breaststroke State Meet Entry Instructions Coaches, for all classifications (2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A) are required to email their state entries using the HY-TEK program to: Dan Miller, State Meet Director, at: milld754@gmail.com DEADLINE of 3:00 pm on the following dates: (NOTE: Schools will be fined $100 for late entries) • 2A - Tuesday, February 2nd 3A - Wednesday, February 3rd 4A - Thursday, February 4th • 5A - Tuesday, February 9th 6A - Wednesday, February 10th Please contact the meet director one day prior to the meet for any known scratches. Emergency scratches will be accepted at the coaches meeting. Coaches are responsible to verify their state entries are accurate and correspond with the times listed on the Top 100 or the school will be fined $25 per incorrect time submitted. Coaches are not allowed to send in additional entries after the deadline given. Championship meet entry rules apply as outlined in the NFHS Swimming & Diving Rules Book When submitting entries to the Meet Director, coaches must include: the HY-TEK file, the entries for the individual and relay events. DO NOT INCLUDE the names of the swimmers for the relay events, all relay participants will be declared at the State Meet from your team rosters. Coaches must let the meet Director know if their entries are correct the day after the entry deadline by noon. Failure to do so will result in a $50 fine assesssed to the school. After verifying the times and entries submitted, the Meet Director will email a team roster to coaches so they can review the rosters of the swimmers that qualified in their events. To add names to the roster that are needed for the team’s relays, contact the state meet director (Dan Miller, milld754@gmail.com ). After all rosters and entries have been verified by the coaches a state meet psych sheet will be sent to the coaches. Each team is limited to four (4) swimmers per individual event and one (1) relay per relay event. Swimmers are limited to two (2) individual events and two (2) relays or one (1) individual event and three (3) relays. If coaches have any questions regarding your entries, call State Meet Director, Dan Miller (801-360-7098) or UHSAA Swim Director, Steve Marsing (801-598-9460) prior to the deadline. After verifying the times and entries submitted, the Meet Director will email the state meet psych sheets to coaches so they can review the rosters and swimmers that qualified in the events. • The State Meets will be posted on the UHSAA Swim Page at www.uhsaa.org . • Relays are declared at the state swimming meets.. • Any technology made available by the host site may be used at the discretion of the meet director. Volunteer Timers Coaches may be asked to supply non-competing swimmers as timers for each session. Timers must be fifteen (15) years or older. If assigned by the meet director or meet Referee, coaches should email the names of participant timers to Robyn Peterson at uhsstateswimtimer@yahoo.com . UHSAA Deck Passes and Picture I.D. Required A UHSAA Deck Pass and a picture I.D. (i.e. activity card, driver’s license) are required for admittance to the deck area. Passes may only be picked up on Wednesday preceding the state meet (after 10:00 am) OR at the state site where tickets are sold (by entrance to the balcony) . Only UHSAA Credentialed coaches will be allowed on the deck. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 125 TENNIS Note: Number of qualifiers from a division may be adjusted based on the number of participating schools. Note: Court assignment requests for the State Championships WILL NOT be accepted. UHSAA and FAC/USTA Rules Coaches and players shall adhere to the rules and regulations outlined in the UHSAA Handbook and the Friend of Court (FAC)/USTA Rules Book. The UHSAA Handbook is posted online at www.uhsaa.org under the Resourses tab; a link to the FAC and the Tennis Section of the UHSAA Handbook is available on the Tennis page on the UHSAA website at www.uhsaa.org . The UHSAA State Tennis Tournaments are not sanctioned USTA tournaments, as such, the UHSAA has some policies that are unique to their tournaments. FAC/USTA Rules shall govern unless modified by the UHSAA. Five Positions in UHSAA Tennis Participating UHSAA member schools compete in five categories or positions: 1st singles, 2nd singles, 3rd singles, 1st doubles and 2nd doubles. The intent is for participating schools to fill all five positions. In rare circumstances, if a school does not have enough eligible or available players to fill all five spots, then the spots have to be filled in order of difficulty beginning with the 1st singles and/or the 1st doubles. UHSAA Contest Limitations for Tennis (See Article 2, UHSAA Handbook) 18 matches per individual. Each match counts as one (1) match. Tournaments, including Region Tournaments count as one match for each tournament day. This means that a two (2) day tournament will count as two (2) matches towards the total contests. The State Tournament and Play-in matches DO NOT count toward the contest limitations . Minimum Match Requirement To be eligible to compete in the state qualifying tournament, players shall compete in a minimum of five (5) matches during the season. This may include matches played at the varsity or junior varsity level and in the singles or doubles position. A singles UTR and a doubles UTR are different. A UTR is not considered reliable until you have played five (5) matches in that catagory (singles or doubles). Injury or special situations will be considered but must be approved by the Region Tennis Chair and in turn the UHSAA prior to the player participating. Because of the stacking guidelines, regions/divisions should not dictate that a certain percentage of matches be played at a certain position (i.e. 1st singles, 2nd singles). Guidelines for Determining a Lineup – Stacking is NOT Permissible In an effort to promote fair play and wholesome team competition, coaches shall submit legitimate lineups based on the skill ability of their participating players. Skill level determines the category or position a player should be legitimately placed. The UHSAA offers the following guidelines for determining a legitimate lineup: • Coaches shall enter players at the positions which their skill dictates (on the day of the meet) A legitimate lineup places a better skilled singles player above a lesser skilled singles player or a better skilled doubles team above a lesser skilled doubles team. A lineup that places a singles player of lesser skill ahead of a player with greater skill is NOT LEGAL. Similarly, any lineup which places a doubles team of lower skill ahead of a team with greater skill is illegal. Lineups change as players’ skill levels change. • Legitimate lineups according to skill ability: Skill ability shall be defined as the number one singles player shall be better than the number two singles player who shall be better than the number three singles player. The number one doubles team shall be better than the number two doubles team. • Stacking is NOT permissible and could result in UHSAA sanctions : Juggling, shuffling or forfeiting positions to gain an advantage is unsportsmanlike and creates an unhealthy educational environment. In the event of an injury, absence, ineligibility during any course of the season the next best player would move up to fill the spot vacated by the injured player. For the State Tournament Entry selection, coaches should fill out their individual team line up based on player UTR’s. Allegations of stacking could result in sanctions against the offending program and coach by the UHSAA Executive Committee. • Code of Ethics Regarding Stacking - link to: Tennis Stacking Code of Ethics UHSAA Guidelines for Addressing Incidents of Stacking (During Region Play) Considering the number of matches played during the tennis season, reported incidents of stacking are very rare. Nevertheless, the UHSAA has created the following guidelines for taking appropriate actions if it does occur. When accusations of stacking have been reported the accused coach and principal may be called before the Region Board of Managers to review ethics, sportsmanship & UHSAA guidelines on Stacking. The Region Board of Managers may choose to administer an appropriate penalty based on the accusation. TENNIS Policies & Pairings 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 126 TENNIS State Qualifying Tournaments and the Process for Submitting Tournament Results The UHSAA holds state tennis tournaments for 6A, 5A, 4A, and 3A, with 2A and 1A qualifying players participating with 3A. With an individual competition format, team points are accumulated as players advance through their respective bracket (1st Singles, 2nd Singles, 3rd Singles, 1st Doubles, 2nd Doubles). Players will qualify for State Tournaments using the UTR and Coach Roster Entry process. Players rostered on the high school team may not participate on any other tennis team during the high school season. Additionally, to be eligible to compete in the state tournament, a player may not be registered for or compete in any tournament whose dates conflict with the state tournament. It shall be the express duty and responsibility of the tennis coach, athletic director and principal to ensure that this requirement is met. All coaches must ensure their team’s results are accurately entered into MaxPreps by midnight of the season end date, with all varsity matches properly entered and reflected in their player’s standings. Each head coach is then responsible for submitting a state lineup by 5:00 p.m. of the State Tournament Entry Deadline. Failure to follow either deadline could result in sanctioning of fines by the UHSAA Executive Committee. Seeding for State Tournaments Seeds for the State Tournament will be decided by the UTR in each classification. EX: Coach A submits Player B as the team’s 1st Singles player. Player B’s UTR is then compared with all the other 1st singles submissions by coaches in the state, then Player B is seeded accordingly in the bracket. The 3A, 4A, and 5A tournaments are 24-seed brackets, with the 1-8 seeds receiving a bye to the round of 16. The 9-24 seeds will compete in a play in round. 6A is a 16 seed bracket, with seeds 16 and 17 competing in a play in round. The play in round will be at a site determined by the Executive Committee. Doubles teams will be seeded by combining the UTR scores of the submitted players into a total score, then ranking the combined score against the combined scores of the other pairs. Individual and Team Scoring UHSAA State Tennis Tournaments will be two-out-of-three sets with regular scoring. If the score reaches six games all, a seven-point tiebreak game shall be played (first player to score seven points with a two point margin wins the set). State tournaments are single elimination. Team scoring for the 3A, 4A, 5A and 6A State Tennis Tournaments will be win in the play-in round 1st Round = one (1) point. Win in the Round of 16 = two (2) points. Win in the Round of 8 = three (3) points. Win in the Semifinals = four (4) and win in the Finals = five (5) points. Tournaments will include five categories or positions: 1st singles, 2nd singles, 3rd singles, 1st doubles and 2nd doubles. UHSAA Coaching Guidelines A school may have no more than two credentialed coaches actively coaching at any given time. Credentialed coaches may rotate throughout the day. If actively coaching, a coach must also wear one of the two State badges provided to the school for each day of the tournament. Coaching is permitted only by members of the coaching staff between sets and during changeovers. Coaching is not permitted during the warm-up period, during a tiebreaker or following the first game of a set. Only one coach per team may be on the court during allowed coaching periods. That coach must be wearing both their UHSAA-issued credential and the State badge. All coaches must be listed in Aktivate for the specific sport (Girls Tennis or Boys Tennis) and must wear their UHSAA- issued credential. Continuous coaching is not allowed. Compliance with USTA time limitations regarding rest periods and changeovers are still in effect and USTA penalties for time violations on rest periods and changeovers will be enforced. Substitution of Players for State Tournament Substitutions may only be made in the bracket according to a player injury or illness preventing them from competing. There will be no reseed once the tournament bracket has been released. There will be no substitutions once the tournaments play in round has begun. To substitute a player, another rostered player is allowed to replace the injured or ill player. The new player must have a UTR that is equal to or less than the injured or ill player. No other movement will occur in the line up. It will be considered a forfeit if a player does not continue competition in the tournament. Proper and full team uniform is mandatory for all state tournament participants. Teammates should wear the same color of shorts and same color shirts although team logo designation is not required. Dress should be modest and follow proper tennis etiquette. Players not in legal uniform could be required to change or be disqualified from the tournament. Uniform Logo Rules This rule will apply to all sports that do not have existing uniform codes in NFHS rule books. - The uniform may display the competitor’s name, school name, school nickname, and/or the school logo. - Any form of advertising on the uniform is prohibited. - A single visible manufacturer’s logo/trademark/reference, no more than 2 ¼ square inches with no dimension more than 2 ¼ inches is permitted on each item of the uniform. - One American flag, not to exceed 2 inches by 3 inches, may be worn or occupy space on each item of uniform apparel. By state association adoption, to allow for special occasions, commemorative or memorial patches, not to exceed 4 square inches, may be worn on the uniform without compromising its integrity. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 127 TRACK & FIELD TRACK & FIELD Policies and Pairings 6A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 1 Region 2 Region 3 1 1 1 5A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 4 Region 5 Region 6 Region 7 1 1 1 1 4A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 8 Region 9 Region 10 Region 11 1 1 1 1 3A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 12 Region 13 Region 14 1 1 1 2A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 15 Region 16 Region 17 Region 18 1 1 1 1 1A SCHOOLS The following number of individuals and relays will qualify in each event from each Region: Region 19 Region 20 Region 21 Region 22 1 1 1 1 Additional Qualifiers In addition to the above, any individual or relay team meeting the qualifying standard at a sanctioned qualifying or region meet will also qualify for the state meet. Only one relay team from each school may be entered at the state meet. Seeding for the state meets will be based on the qualifying mark from the region or other sanctioned qualifying meet. Only qualifying marks or marks achieved in earning a qualifying place at the Region meet are allowed for entry into and seeding at the state meet. Wind aided marks will NOT be accepted as state qualifying marks in the 100 Meter Dash, 200 Meter Dash, or in the 100 or 110 Meter High Hurdles. Average anemometer (wind gauge) readings in excess of +2.0 meters per second (see rule 10-2) are considered to be wind aided. All state qualifying marks submitted in these events from state qualifying meets must be accompanied by a valid anemometer reading during the race in which the mark was achieved. An anemometer (wind gauge) is required at all state qualifying meets. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 128 TRACK & FIELD Athletes can qualify for the state track meet by meeting one of the following criteria: 1. Hit the UHSAA qualifying standard in a sanctioned meet. 2. Be a region champion 3. Be ranked in the top ## for your classification in an event (see b.). a. b. Event

Section 1: Oratory (Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pg 44. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Original Oratory A. Purpose: The general purpose of the speech is to persuade. Any other purpose such as to inform or entertain shall be secondary. B. Contest: This contest comprises only memorized orations actually composed by the contestants and not used by them during a previous contest season. No visual aids are permitted. C. Subject: Any appropriate subject may be used, but the orator must be truthful. Any non-factual reference, especially a personal one, must be so identified. D. Length : The time limit in Original Oratory is ten minutes with a 30-second “grace period.” If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. No minimum time is mandated. E. Quotation: Not more than 150 words of the oration may be direct quotation from any other speech or writing and such quotations must be identified in a printed copy of the oration supplied prior to registration. Extensive paraphrasing from other sources is prohibited. F. Script: The orator’s script must identify the quoted materials, state the number of quoted words, include a work cited page in APA or MLA format, and both the orator and the coach must attest by signature that the oration is the original work of the contestant. It is the responsibility of the contestant to have a script ready upon request should the speech be challenged. At the National Tournament, all quarterfinalists in OO are required to turn in a printed, typed copy of their manuscript, including a works cited page, to the ombudsperson before noon on the third day of competition. G. Re-Use: A student may not use an oration the student used in region, state competition in any previous contest year. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 200 SPEECH/DEBATE H. Sample Oratory Ballot 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 201 SPEECH/DEBATE I. Oratory Rubric Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) At the end of the round you will rank students 1-7, 1 being who did the best job based on their overall skill performance considering the following: Speech Evaluation Rubric Importance: Is the topic significant? Is the thesis clearly established? Does the delivery assist in establishing the importance of the topic? Relatability: Can the audience relate to the topic? Is the delivery personable? Does the speaker establish how others are impacted by their topic? Is the rhetoric of the speech inclusive? Originality : Does the speaker address the topic in a unique, inventive way? Are the supporting examples new and interesting? Delivery: Is the student using voice, movement, and expression effectively? Is the speaker confident? Is there consistent eye contact? Is the volume appropriate? Section 2: Extemporaneous Speaking (Source: See High School Unified Manual, Chapter, Rules, and Tournament Operations , 2021-2022, pgS 52- 53. https://www.speechanddebate.org/high-school-unified-manual/ ) Extemporaneous Speaking A. Divisions : United States (Domestic), International (Foreign) and Mixed: a. United States Division: Questions will cover U.S. domestic and U.S. foreign policy. b. International Division: Questions will cover the domestic affairs of foreign countries and the foreign affairs of all countries, including the United States. c. Mixed Extemp: Questions may come from either United States or International. B. Topics: The tournament director will obtain a list of questions phrased for contest use and based on subjects discussed in periodicals during the current school year. The contents of the list must not be disclosed except as contestants draw questions. A new subject area will be used for each round with no duplication of questions between the divisions. C. Entry: At Reguib abd State, no student is allowed to enter both divisions in a single contest year. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 202 SPEECH/DEBATE D. Drawing: Students will be given a set of three questions to choose from 30 minutes prior to their speaking time. They will select one to speak on. Tournament directors/Extemp prep room coordimatiors may run per standard operations procedures for Utah contests. E. Preparation: As soon as a question is chosen, the contestant will prepare a speech without consultation and without references to prepared notes. Students may consult published books, magazines, newspapers and journals or articles, and internet (see K) provided: a. They are originals or copies of whole pages. b. Provided those originals or copies are uncut. c. There is no written material on that original or copy other than citation information. d. Topical index without annotation may be present. e. No other material will be allowed in the Extemp prep room other than stated above. f. Extemp speeches, handbooks, briefs and outlines are prohibited from the Extemp prep room. g. Underlining or highlighting in Extemp will be allowed if done in only one color on each article or copy. Please see rules concerning Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Extemporaneous Speaking . h. Printed copies of information from online computer services may be used. Electronically retrieved evidence used in Extemp competition must conform to the citation standard of the Modern Language Association [consult the MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers (7th edition) or http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/747/05/]. F. Notes: Contestants may make notes during the preparation time, but the use of notes, cards, briefs or other aids is prohibited during the speech. G. Time: The time limit in both Extemporaneous Speaking events is seven minutes with a 30-second “grace period. “If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. No minimum time is mandated. H. Recuse: Contestants may not leave the preparation area until dismissed by the Extemp proctor. Consultation with any person other than the Extemp proctor between the time of drawing and time of speaking is prohibited. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 203 SPEECH/DEBATE I. Cross-Examination: (NSDA ONLY, NOT APPLICABLE TO STATE) Each district has the autonomy to determine whether cross-examination will be used in the final round of Extemporaneous Speaking events at the district tournament. The National Tournament will utilize an opencross examination period of two minutes for both the semifinal and final rounds. If cross-examination is used, the district must use the National Tournament final round format. The decision of the District Committee is final. Procedure: Each speaker shall be assigned a speaker order position. Drawing shall take place at 12-minute intervals. Thirty minutes after speaker first has drawn, speakers first and last shall enter the contest room. Speaker first shall give a speech and speaker last shall listen and may take notes. At the conclusion of speaker first’s speech, speaker last shall question speaker first for two minutes. Speaker last shall return to the prep room and speaker first shall stay and question speaker second. Speaker second will question speaker third, etc. Unless it is unavoidable, students from the same school shall not cross-examine one another. Speaker order should be adjusted accordingly. J. Observation: Students in Extemporaneous Speaking are encouraged, but not required, to stay and watch the remaining speakers after they deliver their speech. Students who are double entered may be able to observe as time permits. K . NEW GUIDELINES for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Extemporaneous Speaking A. Preparation : As soon as a question is chosen, the contestant will prepare a speech without consultation and without references to prepared notes. Students may consult published books, magazines, newspapers and journals or articles, including internet enabled devices either used in the draw or those materials published from internet sources, provided: a. They are originals or copies of whole pages. b. Provided those originals or copies are uncut. c. There is no written material on that original or copy other than citation information. Contestants with laptops are responsible for providing sufficient battery power. No electrical power will be supplied by the tournament, and contestants may not plug in to outlets in the Extemp prep area. d. Topical index without annotation may be present. e. Files stored either on a computer or electronic device hard drive or cloud storage system. All files in this format must meet the same guidelines as printed sources. f. Active research from the internet during the round that meets the established criteria found in the “Guidelines for Use of Internet Enabled Devices.” B. No other material will be allowed in the Extemp prep room other than stated above. Extemp speeches, handbooks, briefs and outlines, including those stored on cloud storage systems or published on websites created for that purpose, are prohibited from the Extemp prep room. a. Students may not use the internet to gain help from coaches, other students, or any person, such that it would prevent the speech from being the original work of the competitor. b. Students are prohibited from accessing outlines and speeches that have been written prior to their draw time. Underlining or highlighting in Extemp will be allowed if done in only one color on each article or copy. c. Electronic device use must comply with the “Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” d. Printed copies of information from online computer services may be used. e. Electronically retrieved evidence used in any Association Extemp competition must conform to the same citation standards as evidence used in debate events as described on p. 27 of the Unified Manual. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 204 SPEECH/DEBATE C. Sample Extemporaneous Ballot D. Extemporaneous Speaking Rubric Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) Rank speakers 1st through last using the speech evaluation below. Speech Evaluation Rubric Argumentation and Analysis: Is the student directly answering the question? Does the student develop justifications for their ideas and establish the significance of their points? Have they established a clear understanding of the topic area? Source Consideration: Does the speaker offer a variety of sources? Are the sources provided credible? Are appropriate citations used when citing a source? Delivery: Is the student using voice, movement, and expression effectively? Is the speaker confident? Is there consistent eye contact? Is the volume appropriate? 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 205 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 3: Impromptu: A. Topics: Topics may include proverbs, abstract words, events, quotations, and famous people. B. Drawing: Judges will pick up topics from designated area of tourament. Each round will have 3 topics per speaker. On their turn, contestants will receive the slip of topics from the Judge and select one to speak on. Timing begins when the look at the slip of paper. C. Preparation and Delivery: The speaker has seven minutes in which to prepare a response and present a speech without consultation of prepared notes. D. No electronic retrieval device may be used, but printed materials from online computer services may be used. E. Recuse: Once a speaker has spoken, they may listen to other speakers in that round. F. Notes: No notes shall be used during presentation. G. Time: The maximum time limit is 7 minutes with a 30-second “grace period,” which includes both preparation and speaking. H. If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. i. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. I. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. J. No minimum time is mandated. K. Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) Rank speakers 1st through last using the speech evaluation below. Speech Evaluation Rubric Organization: Does the student have a clear structure to their speech? Are transitions used to move effectively between each part of the speech? Does the development of the speech make sense? Analysis: Does the student directly address the prompt? Does the student develop justifications for their ideas and establish significance to the points? Delivery: Does the student use voice, movement, and expression effectively? Is the speaker confident? Is there consistent eye contact? Is the volume appropriate? 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 206 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 4: Informative A. Purpose: An informative speech is an original speech designed to explain, define, describe, or illustrate a particular subject. The general purpose of the speech is for the audience to gain understanding and/or knowledge of a topic. Any other purpose such as to entertain or to convince shall be secondary. The use of audio/visual aids is optional. (See # 4 on Aids.) B. Contest: This contest comprises only memorized speeches composed by the contestants and not used by them during a previous contest season. C. Subject: Effective speeches provide new information or perspectives on a topic, including those that are widely known. The responsibility for choosing a worthwhile topic rests with the contestant. A fabricated topic may not be used. Any non-factual reference, including a personal reference, must be so identified. D. Aids: Audio/visual aids may or may not be used to supplement and reinforce the message. a. If used, the audio/visual aids should enhance or support the message rather than distract from the overall effectiveness of the presentation. b. During the presentation, no electronic equipment is permitted. Electronic equipment is defined as any object requiring an electrical cord, battery, or solar power to operate it (projectors, cell phones, radios, iPads, computers, etc.). c. The use of live animals or any additional people as visual aids is not allowed during the speech. d. Items of dress put on and/or removed for illustration during the course of the presentation are considered costumes and may not be part of the contestant’s presentation. e. Visual aids may not violate policies as dictated by local and state law (weapons, drugs, etc.) f. Contestants may not distribute items to the judges or audience before, during, or after the round. This includes but is not limited to food, objects, handouts, flyers, and promotional merchandise. g. The host school is not responsible for providing any facilities, equipment, including tables, chairs, or easels, or assistance in a contestant’s use of visual aids. h. Expedient set up and take down of aids is expected. i. If a visual aid displays published pictorial material, the source must be included in the work-cited page but does not need to be cited orally. E Length: The time limit is 10 minutes with a 30-second “grace period.” If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. No minimum time is mandated. F. Quotation: Not more than 150 words of the speech may be direct quotation and such quotations must be identified orally and in a printed copy of the speech supplied prior to registration. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 207 SPEECH/DEBATE G. Script: Manuscripts must be available at all region/state tournament contests in the event of a protest. Scripts will be uploaded via tabroom or be available electronically to the Tournamen Director prior to the state tournament. a. The script must identify the quoted materials, state the number of quoted words, include a work- cited page in APA or MLA format, and both the speaker and the coach must attest by signature that the speech is the original work of the contestant. H. Re-Use: A student may not use an informative speech the student used in region, state competition in any previous contest year. I: Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) Rank speakers 1st through last using the speech evaluation below. Speech Evaluation Rubric Relevance: Is the topic timely? Is the thesis clearly established? Does the delivery assist in establishing the importance of the topic? Relatability: Can the audience relate to the topic? Is the delivery personable? Does the speaker establish how others are impacted by the topic? Does the speaker do a good job informing? Originality: Does the speaker address the topic in a unique, inventive way? Are the supporting examples new and interesting? Delivery: Does the student use voice, movement, and expression effectively? Is the speaker confident? Is there consistent eye contact? Is the volume appropriate? If using a visual-does it add to their speech in an appropriate manner? (NOTE-VISUALS ARE NOT REQUIRED AND IF A CONTESTANT DOES NOT HAVE ONE IT SHOULD IN NO WAY BE A FACTOR IN LOWERING THEIR RANKING) Section 5: Combined Interpretation Introduction: For UDCA Region and State, 2-6A will allow a Combined interpretation event which includes POI/Dramatic/Humorous Interpretations. A. Program Oral Interpretation a. Purpose: POI is a program of oral interpretation of thematically-linked selections chosen from two or three genres: prose, poetry, drama (plays). i. At least two pieces of literature that represent at least two separate genres must be used. Unlike the other interpretation events, Program Oral Interpretation may use multiple sources for the program. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 208 SPEECH/DEBATE ii. The title or author of all selections must be verbally identified in either the introduction and/or transitional phrases. The title may identify the primary source (e.g., book, anthology, journal, magazine, newspaper, approved website, etc.) or the specific title within the primary source (e.g., a poem, a play, a short story, a journal/ magazine article, a newspaper article, etc.). iii. If more than one author is attributed to the source, at a minimum, the primary author should be verbally cited. A Works Cited of all sources must be available to tournament officials upon request. iv. Competitors are encouraged to devote approximately equal times to each of the genres used in the program. This distinction pertains to these two or three genres as a whole, not types of literature within a genre (such as fiction/nonfiction). v. Prose expresses thought through language recorded in sentences and paragraphs: fiction (short stories, novels) and non-fiction (articles, essays, journals, biographies). vi. Poetry is writing which expresses ideas, experience, or emotion through the creative arrangement of words according to their sound, their rhythm, their meaning. Poetry may rely on verse and stanza form. b. Contest: The use of a manuscript during the performance is required. Common practices include the use of a binder or folder. Reading from a book or magazine is not permitted. i. The intact manuscript may be used by the contestant as a prop, so long as it is in the contestant’s control by remaining in contact with the body at all times. ii. No costumes or props other than the manuscript are permitted iii.. Pictures, graphics, and/or illustrations are considered a visual aid, even if included in the original manuscript, and may not be displayed. The contestant must address the script; however, introduction and transitional material may be memorized. c. Length: The time limit is 10 minutes with a 30-second “grace period.” d. If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. i.. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. e. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. No minimum time is mandated. f. Publication Rules: All literature performed must meet the publication rules of the Association. g. Adaptations to material may only be used for the purpose of transition. i. Any word changes (to eliminate profane language) and/or additions (for transition) must be indicated clearly in ink. ii. Failure to clearly indicate the addition of words will be subject to disqualification. Changes to the script may only be used for the purpose of transition or to eliminate profane language. iii. The voice of a script may not be changed. For example, changing “She moved to California when she was 13” to “I moved to California when I was 13” is not permitted. iv. Combining small fractions of sentences or singular words to create humorous or dramatic dialogue, scenes, moments, and/or plot lines not intended in the original literature is prohibited. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 209 SPEECH/DEBATE –.For example, it is not permitted to take one word from page 13 (e.g. home), a phrase from page 211 (e.g. ran away from), and a name, (e.g. Tyler) from page 59 to create dialogue between characters or events that do not exist in the script. Example: adding “Tyler ran away from home.” when this did not occur and was not said in the script is not permitted. v. Transitions only may be used to clarify the logical sequence of ideas. They are not to be used for the purpose of embellishing the humorous or dramatic effect of the literature. B: Dramatic/Humorous Interpretations: This includes categories of individual (solo) performance of dramatic (serious) and humorous literature, with selections drawn from published, printed: novels, short stories, plays, poetry, or other printed, published works, PDFs, e-books, as well as limited online and recorded works as provided for in the rules below. a. Divisions. Contests are conducted in Dramatic, Humorous, Duo, and Program Oral Interpretation. See additional rules for the supplemental interpretation events of Poetry, Prose, and Storytelling. b. Length: The time limit in Interpretation Main Events (Dramatic, Humorous, Duo, and Program Oral Interpretation) is ten minutes with a 30-second “grace period.” i. If there are multiple judges in the round, all must agree that the student has gone beyond the grace period. ii. Should a student go beyond the grace period, the student may not be ranked 1st. iii. There is no other prescribed penalty for going over the grace period. iv. The ranking is up to each individual judge’s discretion. Judges who choose to time are to use accurate (stopwatch function) timing devices. v.. No minimum time is mandated. c. Material: Selections used in the oral interpretation main events of Dramatic and Humorous, must be cuttings from a single work of literature (one short story, play, or novel), unless poetry is used, in which case cuttings may come from one or more poems from a single source. i. If the source is an anthology collection of short stories, plays, or novels, each selection of literature is independent and only one selection can be used, even if it is from the same author. ii. If the source is an anthology which includes poetry, multiple poems may be used from this single source by one or a variety of authors. iii. Unlike the other oral interpretation main events, Program Oral Interpretation may use multiple sources for the program. iv. Song lyrics may be used if the performer has an original, hard copy of the lyrics such as sheet music or a CD jacket or if they can be found from online sources that meet the digital source rules below. v. See specific rules for Program Oral Interpretation and Supplemental interpretation events. Note: In 2020, the Board of Directors voted to pilot the following new rules regarding what sources for material may be used in Interpretation events, including removal of the requirement that digital sources must be found on the Approved Websites List. The following pilot publication rules will be continued in 2021-2022. Any source material is permitted as long as it meets the standards outlined below: A. Original source material must not be written by the competitor who is performing it. B. Original source material must be publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 210 SPEECH/DEBATE a. Digital printed publications such as web pages and PDFs retrieved or purchased from web pages are permitted as long as the web page is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament. b. Digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files, and films are permitted as long as the original source is publicly accessible throughout the duration of the tournament and the competitor can obtain an official transcript of the original source. i. For print publications such as novels, short stories, plays, or poetry, the original source is the physical book or e-book. Photocopies of original literature are not acceptable. Presenting the physical book or e-book is sufficient to prove that a printed publication is publicly accessible. ii. For digital printed publications such as web pages, original source material is no longer required to come from online publishing sources listed on the NSDA Approved Websites List. c. The original source must be publicly accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. d. Competitors must also present a printed manuscript to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting a printed copy of a website is not alone sufficient to prove that a digital printed publication is publicly accessible. e. PDFs are permitted as long as the website from which the PDF is retrieved or purchased is publicly accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. Competitors must also present a printed copy of the PDF to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting a printed copy of the PDF is not alone sufficient to prove that a PDF is publicly accessible. f. For non-English print material that a competitor will perform in English, the original source material in its original language must be publicly accessible. Competitors must present an official English translation to be used in the case of a protest. g. An official translation must be obtained in one of two ways: i. An official translation is obtained through the original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. ii. Or, an official translation is obtained through a translation service which uses non-automated, manual translation. iii. Then, the competitor receives approval to perform the translation by the original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. h. For digital unprinted publications such as videos, audio files, and films, the original source must be publicly accessible for viewing or purchase by a simple internet search or by a URL not requiring passwords or access codes. i. Competitors must also present a printed official transcript of the original source to be used in the case of a protest, but presenting an official transcript is not alone sufficient to prove that the original source is publicly accessible. j. An official transcript must be obtained in one of two ways: i. An official transcript is obtained through the original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. ii. Or, an official transcript is obtained through an official transcription service such as TranscribeMe, Scribie, or iScribed, which use non-automated, manual transcription. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 211 SPEECH/DEBATE iii. Then, the competitor receives approval to perform the transcription by the original source’s producer, licensing agent, or copyright holder. iv. If the digital unprinted source is not in English and the competitor wishes to perform it in English, an official transcription and an official translation of the transcription (see #4 above) are required. k. Source Verification: It is the affirmative duty of each coach and each student entered in Interpretation contests to determine absolutely that the cutting being performed meets all rules for material. Interp source material must be available at all district tournament contests in the event of a protest. Any contestant failing to produce the following items to the ombudsperson by the aforementioned deadline will not qualify for the semifinal rounds of competition. 1) The original published source of any selection used must be immediately available at the tournament. When requested by tournament officials, access to the source material upon demand, either in electronic or print form, must be presented. i. For print publications, the original source is the physical book. Photocopies of original literature are not acceptable. ii. For PDFs, an original, unaltered PDF via flash drive, email, or on an electronic device (e.g., laptop) must be presented. Manipulation of a PDF script outside the scope of the rules will be subject to disqualification. iii. PDF publications from an online source that meets the above standards and e-books are permitted. Competitors may turn in an e-book via flashdrive, email, or e-reader. For e-books, an original, unaltered e-pub or other recognized e-book format via flash drive or email must be presented; however, as some e-book formats are exclusive to their specific apps or electronic readers, students must provide the required technology and/or internet access to verify the material performed for tournament officials. iv. For non-English publications that are being performed in English, both the original non-English source and the official English transcript must be provided. v. For a digital publication, a printed manuscript will be turned in as the original source. Only the printed manuscript shall be considered adequate proof of authenticity. vi. The material the competitor performs must presently appear on the website if questions arise in competition. The website and online version of the digital publication need to be available for comparison if challenged. Online access the fundamental responsibility of tournament officials and/or individual filing the protest. NOTE: If tournament officials cannot gain online access and the above requirements have been met, the piece is considered legal for use. vii. Manuscript items to be printed directly from the screen for digital printed materials: A. The first page in the website (the home page) B. All other linked pages needed to navigate to the literary text selected for competition shall be printed out and the link must be highlighted in the manuscript C. All web pages upon which the cutting appears D. Each page must have printed in the header and/or footer including: a. Date the page was printed b. Web address 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 212 SPEECH/DEBATE 2) A photocopy or printed screenshot of every page of the original source from which any line of the cutting was taken. The photocopy will be kept for evaluation during the semifinal round. Pages are to be placed in the order in which they are performed (e.g., if text from one page is used more than once within the cutting, that page should be copied again with those words highlighted and reinserted where it is used in the cutting). Students are not required to photocopy or print pages that are not used in their cutting. l. All words used from the script should be highlighted (any words/lines not used should be left unmarked). i. Any word changes (to eliminate profane language) and/or additions (for transition) must be indicated clearly in ink. Failure to clearly indicate the addition of words will be subject to disqualification. ii. Changes to the script may only be used for the purpose of transition or to eliminate profane language. iii. Transitions may be used to clarify the logical sequence of ideas. They are not to be used for the purpose of embellishing the humorous or dramatic effect of the literature. m. Performance: The presentation may not use physical objects or costuming. During the presentation, the contestant/team must name the author and the book or magazine from which the cutting was made. n. Additionally: A. Adaptations to material may only be used for the purpose of transition. Any word changes (to eliminate profane language) and/or additions (for transition) must be indicated clearly in ink. Failure to clearly indicate the addition of words will be subject to disqualification. Changes to the script may only be used for the purpose of transition or to eliminate profane language. The voice of a script may not be changed. For example, changing “She moved to California when she was 13” to “I moved to California when I was 13” is not permitted. Combining small fractions of sentences or singular words to create humorous or dramatic dialogue, scenes, moments, and/or plot lines not intended in the original literature is prohibited. For example, it is not permitted to take one word from page 13 (e.g. home), a phrase from page 211 (e.g. ran away from), and a name, (e.g. Tyler) from page 59 to create dialogue between characters or events that do not exist in the script. Example: adding “Tyler ran away from home.” when this did not occur and was not said in the script is not permitted. Transitions only may be used to clarify the logical sequence of ideas. They are not to be used for the purpose of embellishing the humorous or dramatic effect of the literature. o. Humorous, Dramatic, and Duo Interpretation selections must be presented from memory. Program Oral Interpretation must use a manuscript. p. Monologues, prose, and poetry selections are acceptable in Dramatic, Humorous, and Program Oral Interpretation. In Duo Interpretation, if the selection is prose or poetry and contains narration, either or both of the performers may present the narration. q. Artistic Plagiarism: Videos of previous final round performances and/or other video media are intended to provide educational examples for coaches and students. They are not intended to serve as a model to directly imitate or duplicate in performance. Although universal human emotions may lead to similarities in portrayal of characters, wholesale impersonation, including cutting, blocking, and/or interpretation (verbal and/or nonverbal portrayal of characters and text) of material of previous semifinal round, final round, and other video media performances is prohibited and grounds for penalty. Given the extent of the artistic plagiarism, the performance penalty may range from lowering the ranking in the round to disqualification (see page 123). It is the burden of proof of the individual filing the protest to provide documented evidence of the artistic plagiarism demonstrated in the performance. This includes providing access to the plagiarized video material and written verification of examples to substantiate the complaint. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 213 SPEECH/DEBATE r. Focus: In Dramatic, Humorous, and Program Oral Interpretation, use of focal points and/or direct contact with the audience should be determined by the requirements of the literature being interpreted. s. Re-Use: A student may not use a cutting from a work of literature the student used in National Speech & Debate Association district or national competition in any previous contest year. A student entered in two events may not use the same selection of literature in both events. t. UDCA Combined Interp Ballot NSDA Interp Ballots for POI/HI/DI There is a set time limit of ten minutes, with a thirty second grace period Humorous/Dramatic Interp/Program of Oral Interp (POI):: Interps rely on the performer’s ability to portray one or more characters from a selected piece of literature that explores a story, argument, theme, etc. In Dramatic/Humorous: They will take their cutting from only one source. No script to be held. In POI: Each program must contain at least two of the three genres and students are encouraged to include all three. They must hold a binder/script in hand at all times. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 214 SPEECH/DEBATE Tabroom judging rubric (UHSAA/UDCA Specific) Ranking: At the end of the round you will rank them 1-7, 1 being who did the best job based on their overall skill performance considering the following: Speech Evaluation Rubric Skill Explanation of Skill to be Demonstrated Cutting Organization of ideas/plot: Is the storyline easy to follow and understandable? Is the central theme/argument to be made in the Interpretation clear and developed throughout the piece? Originality Does the speaker address a significant topic in a unique, inventive way? Relatability Can the audience relate to the topic? Is the delivery personable? Is the rhetoric of the piece inclusive/appropriate for age level? IF A POI also consider Were at least two of the three genres of literature (Poetry/Prose/Drama) used in the program? Did all of the literature contribute to the theme or argument? Was there a balance among genres in the performance? Characterization Is each character well-developed and relatable? Does a character’s response seem believable given the situation being portrayed? Did the selection(s) have distinct and engaging characters? Did the performance match the genre ( did the performer emphasize poetic elements when performing a Poetry selection, Humorous, Dramatic)? Blocking/Movement Can you tell what the performer is doing in the scene and what character they are playing? Is the movement motivated by clear objectives/purpose? IF POI also consider: Did the performer maintain control of the manuscript/Binder at all times? Physical Presence/ Presentation Is the presenter comfortable and commanding in the space? Does the presenter’s use of physicality, facial expression, and gestures enhance the performance? Does the presenter bring the words to life using effective techniques to convey appropriate emotion? Vocal Presentation Tone: Does the performer's voice align with the type of story/theme/genre? Does the presenter seem engaged in the literature? Articulation: Are the words clearly articulated and understood? Is volume/pace/inflection appropriately used throughout and effective in articulating the emotion of the text? 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 215 SPEECH/DEBATE Article 8: : Internet/Electronic Device Usage A. Contestants may use electronic devices (including laptop computers, tablets, and/or cell phones) to access the internet during debate, congress and extemp prep with the following conditions: a.. Computers or other electronic devices may not be used to receive information for competitive advantage from non-competitors (coaches, assistant coaches, other non-competing students) inside or outside of the room in which the competition occurs. Information that would be restricted would include but not be limited to coach/non-participating competitor generated arguments, advice on arguments to run, questions to ask during cross examination, and other information not generated by the participating competitors in your round. b.. Internet access may be used to retrieve files, exchange evidence and/or arguments, research arguments, and partner to partner communication, and communication between other participants in the round. These electronic device guidelines do not limit communication between debate partners during the debate round. c. Penalty: Contestants found to have violated these provisions will be disqualified from the tournament and will forfeit all rounds and merit points in that event. d. . Availability of Evidence: Contestants electing to use computers have the responsibility to promptly provide a copy of any evidence read in a speech for inspection by the judge or opponent. Printers may be used. Evidence may be printed in the round or produced electronically but must be provided in a format readable by the opposing team and the judge. e.. In extemp, the internet may be used for research, access to article files, etc. In no way should they be accessing and using pre prepared speeches on topics. f. Contestants electing to use computers are responsible for providing their own computers, batteries, extension cords, and all other necessary accessories. Tournament hosts will not be responsible for providing computers, printers, software, paper, or extension cords for contestants. Host schools may provide wireless internet access, but will not guarantee that contestants will be able to gain access when needed. g. Contestants choosing to use laptop computers and/or related devices accept the risk of equipment failure. Judges and/or contest directors will give no special consideration or accommodation, including no additional speech time or prep time, should equipment failure occur. h. By choosing to use electronic devices in the round, debaters and other relevant parties are consenting to give tournament officials the right to search their devices in the event of a protest. The device may only be searched by tournament officials and must be restricted to files and/or electronic exchanges relevant to the protest.Failure to comply would result in the upholding of the protest. Debaters and coaches should be present as their device is searched. Debaters who do not wish to consent should not use electronic devices in the round. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 216 SPEECH/DEBATE UHSAA State Tournament Schedule Tournament Schedule A: All tournament schedules will follow this schedule for State Tournaments. As always, tournaments may run ahead or behind scheduled times, but all efforts should be made to adhere to this schedule as much as possible. Friday 1A Congress Speech Policy 3pm Session 1 Extemp Prep 3:15 3:30pm Round 1 Round 1 4:30 Extemp Prep 4:45 Round 2 5:30 Dinner Dinner Dinner 6:00 Session 2 Extemp Prep 6:15 6:30 Round 3 Round 2 8pm Finals Saturday 3-6A Congress LD/PF/SPAR Policy 8am Session 1 if 2+Houses Break at 10:30 for brunch 8:30am Session 1 if only one house Break at 11 for lunch Round 3 9am Round 1 10am Round 2 11am Session 2 if 2+ houses Round 4 11:30am Session 2 if only one house Round 3 12:30 pm Lunch Lunch 1:30pm Round 4 Elim 1 2pm Finals Session if 2+ houses 2:45 Elim 1 4pm Elim 2 Elim 2 if needed 5pm Elim 3 as needed 6pm Elim 3 if needed 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 217 SPEECH/DEBATE A. Awards: 4:30pm Awards Can be held while elim rounds are going, or pause last elims for awards and then resume, if desired and then give out awards in elim rounds. B. Elim rounds 2-3 can be done virtually the following week at discretion of Tournament director and agreement of all teams/schools involved. The Tournament director will secure judges and arrange the virtual room and adjust tournament end dates and times in schedule accordingly 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 218 THEATRE UHSAA Theatre Competition Policies & Guidelines PREPARING YOUR COMPETITION TEAM 1. Administrative Requirements & Entry Forms • All Individual Events and One-Act Plays must receive school principal approval before competition. • Schools must submit the official UHSAA Theatre Entry Form to the Region Representative before Region and State competitions. The entry form includes: principal approval, student entries, content warnings, publication dates of performance materials, One-Act licensing information, administrative verification • Failure to submit required documentation may result in UHSAA penalties. 2. Definition of “Published” A play or musical is considered published when it is publicly available for purchase or distribution.. 3. Student Eligibility Requirements & Participation Rules • All participants must meet current UHSAA academic and eligibility requirements. • Students must compete at Region in an event to qualify for State in that event. • Only current high school students may participate in live performance roles. o Entries involving: post-high school participants, younger children, non-high school performers in acting, singing, or live musical accompaniment will be disqualified. 4. Student Participation Limits • 4A, 5A & 6A Schools - Students may participate in: One Individual Acting Event, One-Act Play, one Individual Design Event • 1A, 2A & 3A Schools - Students may participate in: One Musical Theatre or Pantomime event (not both),as well as One additional acting event, One-Act Play, one Individual Design Event 5. Preparing an Individual Events Team • Entry Limits - Each school may enter up to four entries in each category: o Acting Events: h Classical Scenes h Contemporary Scenes h Musical Theatre Scenes h Pantomime h Humorous Monologues h Dramatic Monologues o Design Events : h Costume Design h Scenic Design h Lighting Design o See the Individual Event Criteria section for specific requirements. Design Guidelines are listed in a separate document. • Replacement Performers o Replacement performers are not permitted. o If a member of an Individual Event entry becomes unavailable or ineligible before State, that entry is disqualified. 6. Preparing a One-Act Play • Entry Requirements o Each school may enter one One-Act Play. o Entries may be: h A published one-act play 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 219 h An excerpt from a full-length play or musical h An original work • State Meet Actor Replacement o A school may replace one actor in a State-qualifying One-Act Play if the replacement: h Meets State academic eligibility requirements. h Was listed on the original eligibility roster before Region competition. h Is reported to meet director or region rep at least 24 hours before the State performance. 7. Reusing Performance Material • Individual students (not whole schools) may not reuse material they previously performed in a UHSAA competition, including: Monologues, Scenes, Pantomimes, Musical Theatre selections, One-Act Plays • Once a student performs any portion of a published work in a UHSAA competition, that student may not use any portion of that work again during their high school career. 8. Content Warnings - Head coaches/directors are responsible for identifying material that may require audience discretion. • Categories include: Sexual content, Suicide, Mental illness, Terminal illness, Abuse, Strong language, Graphic violence, Racism, Mature Themes • Required Procedures - Content warnings must: h Be listed on the UHSAA Theatre Entry Form. h Be communicated to students so they may inform judges before performances. h Judges should request content warnings during roll call each round. h For One-Act performances, the Meet Director will announce applicable warnings before the performance. h A school’s repeated failure to announce content warnings will result in a $50 fine by UHSAA. Complaints can be directed to Meet Directors or Region Representatives to be sent to UHSAA. 9. Region Policies and Guidelines • Each Region must: o Maintain current printed competition rules consistent with UHSAA policies. o Submit Region results to UHSAA and the State Representative by: h The published calendar deadline, or within five days of Region competition 10. Preparing for the State Meet - Schools must qualify through Region competition according to UHSAA rules. Additional State requirements: • Contestants missing required rounds or sessions are ineligible for final scores or rankings. • No State entry fee is charged. • Entry submission constitutes a contractual commitment to compete. • Each classification establishes a published Drop Deadline. • Withdrawals or failure to appear after the deadline result in a $25 no-show fine. 11. Sanctioning Invitational Competitions (Non-Region/State Events) • For invitationals involving more than four schools: o Competitions must comply with: h Article VII of the UHSAA Bylaws h Section 15 of the UHSAA Handbook Interpretations/Guidelines • Entry fees may not exceed: o $3.50 per student per day o $15.00 per school per day unless approved by the UHSAA Executive Committee • UHSAA-sanctioned invitationals may assess a $25 no-show fee for each entry that fails to compete. THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 220 COMPETITION PROCEDURES 1. Qualifying for the State Competition • Acting Individual Events - At Region Competition: o 3A, 4A, 5A, and 6A Schools- Entries earning 60 points or higher qualify for State, regardless of ranking. o 1A and 2A Schools- Entries earning 55 points or higher qualify for State, regardless of ranking. o Finals Qualification: Any entry advancing to the Finals Round automatically qualifies for State, even if the preliminary score does not meet the qualifying point requirement. • Design Individual Events - At Region Competition: o Presentations scoring 60 points or higher qualify for State. o 1A and 2A schools: Presentations scoring 55 points or higher qualify. o Entries placing 1st, 2nd, or 3rd qualify regardless of score. • One-Act Plays - At Region Competition: o The top three ranked One-Act Plays qualify for State. o A 4th-place play qualifies if it: h Scores more than 120 points, and h Finishes within five points of the 3rd-place qualifying play. h If two plays tie for 4th place and both meet these requirements, both advance. o A 5th-place play may qualify if it: h Scores more than 120 points; h Finishes within five points of the 3rd-place qualifying play; and h Does not exceed State Competition Capacity. h A qualifying 5th-place play should be announced as a possible alternate at the Region Awards Ceremony. 2. State Competition Capacity - The State Representative and One-Act Host School determine the maximum number of One-Act entries that can be accommodated. • Guidelines: o Maximum field size: 16 plays o Ideal field size: 14 plays or fewer • Once capacity is established, UHSAA will notify alternate schools if additional spaces become available. 3. Time Violations - Time limits and procedures are listed on official ballots, violations are noted by judges, and enforced by the Meet Director. • Individual Event Preliminary Round Time Violations: o Any entry with one time violation: h Is scored normally. h Must have the violation recorded on the ballot. h Is logged in the scoring spreadsheet. o Any entry with two or three time violations: h Is scored normally. h Must have the violation recorded on the ballot. h Is logged in the scoring spreadsheet. h Results in 7 points deducted from the school’s sweepstakes score (per violation) h Results in the entry being disqualified THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 221 h Cannot advance to State at the Region level. • Individual Event Finals Round Time Violations o Any entry with a time violation: h May not receive 1st, 2nd, or 3rd Place. h Is scored normally. h Must have the violation recorded on the ballot. • One-Act Play Time Violations o A One-Act Play that exceeds or falls short of the required time limit by more than 30 seconds: h Receives a 35-point deduction from Sweepstakes. h Becomes ineligible for Top 3 placement. h At Region, becomes ineligible to advance to State. • Design Competition Time Violations o There are no time violations in a Design Competition round. Instead: h A timer should be assigned to each Design Competition Event h During Verbal Presentations, timers will indicate or display time remaining h Timers will cut off presentations at the three minute mark, and question/answers at the 5 minute mark. 4. Rule Violations - Specific rules are listed on official ballots, violations are noted by judges/coaches/outside entities, and enforced by the Meet Director. • Individual Event Preliminary Round Rule Violations o Concrete Rule Violations - Violations with documentation or concrete evidence h Report immediately to the Meet Director. h Meet Directors should gather all potential information before making a decision. h Coaches can dispute potential disqualifications h Disqualifications can happen immediately. h Subjective Rule Violations - Violations observed by judges/coaches/outside entities h Typically (but not exclusively) reported on ballots by judges h Meet Directors should note any violations h Coaches can dispute potential disqualifications with video evidence of specific rounds. h If a second violation is reported, Meet Directors can disqualify a piece. • Individual Event Finals Rule Violations o Concrete Rule Violations: o Subjective Rule Violations: • One-Act Play Rule Violations o Concrete Rule Violations: o Subjective Rule Violations: • Design Competition Rule Violations o Concrete Rule Violations: o Subjective Rule Violations THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 222 JUDGING GUIDELINES (ALL EVENTS) 1. Judge Eligibility - Judges must meet the following requirements: • Judges may not: o Have previously coached or worked with any participant. o Be related to any participant, coach, student teacher, or teacher involved in the competition. o Have attended high school with any participant. • Judges must: o Have graduated from high school at least three years before judging. 2. Rural or Remote Eligibility Exceptions - When qualified judges are unavailable, the Region Representative may approve judges who graduated more recently, provided they did not attend a participating school. 3. Rural or Remote Eligibility Exceptions - When qualified judges are unavailable, the Region Representative may approve judges who graduated more recently, provided they did not attend a participating school. 4. Judges’ Meeting - Before each competition, the State Representative conducts a judges’ meeting using the official UHSAA agenda. • The meeting reviews: o Competition rules o Procedures o Scoring expectations o Any event-specific instructions 5. Judge Compensation • $100 per half day • $200 per full day 6. Judge Safety Requirements • Judges must never be alone with a competitor. • At least one additional person must always be present, including: Competitor, Performer, Judge, Time keeper, Parent, Observer 7. Judges’ Dependents - Judges must give their full attention to entries. • No small children of paid workers in competition spaces. • Only trained service animals are allowed in competition spaces. • Other paid event workers must follow the same rule in their work areas ACTING INDIVIDUAL EVENT COMPETITION 1. Individual Event Competition General Rules • Each Individual Event: o Is judged by three judges. o Includes three preliminary rounds. o Rounds should include approximately six entries. o A round may not contain fewer than four entries unless insufficient entries exist. o If there are too few entries, all performances may be placed into one round watched by three judges simultaneously. 2. Introductions • Introductions are not included in the time limit and should only state: o Participant number o Title of piece THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 223 o Author o Character • Pantomime Introductions are not included in the time limit and must include only: o Entrant number o Title of the piece 3. Prohibited Items - To ensure the cleanliness of our host schools, the following items are prohibited in all Individual Event rounds. • Fake liquid blood or any other dyed liquid that could stain or damage surfaces. • Debris-like substances such as glitter, confetti, or dirt that cannot be easily collected. 4. Furniture Use - All furniture for Acting Individual Event pieces must be provided by participants. • Borrowing furniture from host school classrooms is prohibited. • Participants may interact with the space/items around them. 5. Filming Performers - In an Individual Event round, spectators may only film or otherwise record performances with explicit consent from the performers. 6. Audience Interactions - Performers should not pull additional audience members up onto the stage even in a capacity where the audience member doesn’t speak as that increases the number of performers in a piece. 7. Individual Events Criteria Classical Scenes from Plays Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 12 students) Performance Requirements • 2–3 participants per scene • 3–6 minutes long (if any narration is used, it must be included in the time limit) • Scenes from published scripts written for the stage • Published prior to the year 1900 • Costumes and hand props may be used, but are not required. • All Classical Scenes must provide a source submission (play title, author, and publishing company) to the Meet Director (Region or State Representative) before competing. This is to ensure that all scenes are from published plays. Allowed • Published plays • Original published texts • Direct translations of original texts • Costumes and hand props Not Allowed • Vaudeville skits, television or film scenes about the time period, but not written in the time period • Adaptations of original texts • Plays written after 1900, even if the author was writing before 1900 as well • Large scenic elements Contemporary Scenes from Plays Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 12 students) Performance Requirements • 2–3 participants per scene • 3–6 minutes long (if any narration is used, it must be included in the time limit) • Scenes from published scripts written for the stage THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 224 • Published after the year 1900 • Costumes and props may be used, but are not required. • All Contemporary Scenes must provide a source submission (play title, author, and publishing company) to the Meet Director (Region or State Representative) before competing. This is to ensure that all scenes are from published plays. Allowed • Published stage plays • Costumes and hand props Not Allowed • Vaudeville skits, television or film scenes • Original student-written scenes or scenes from unpublished original work • Large scenic elements Musical Theatre Scenes Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 16 students) Performance Requirements • 1–4 participants per scene • 2–6 minutes long (if any narration is used, it must be included in the time limit) • Scenes from published scripts written for the stage • Scene must include sung vocal music • Costumes and props may be used, but are not required. Allowed • Published scenes written for the stage • Pre-recorded music or live music (performers must provide their own accompanist or means to play the music) • Host schools are no longer required to provide pianos for Musical Theatre rounds. • Each entry may have one person to run equipment for recorded accompaniment. • Scene dialogue at the beginning or end of the song • Costumes and hand props Not Allowed • Works from film, poetry, fiction, or standard popular song lyrics • Backup tracks with backup vocals included • A cappella scenes • Large scenic elements Humorous Monologues Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 4 students) Performance Requirements • 1 participant per monologue • 2–6 minutes long (if any narration is used, it must be included in the time limit) • Monologues are one person taking the part or role of one character. The character speaks only one part, but can act or react as though other characters are present. All elements come through one character. • A humorous monologue should be humorous. • Costumes and hand props may be used, but are not required. THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 225 Allowed • Published stage plays • Original student-written monologues • Unpublished monologues • Costumes and hand props Not Allowed • Large scenic elements • Stand-up comedy routines Dramatic Monologues Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 4 students) Performance Requirements • 1 participant per monologue • 2–6 minutes long (if any narration is used, it must be included in the time limit) • Monologues are when one person takes the role of a single character. The character speaks only one part, but can act or react as though other characters are present. All elements come through one character. • A dramatic monologue should be dramatic. • A monologue can be from a published or an original work • Costumes and hand props may be used, but are not required. Allowed • Published stage plays • Original student-written monologues • Unpublished monologues • Costumes and hand props Not Allowed • Large scenic elements Pantomime Maximum Entries: 4 (up to 12 students) Performance Requirements • 1–3 participants per scene • 2–6 minutes long • Each scene must develop a complete sequence or story. Introductions: Introductions are not included in the time limit and must include only: • Entrant number • Title of the piece Allowed • All black clothing must be worn. • Pre-recorded instrumental music only. Sound effects are allowed as part of the instrumental music recording. (Performers must provide their own means to play recorded music.) • Each entry may have one person to run the music. • One acting block, stool, or chair per participant. • Students are allowed to touch each other in pantomime. Not Allowed • Costumes or mime makeup THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 226 • Lyrics in music • Live musicians • Scenic elements • Mouthing of words (except “oooh” or “aaah” as they accompany facial expressions) • Verbal narrative or explanation in the introduction 8. Individual Event Preliminary Round Scoring and Ranking • Judges assign whole-number scores: o Minimum score: 0 o Maximum score: 25 • After each round, judges rank entries according to numerical scores. • Ranking order must match scores: o Highest score = 1st Place o Second-highest score = 2nd Place o Continue in order. Any entry ranked below fourth receives a ranking of 4. • Tied scores may receive different rankings at the judge’s discretion. • Rankings: h Do not affect Sweepstakes points. h Do not determine State qualification. h If rankings do not match assigned scores, the Meet Director returns the ballot to the judge for correction or score adjustment. 9. Individual Event Finals Round • Advancing to Finals o The top 5–8 entries advance to Finals and are determined by: o Lowest combined ranking from the three preliminary rounds. o Highest cumulative numerical score as the tiebreaker. o The Meet Director determines the number of finalists before each Finals Round begins. o At State, Meet Directors are encouraged to bring the maximum number of pieces possible to each Finals Round. • Finals Procedures o All finalists perform for the same three judges at once. o Judges rank and score entries following the same rules and preliminary rounds, except: h Judges rank entries from 1–6. h Any entry ranked below sixth receives a ranking of 6. o Judges score individually and may not consult one another. • Final Placement Determination o Final placements are determined by combining all three Finals judges’ rankings. o Placement: h Lowest combined ranking = 1st Place h Second-lowest combined ranking = 2nd Place h Third-lowest combined ranking = 3rd Place • Finals Tiebreakers - If a tie occurs (in procedural order): o Highest cumulative Finals numerical scores o Highest cumulative preliminary numerical scores o Lowest cumulative preliminary rankings o If a tie remains after all tiebreakers, the tie stands. THEATRE 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 227 THEATRE ONE ACT PLAY COMPETITION 1. One Act Play Competition General Rules • Each One-Act Play: o Performs once. o Is judged by the same panel of three judges. o Judges should be selected by three different schools. o A judge should not judge One Acts at the same competition in consecutive years. 2. One-Act Performance Performance Time Limits • Each One-Act Play receives a total of 60 minutes, including: Setup, Performance, Strike, Critique o The 60-minute limit includes all technical preparation: h Lighting h Sound h Projections h Equipment checks • Timing begins when cast and crew enter the stage and ends when they fully exit to the holding area. • Plays must be at least 25 minutes (excluding setup and strike) • Pieces outside the 25 - 60 minute time range h Are not eligible for awards (placement or special judge’s awards) h Cannot advance to State h Receive a time penalty (but remaining points still count towards a team’s Sweepstakes score) 3. One-Act Technical Observation/Assistance • Adults may assist with technical elements, including: Lighting, Sound, Projections, Loading scenery before or after performances • Before each performance, 2–3 technicians may silently observe the previous school’s technical operation. • Technicians may ask questions of the host school staff at appropriate intervals between performances. • This observation time does not count toward the 60-minute limit 4. One-Act Critique • A scheduled 10-minute critique is included in the time block. • If a production does not leave enough time for critique, the critique may be forfeited at the discretion of the Meet Director. 5. One-Act Scoring & Rankings • Judge’s Scoring: o Evaluate each play independently. o May not consult one another. o Assign whole-number scores from 1–50 points. • Judge’s Ranking: o After all performances, judges rank plays according to numerical scores. o Ranking order must match scores: h Highest score = 1st Place h Second-highest score = 2nd Place o Continue in order o Each judge ranks plays from 1–6. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 228 THEATRE o Tied scores may receive different rankings at the judge’s discretion. o Any play ranked below sixth receives a ranking of 6. o Do not affect Sweepstakes points. o If scores and rankings do not match, the Meet Director returns the ballot for correction. • Placement: o Lowest combined ranking = 1st Place o Second-lowest combined ranking = 2nd Place o Third-lowest combined ranking = 3rd Place • Tie Breaker: The Meet Director will use the highest cumulative numerical scores as the tiebreaker. If a tie still remains, the tie will stand. 6. Special Performance Order Requests Requests for special consideration regarding One-Act performance order must: • Be submitted by the school’s head coach. • Be submitted to the Classification Representative. • Be received no later than one week before the State Meet. DESIGN INDIVIDUAL EVENT COMPETITION 1. Design Competition Overview • Design Individual Events require students to analyze a published play or musical and create an original design based on that work. • Students are responsible for: • Following all event-specific requirements. • Including all required components. • Presenting original design work. • For specific event criteria and required components, refer to the Design Event Guidelines. 2. Design Competition General Rules • Unless otherwise noted, Individual Event rules regarding eligibility, judging, placement, state qualification also apply to Design Individual Events. • Any disputes will be resolved by the Meet Director, or Region Representative, if necessary. • Entry Limits- Each school may enter up to four entries in each Design category at the Region Competition. • Design entries must be submitted on the same UHSAA Region/State Entry Form used for Individual Events. • Entries may be from theoretical designs or fully realized designs-if entirely designed by the one student participant. No pictures of fully realized designs are permitted. 3. Design Individual Events Format • Do not contribute points toward Acting Sweepstakes. • May be entered by students who also compete in acting events, provided schedules do not conflict. • Is judged in a single round. • Does not include a Finals Round. • Entries are not divided by room or time slot for ranking purposes, although presentation schedules may vary. • Each design category is ranked and judged separately. 4. Design Competition Requirements • Each entry must complete the Design Competition Coach Verification Form noting all required elements. o An entry will be disqualified for: 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 229 THEATRE h No submitted Verification Form h Verification Form certifies elements that are missing from display area h Provable Plagiarism 5. Design Competition Plagiarism Policy - The purpose of the competition is for students to develop original designs based on: Script analysis, Research, Creative interpretation. • Students may use previous productions as inspiration only when sources are properly cited. o However: h Copying another designer’s work is plagiarism. h Direct replication of existing designs is prohibited, even with citation. • Students must demonstrate their own original design process and artistic choices. 6. Design Judges • The State Competition requires three qualified Theatrical Design judges per category. • When recommending judges, schools should ensure that at least three nominees are qualified to evaluate Technical Design. • At Region Competitions, the Region Representative may determine the Design competition format based on regional needs. 7. Design Competition Judging Procedures • Three judges evaluate each Design presentation. o Judges: h Score entries independently. h Rank entries from 1–6. h Any entry ranked below sixth receives a ranking of 6. 8. Design Competition Ranking • Final placement is determined by combined judge rankings. • Placement: o Lowest cumulative ranking = 1st Place o Second-lowest cumulative ranking = 2nd Place o Third-lowest cumulative ranking = 3rd Place • Tiebreaker - If a tie occurs: The Meet Director will use the highest cumulative numerical scores as the tiebreaker. If a tie still remains, the tie will stand. AWARDS & SWEEPSTAKES 1. Individual Event Awards - Region Competition • All Individual Event entries that qualify for State receive a Superior Medal • All students advancing to the Finals Round receive a Superior Medal and qualify for state regardless of their preliminary-round score. • Entries placing: 1st Place, 2nd Place, 3rd Place receive a placement medal instead of a Superior Medal. • Each qualifying entry therefore only receives one medal per participant. • Additional certificates, medals, and trophies may be awarded according to individual Region policies. 2. Individual Event Awards - State Competition • Entries receiving a score of 72 or higher receive a Superior Medal • At 1A competitions, entries receiving a score of 70 points or higher receive a Superior Medal. • Entries placing: 1st Place, 2nd Place, 3rd Place receive a placement medal instead of a Superior Medal. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 230 THEATRE • All students advancing to the Finals Round receive a Superior Medal regardless of their preliminary- round score. • Each qualifying entry therefore only receives one medal per participant 3. Design Competition Awards - Region Competitions • All Individual Event entries that qualify for State receive a Superior Medal • Entries placing:1st, 2nd or 3rd receive placement medals instead of Superior Medals. • All students receiving 1st, 2nd, or 3rd qualify for State regardless of their preliminary-round score. 4. Design Competition Awards - State Competitions • Entries receiving a score of 72 points or higher receive a Superior Medal. • At 1A competitions, entries receiving a score of 70 points or higher receive a Superior Medal. • Entries placing:1st, 2nd or 3rd receive placement medals instead of Superior Medals. • Each qualifying entry therefore only receives one medal. 5. One-Act Play Awards - Region Competition and State Competitions • Placement Awards • The top three ranked One-Act Plays receive: h 1st Place Plaque h 2nd Place Plaque h 3rd Place Plaque • Outstanding Performance Awards: Judges may select up to six Outstanding Performance Awards recognizing exceptional achievement by performers, groups, student designers, student directors. Awards may include: h Outstanding Lead Actor/Actress h Outstanding Supporting Actor/Actress h Outstanding Cameo Performance h Outstanding Ensemble h Outstanding Student Design (costumes, sound, props, etc.) h Outstanding Student Director h Outstanding Character Actor/Actress h Outstanding Student Playwright 6. Acting Sweepstakes Awards - Region Competitions • 1st Place Plaque • 2nd Place Plaque 7. Acting Sweepstakes Awards - State Competitions • 1st Place Sweepstakes State Championship Trophy • 2nd Place Sweepstakes State Championship Trophy 8. Acting Sweepstakes Point Calculation - Any applicable Individual Event or One-Act Play time penalties must be deducted before calculating final Sweepstakes scores. • Individual Events h Each entry earns up to 25 points per round. h Each entry is judged in three rounds. h Maximum contribution: 75 points per entry. h If a school qualifies four entries in an Individual Event category, only the top three scores count. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 231 • One-Act Plays o Each play earns up to 50 points per judge. o With three judges, the maximum contribution is 150 points per play. • School’s Sweepstakes score includes: o One-Act Play score o Three highest-scoring Individual Event entries across all categories o Maximum State Sweepstakes Score: 1,500 points • Region Competition Variance: o All four Individual Event entries in each category count toward Sweepstakes. o Maximum Region Sweepstakes Score: 1,950 points 9. Sweepstakes Tiebreakers (Acting and Design) • If schools have tied Sweepstakes scores: o All fourth qualifying entries are added back into the team score. Highest total score wins. o If the tie remains, the school with the lowest average ranking score wins. h Average Ranking Score = Total ranking scores ÷ Total number of entries 10. Design Sweepstakes • Score includes: o Three highest-scoring Individual Event entries across all Design categories h Each entry earns up to 25 points per round. h Each entry is judged by three judges. h Maximum contribution: 75 points per entry. h If a school qualifies four entries in an Individual Event category, only the top three scores count. • Maximum State Sweepstakes Score: 675 points • The top three ranked schools in Design receive Design Sweepstakes: o 1st Place Plaque o 2nd Place Plaque o 3rd Place Plaque STATE MEET ADMINISTRATION 1. Competition Integrity - All participants, coaches, judges, and schools are responsible for following: • UHSAA Theatre Competition rules • Published event guidelines • Official scoring procedures • Eligibility requirements 2. Safety Requirements • If student safety concerns arise during a performance, the participating school must provide documentation of approval from State Risk Management. 3. State Meet Administration - The State Representative and State Rep Assistants will: • Secure a Meet Director. • Secure State Meet judges. • Secure a Design Competition Facilitator • Determine the drop deadline. Total fine amounts for all late drops/changes. • Panel IE entries into rounds/rooms and assign judges to rounds. • Create the scoring spreadsheet with entrant information. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 232 THEATRE • Provide food options/information to event staff/coaches/participants. • Determine One-Act performance order. o Requests for special consideration regarding performance order must: h Come from the school’s head coach. h Be submitted to the Classification Representative. h Be received no later than 10 days before State. o If the One-Act Competition is multiple days, schools requiring overnight hotel accommodations should be prioritized to compete on their preferred day. 4. Meet Director Responsibilities - The Meet Director and Tabulation room workers will: • Manage/Attend One Act Play Competition. Complete the following responsibilities: o Judge’s Training o Official timing of plays (may be delegated) o Announcement of play title/content warnings (may be delegated) o Determining if judges are allowed feedback time with performers. o Settling all rule disputes • Manage/Attend Individual Event Competition. Complete the following responsibilities: o Judge’s Training o Tabulation of all One Act and IE scores o Settling all rule disputes o Award Ceremony Facilitation and Announcements • Region Considerations: At Region Events, coaches can assist with o One Act and IE Score Tabulation (provided no coach is alone with ballots) o Determining if judges are allowed feedback time with performers in One Acts o Award Ceremony Facilitation and Announcements 5. Tabulation Room Requirements - The State Meet Tabulation Room must include: • Meet Director • Assigned and paid Tabulation Room workers • Coaches are not permitted in the Tabulation Room. 6. Judge Requirements Provided by Schools • Schools may be requested to provide some State Meet judges. • Schools that fail to provide the required number of State Meet judges will be fined. • Regions are encouraged to follow the same expectation. 7. Results Announcements • Results may not be announced until all portions of the competition are complete and scores are tabulated. • Sweepstakes awards must be calculated after all results are finalized. • While coaches may have access to scoring information prior to results announcements, coaches should NOT disburse scoring information to non-coach/event staff. Disbursing scoring information to non-coach/event staff may result in disciplinary action from UHSAA. 8. Disputes/Corrections • Questions or disputes should be directed to: o Meet Director o Region Representative or Classification Representative • Clerical errors may be corrected for up to 72 hours after the conclusion of competition. o To request a correction: A school must submit a written protest to UHSAA within the 72-hour period. o After 72 hours: Results become official. 9. Rule Changes- Proposed rule changes must be submitted in writing at the annual UACTT July Conference. Approved changes may take up to three years to take effect.

Section 1: Definitions of roles A. Ombudsmen: At the State Tournament, the Ombudsperson Office is the go-to space for answers related to the tournament rules and procedure.They also serve as the intake for any formal rules protests.. This Individual will also provide a safer place for attendees to report violations of the harassment/discrimination policy at our tournament. B. UHSAA Representative is the Tournament Director. The Tournament Director has been selected to represent the UHSAA and make decisions on their behalf. (This is per the UHSAA Section 2: In Round Protest Procedures Protests should be regarding a violation of rules/Honor code. Rules infractions at the UHSAA State Speech and Debate Touranments will result in consequences based on the circumstance and magnitude of the infraction. The following options are listed progressively according to their level of severity. Each may be utilized independently. A. Level 1: Issue a warning with the instruction to correct the infraction for the next round. If not corrected, the competitor will be penalized accordingly. (misunderstanding of rules, innocent mistake, etc). 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 164 SPEECH/DEBATE B. Level 2: Cannot receive a rank of 1 from any judge in the round. All competitors’ scores will be re- adjusted accordingly (e.g., over the grace period, use of script, etc.). C. Level 3: Drop 2 ranks from all judges in the round (e.g., 1 to 3, 2 to 4, etc.). All competitors’ scores will be re-adjusted accordingly. (has not fixed the issue post warning, used prop when not allowed, clear violation of event specified rules, etc) D. Level 4: Change ranks to last or a loss from all judges in round. All competitors’ scores will be re- adjusted accordingly. (e.g., a student competes in the wrong contest section or against the wrong opponent at no fault of their opponent or tournament officials, etc.). E. Level 5: Disqualify the entry. All competitors’ scores will be re-adjusted accordingly. For example but not limited to: a. plagiarism, b. exceeding transitional material guidelines, c. using non-existent evidence in extemporaneous/debate events, d. misrepresenting the content of the script submitted with what is actually presented in the round, e. using internet to communicate with outside sources during extemporaneous preparation, f. Communication in person with anyone in or outside of the extemp prep room, other than Extemp Prep Facilitator, including anywhere between prep and competition room. g. Communicating via cell phone or electronic device with anyone outside/inside of round other than partner, or sharing evidence between opponents, partner and/or judge. h. Any other clear/flagrant violation of rules, repeated violations after warnings and other levels, etc as determined by the committee. D. If an entry is disqualified, one or more of the following may happen: 1. If in a final round, any placings or points earned by that student will be vacated. All competitors ranked lower than the disqualified competitor will be moved up one placement in that round. If multiple violations in the same event have occurred, competitors will be advanced accordingly. If the violation is discovered during the semifinal round, the offending competitor will be ranked last in the semifinal round. If the student still qualifies for the final round with that ranking, their place in the final round will be vacated, and the next place competitor will be placed in the final round. If re-ranking is necessary, it is only applicable to the round in which the violation occurred, not previous rounds in the tournament. 2. If the violation occurs in a final round and the violation would result in a new champion, the championship will be vacated. 3. If violation includes other students competing at the tournament, they may be referred for rule violation review as well. 4. If a violation includes a coach facilitating/participating in the violation, that coach will be referred for sanction by the UDCA and UHSAA. 5. Referrals for Honor Code Violations may be made the NSDA if a member. Artificial Intelligence: 1. In events in which speeches must be the original created work of a competitor (OO, INF, IX, USX, SW, EXC, IMP, EXP) students are prohibited from quoting or paraphrasing text directly from generative AI sources. Generative AI should not be cited as a source. The exception is that a student delivering a speech about the topic of AI may quote AI to illustrate their points about AI, in accordance with existing quoted word limits. While generative AI may be used to guide tudents to articles, ideas, and sources, the original source of any quoted or paraphrased evidence must be available if requested. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 165 SPEECH/DEBATE In debate events, generative AI should not be cited as a source; while generative AI may be used to guide students to articles, ideas, and sources, the original source of any quoted or paraphrased evidence must be available if requested. In Interpretation events, students are prohibited from performing material created by generative AI sources. Generative AI should not be used as a source of material; while generative AI may be used to guide students to articles, ideas, and material, the original source of any material that is performed must be available if requested. Debate Specific Electornics/Evidence Rules: These rules apply to Policy Debate, Public Forum Debate, Lincoln-Douglas Debate, and Congressional Debate. These rules are used at the State Tournaments. Contestants may use electronic devices (including laptop computers, tablets, and/or cell phones) to access the internet during debate rounds with the following conditions: 1. Computers or other electronic devices may not be used to receive information for competitive advantage from non-competitors (coaches, assistant coaches, other non-competing students) inside or outside of the room in which the competition occurs. Information that would be restricted would include but not be limited to coach/non-participating competitor generated arguments, advice on arguments to run, questions to ask during cross examination, and other information not generated by the participating competitors in your round. 2. Internet access may be used to retrieve files, exchange evidence and/or arguments, research arguments, and partner to partner communication, and communication between other participants in the round. These electronic device guidelines do not limit communication between debate partners during the debate round. A. Penalty: Contestants found to have violated these provisions will be disqualified from the tournament and will forfeit all rounds and merit points in that event. B. Availability of Evidence: Contestants electing to use computers have the responsibility to promptly provide a copy of any evidence read in a speech for inspection by the judge or opponent. Printers may be used. Evidence may be printed in the round or produced electronically but must be provided in a format readable by the opposing team and the judge. C. Contestants electing to use computers are responsible for providing their own computers, batteries, extension cords, and all other necessary accessories. Tournament hosts will not be responsible for providing computers, printers, software, paper, or extension cords for contestants. Host schools may provide wireless internet access, but will not guarantee that contestants will be able to gain access when needed. D. Contestants choosing to use laptop computers and/or related devices accept the risk of equipment failure. Judges and/or contest directors will give no special consideration or accommodation, including no additional speech time or prep time, should equipment failure occur. E. By choosing to use electronic devices in the round, debaters and other relevant parties are consenting to give tournament officials the right to search their devices in the event of a protest. The device may only be searched by tournament officials and must be restricted to files and/or electronic exchanges relevant to the protest. Failure to comply would result in the upholding of the protest. Debaters and coaches should be present as their device is searched. Debaters who do not wish to consent should not use electronic devices in the round. Evidence is one of the important components of arguments in debate rounds. All debaters involved are expected to act in an ethical manner that is in accordance with the rules. In keeping with the UDCA And National Speech & Debate Association Code of Honor, all participants are expected to use and interpret evidence, evidence rules, and procedures in good faith. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 166 SPEECH/DEBATE 7.1. Responsibilities of Contestants Reading Evidence A. Evidence defined. Debaters are responsible for the validity of all evidence they introduce in the debate. Evidence includes, but is not limited to: facts, statistics, or examples attributable to a specific, identifiable, authoritative source used to support a claim. Unattributed ideas are the opinion of the student competitor and are not evidence. B. Oral source citation. In all debate events, contestants are expected to, at a minimum, orally deliver the following when introducing evidence in a debate round: primary author(s)’name (last) and year of publication. Any other information such as source, author’s qualifications, etc., may be given, but is not required. Should two or more quotations be used from the same source, the author and year must be given orally only for the first piece of evidence from that source. Subsequently, only the author’s name is required. Oral citations do not substitute for the written source citation. The full written citation must be provided if requested by an opponent or judge. C. Written source citation. To the extent provided by the original source, a written source citation must include: 1. Full name of primary author and/or editor 2. Publication date 3. Source 4. Title of article 5. Date accessed for digital evidence 6. Full URL, if applicable 7. Author qualifications 8. Page number(s) D. Paraphrasing, authoritative source versus general understanding. If paraphrasing is used in a debate, the debater will be held to the same standard of citation and accuracy as if the entire text of the evidence were read. Paraphrasing may be used to shorten or clarify one specific portion of an original source. It should not be confused with a general summary of an entire book, chapter, study, etc., which may only be used for information that is widely considered to be common knowledge Paraphrasing focuses on a single idea, while summary focuses on a general concept. For example, if a debater references specific theory by a specific author, the debater must also be able to provide an original source as well as the specific text from the original source which is being paraphrased. If a debater were to reference social contract theory in general, that would not be an authoritative source that would require citation. However, if the debater references “John Locke’s Social Contract,” evidence would need to be available. E. Ellipses prohibited. In all debate events, the use of internal ellipsis (...) is prohibited unless it is a replication of the original document. Debaters may omit the reading of certain words; however, the text that is verbally omitted must be present in the text of what was read for opposing debaters and/or judges to examine. The portions of the evidence read including where the debater begins and ends must be clearly marked (as outlined in 7.1.G.2.). F. Availability of evidence. 1. In all debate events, for reference, any material (evidence, cases, written citations, etc.) that is presented during the round must be made available to the opponent and/or judge during the round if requested. When requested, the original source or copy of the relevant (as outlined in 7.1.F.2.) pages of evidence read in the round must be available to the opponent in a timely fashion during the round and/or judge at the conclusion of the round. 2. Original source(s) defined. Understanding that teams/individuals obtain their evidence in multiple ways, the original source for evidence may include, but is not limited solely to, one of the following: 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 167 SPEECH/DEBATE a. Accessing the live or displaying a copy of a web page (teams/individuals may access the internet to provide this information if requested). b. A copy of the page(s) the evidence is on, the page preceding, and the page following, or the actual printed (book, periodical, pamphlet, etc.) source. c. Copies or electronic versions of published handbooks (i.e., Baylor Briefs; Planet Debate, etc.). d. Electronic or printed versions or the web page for a debate institute or the NDCA sponsored Open Evidence Project or similar sites. G. Distinguishing between which parts of each piece of evidence are and are not read in a particular round. In all debate events, debaters must mark their evidence in two ways: 1. Oral delivery of each piece of evidence must be identified by a clear oral pause or by saying phrases such as “quote/unquote” or “mark the card.” The use of a phrase is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. Clear, oral pauses are left solely to the discretion of the judge. 2. The written text must be marked to clearly indicate the portions read or paraphrased in the debate. See 7.2.B.3 for the penalty for failing to clearly indicate paraphrased text. In the written text the standard practices of underlining what is read, or highlighting what is read, and/or minimizing what is unread, is definitive and may be preferable to debaters. The clarity of other means of marking evidence is left to the discretion of the judge. H. Private communication prohibited. Private, personal correspondence or communication between an author and the debater is inadmissible as evidence. 7.2. Definitions of Evidence Violations A. “Distortion” exists when the textual evidence itself contains added and/or deleted word(s), which significantly alters the conclusion of the author (e.g., deleting ‘not’; adding the word ‘not’ Additionally, failure to bracket added words would be considered distortion of evidence. B. “Non-existent evidence” means one or more of the following: 1. The debater citing the evidence is unable to provide the original source or copy of the relevant pages when requested by their opponent, judge, or tournament official. 2. The original source provided does not contain the evidence cited. 3. The evidence is paraphrased but lacks an original source to verify the accuracy of the paraphrasing. If a student paraphrases from a book, study, or any other source, the specific lines or section from which the paraphrase is taken must be highlighted or otherwise formatted for identification in the round. 4. The debater is in possession of the original source, but declines to provide it to their opponent upon request in a timely fashion (as outlined in 7.4.C.). C. “Clipping” occurs when the debater claims to have read the complete text of highlighted and/or underlined evidence when, in fact, the contestant skips or omits portions of evidence. D. “Straw argument” A “straw argument” is a position or argumentative claim introduced by an author for the purpose of refuting, discrediting or characterizing it. Reliance on a straw argument occurs in a debate round when a debater asserts incorrectly that the author supports or endorses the straw argument as their own position. Note: A debater who acknowledges using a “straw argument” when verbally first read in the round, would not be misrepresenting evidence. However, if the debater fails to acknowledge the use of a “straw argument” and their opponent questions the use of such an argument, then that debater has committed an evidence violation. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 168 SPEECH/DEBATE 7.3. Procedures for Resolving Evidence Violations A. Judges are responsible for resolving disputes between debaters regarding oral citations (7.1.B.); written source citations (7.1.C.); distinguishing between what parts of each piece of evidence are and are not read in a particular round (7.1.G.). When the judge(s) have such a dispute in the round, they must make a written note on the ballot or inform the tabulation committee of the dispute. They must do so particularly if it impacts the decision in the debate. These decisions may not be appealed. B. An appeal can only be made if the issue has been raised in the round with the exception of the issues listed in 7.3. C. Appeals may only be made if judge(s) have misapplied, misinterpreted, or ignored a rule. C. A formal allegation of violation of the evidence rules is permitted during the round only if the debater(s) allege a violation of 7.2.A. (distortion); 7.2.B. (nonexistent evidence); 7.2.C. (clipping). If a formal allegation of violation of these rules is made during a round, the following procedures must be followed: (see section 7.3.D. for procedures for making a formal allegation after the conclusion of the round): 1. The team/individual alleging a violation must make a definitive indication that they are formally alleging a violation of an evidence rule. 2. The team/individual alleging the violation of the evidence must articulate the specific violation as defined in 7.2.A.; 7.2.B. and/or 7.2.C. 3. The judge should stop the round at that time to examine the evidence from both teams/individuals and render a decision about the credibility of the evidence. a. If the judge determines that the allegation is legitimate and an evidence violation has occurred, the team/individual committing the violation will be given the loss in the round. Other sanctions may apply as well as articulated in 7.3.E. b. If the judge determines that the allegation is not legitimate and that there is no violation, the team/individual making the challenge will receive the loss in the round. Note: Teams/individuals may question the credibility and/or efficacy of the evidence without a formal allegation that requires the round to end. Teams/ debaters may make in-round arguments regarding the credibility of evidence without making a formal allegation or violation of these rules. Such informal arguments about the evidence will not automatically end the round, and will be treated by the judge in the same fashion as any other argument. D. The ombudsman and committee is authorized to hear: (1) appeals, pursuant to 7.3.B., claiming that a judge ignored, misinterpreted or misapplied rules other than those from which no appeal is permitted pursuant to 7.3.A.; (2) appeals from a judge’s decision, pursuant to 7.3.C., on a formal in-round allegation of distortion or non-existent evidence (note: judge decisions regarding clipping may not be appealed); and (3) a formal allegation of distortion or nonexistent evidence that is made for the first time after conclusion of the debate. E. The procedures for making an appeal or post-round formal allegation are as follows: 1. A coach or school-affiliated adult representative from the school(s) competing in the debate or a judge for the round must notify the tabulation committee of intent to submit an appeal or formal post-round allegation within20 minutes of the end of the debate round. The 20-minute time period begins once the last ballot from all rounds (if flighted, both flights) has been collected by the tabulation committee. 2. The coach must submit the post-round formal allegation to the tabulation committee within 10 minutes of the formal notification of the intent to appeal. The allegation must be in writing and articulate the specific evidence violation that is being challenged. The challenged contestant and coach will then be notified. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 169 SPEECH/DEBATE 3. If the tabulation committee determines that the original protest has merit, the coach or school affiliated adult and contestant(s) being challenged will be given 20 minutes to provide evidence denying, or to the contrary of the claim. If such evidence cannot be offered, the challenged debater(s) will be given the loss in the round and may be subject to additional penalties. If the tabulation committee determines that the allegation is not legitimate and thatthere is no violation, the team/individual making the challenge will receive the loss in the round. 4. The ombudsman and committee has the discretion of extending the time limits for these actions if circumstances do not allow a coach or school-affiliated adult to be available within the prescribed time limits. F. The ombudsman and committee’s decision to disqualify a student can be appealed by the coach or school affiliated adult. The following procedure should be followed: 1. The appeal must be submitted in writing to the tabulation committee within 10 minutes of the notification to disqualify. 2. The ombudsman and committee will then submit the appeal to the UHSAA). The committee will contact the UHSAA once the written appeal has been received. Both sides will be able to provide written explanations and supporting evidence to defend their individual side. 3. A decision will be rendered in a timely manner. The decision of the national office shall be final and cannot be appealed. 4. No more than one round may occur between the round being protested and the decision of the UHSAA. 5. If the appeal is successful and the contestant(s) may now continue in the tournament, they will be put into the appropriate bracket for pairing the debates. G. If appeals are made in rounds in which multiple judges are being used, normal procedures should be followed to ensure each judge reaches their decision as independently as possible. Judges will be instructed not to confer or discuss the charge and/or answer to the potential violation. It will be possible for one judge to determine that an evidence violation has occurred and the other judge(s) to determine no violation has occurred. The tabulation committee will record the panel’s decision in the same fashion as a normal win or loss; the outcome is thus tabulated in the same fashion as a round in which an evidence violation has not occurred. If the majority of the panel finds an evidence violation did not occur, no sanction may be applied to the team/individual charged with the violation. If the majority finds a violation has occurred, the appropriate penalties will be administered. 7.4. Penalties for Evidence Violations A. If the judge determines that an entry has violated one of the rules listed in 7.3.A. and 7.1.H. (oral citation, written citation, indication of parts of card read or not read, use of private communication), the judge may at their discretion disregard the evidence, diminish the credibility given to the evidence, take the violation into account (solely or partially) in deciding the winner of the debate, or take no action. B. If a debater(s) commits an evidence violation for “clipping” (7.2.C.), the use of a “straw argument” (7.2.D.), or the use of “ellipses” (7.1.E.), it will result in a loss for the debater(s) committing the evidence violation. The judge should award zero speaker points (if applicable), and indicate the reason for decision on the ballot. C. If debater(s) commits an evidence violation of “distortion” (7.2.A.) or have used “non- existent evidence” (as defined by 7.2.B.) the offending debater(s) will lose the debate and be disqualified from the tournament. However, if a debater(s) loses a round due to “non-existent evidence” (7.2.B.) violation during an in-round formal allegation, but can 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 170 SPEECH/DEBATE produce it after the round within 20 minutes to the tabulation committee, the committee may decide not to disqualify the entry. The loss that was recorded by the judge may not be changed. If a post-round protest is levied against a debater for not providing evidence or an original source in round (non-existent evidence), and the judge confirms they in fact did not provide the evidence in a timely fashion when requested in round, the debater(s) will lose the round and be disqualified from the tournament. However, if a debater(s) produces the evidence within the post-round challenge period, that debater(s) may avoid disqualification. D. Evidence infractions violate the Code of Honor. Depending on the severity, an offense may result in notification of said offense to the contestant’s high school administration and chapter advisor, loss of all District and/or National Tournament merit points, including trophy and sweepstakes points for the offending student(s), and/or revocation of Association membership. These decisions would be left to the UDCA and NSDA national office, and not the Committee. 7.5. Tournament Adjustments A. Under no circumstance will a tournament or part of a tournament be re-run because of a violation of these rules. B. In the case of a disqualification of a debater(s), all ranks and decisions of other debater(s) made prior to the start of the round being protested stand and no revision of past round ranks will take place. Penalties listed in 7.4. will be applied. C. When a round has been held between the round being protested and a final decision regarding the protest, the result of that round will be recorded as follows: 1. If the protest is upheld, and a debater is disqualified, the opponent of the disqualified debater will receive a forfeit win. 2. If the protest is overruled, and the protesting debater won the protested round, no revision of the result on the ballot will take place. 3. If the protest is overruled, the protesting debater lost the protested round, and had no previous losses, no revision of the result on the ballot will take place. 4. If the protest is overruled, the protesting debater lost the protested round, and had a previous loss, the opponent will receive a forfeit win regardless of the result on the ballot. Section 3: Non-Rule Related issues A. The Tournament director, in consultation with the region representatives, and UHSAA Representative if needed, has the authority to rule promptly and in the spirit of good sportsmanship and best interest of the activity, in any situation not specifically covered in the rules. Chapter VI: Event Rules & Rubrics Introduction: The State tournament will follow the event rules outlined by the NSDA. This manual has both the main event rules from the NSDA as well as a copy of the ballot and scoring rubric that will be used at all state tournaments.

Section 1: Number of Houses A. There shall be at least one house. B. If there are more than 25 contestants, there will be two houses of not less than 13 or larger than 25 members in each for the preliminary rounds. C. A final session will be held if there are two houses. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 158 SPEECH/DEBATE Section 2 : Legislation All legislation will be selected from the current docket by the tournament directors at the UHSAA State Planning meeting. The tournament docket will be published at least two weeks in advance of the state tournament. Section 3: Operation The operation of the State Student Congress shall be as follows: A. A session is a minimum of 2 1/2 hours. a. Congressional Sessions default size should be 11-18 and shall be capped at no more than 23 in a session. Sessions are a minimum of 2.5 hours and if larger than 18 should be held as a 3 hour session. B. Election of presiding officer is with a majority vote in presence of parliamentarian by secret vote. If top vote is tied, eliminate lower vote candidates and recall votes for those remaining. A Presiding officer presides for the entirety of a session. C. Precedence DOES NOT reset between preliminary sessions. D. Seating Charts DO reset between preliminary sessions. E. Setting the Docket: “Docket order will be established in-round by the students in each chamber at the start of the first session of the day. After the presiding officer selection, but before debate begins, there must be a “main motion to open the floor for docket nominations”, at which point any interested student may “motion to propose a docket”. Upon being recognized by the presiding officer, the motioner will verbally state their docket proposal, which will be written on the board by the presiding officer for all to see. A valid docket proposal must list each provided piece of legislation in the order they are to be debated in. The nomination process continues until all students who wish to submit a docket proposal have been recognized, at which point there must be a “main motion to close the floor for docket nominations”. There must be at least one proposed docket in order to close the floor for nominations and proceed with the round. If only one docket is proposed, that will be the set docket. a. If there are two or more proposed dockets, the presiding officer will conduct a public vote by show of hands, and the docket which receives a simple majority (50% plus one) of votes will be selected. If there are exactly two proposed dockets tied in votes, the presiding officer will break a tie. b. If there are three or more proposed dockets, an instant-runoff voting system will be used. If one docket receives a simple majority after the first round of voting, that will be the set docket. If there is no simple majority, the docket with the fewest votes will be eliminated and votes will be recast as many times as are necessary until there is a majority winner. If a vote produces no simple majority and multiple dockets tied for fewest votes, there will be a separate round of voting on only the tied dockets to decide which is eliminated. c. Once the docket is selected, there will be a “main motion to open the floor for debate” on the first piece of legislation in the established docket order, and debate may begin F. Preset priority is up to the individual tournament director, but will be used at state. G. When more than one speaker seeks the floor, presidency shall followed a. Presiding officers should establish clear, fair explanations in the recognition process and be consistent. (Jumping should NOT be used; instead use raising of placards, hands, etc.) H. Speakers may yield time to the floor during the debate for questions or clarifications, but the speaker will remain in control of their three minutes. I. Speeches are up to 3 minutes in length, but do not have to be the full time. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 159 SPEECH/DEBATE J. Author of legislation (or school of legislation) has authorship privilege in presentation of legislation regardless of precedence. If no individual rises to give an authorship speech for a bill, then it is reverted to current precedence. K. Direct questioning: The presiding officer will open the floor for questions following each speech. The presiding officer will recognize questioners for a cross-examination period of no more than 30 seconds. a Questioners will be chosen according to a separate questioning recency and precedence should be kept. L. PO’s should not call for motions. They should pause for those from the floor to call for motions. M. Amendments: must be presented to parliamentarians and PO in writing with specific references to lines and clauses that change. This must be done in advance of moving to amend. a. The parliamentarian will recommend whether the amendment is “germane”--that is, upholds the original intent of the legislation---otherwise it is discounted. b. A legislator may move to amend between floor speeches. The PO will read the proposed amendment and call for a second by one third vote. c. Should students wish to speak on the proposed amendment, the PO will recognize them per standing precedence and recency and count towards the total number of speeches given. d. Simply proposing an amendment DOES NOT guarantee authorship speech and the one minute questioning period that follows an amendment authorship speech. e. If there are no speakers on the amendment, the previous question is moved and the chamber may vote without debating it. N. Following the first two speeches on legislation, the presiding officer will alternately recognize affirmative and negative speakers, who will address the chamber for up to three minutes, followed by one minute of questioning by other delegates. If no one wishes to oppose the preceding speaker, the presiding officer may recognize a speaker upholding the same side. When no one seeks the floor for debate, the presiding officer may ask the chamber if they are “ready for the question,” at which point, if there is no objection, voting may commence on the legislation itself. O. All major voting shall be done with counted vote. Secret balloting is used when voting for presiding officer. P. Visual aids are permitted in Congressional Debate, provided they do not require electronic retrieval devices in the chamber. Q. All evidence used is subject to verification and subject to the rules of evidence. Any concern or complaint of rule violation must be brought to the judges/Parliamentarian within the round it occurs. If a concern or complaint needs to be discussed privately, a note may be given to the parliamentarian (or sent in the private chat if online) and at the next break the parliamentarian and contestant can address the issue. If it is serious and needs to be addressed immediately, then the individual can let the parliamentarian know and the parliamentarian can pause the time of the session to deal with it. THIS WILL NOT COUNT IN SESSION TIME AND WILL BE ADDED ON TO THE SESSION to ensure that the full speaking time is met. R. Congressional Debate entries must rise to a point of information after a speech to formally request a copy of the evidence cited, the citation, or the original source of evidence. a. When requested during the point of information, the presiding officer will instruct the debater being challenged to produce the copy of the evidence, citation, or original source. The debater being challenged must produce the requested materials in a timely fashion. Should a debater feel they are not receiving the information they requested in a timely fashion, they may rise to another point of information for the presiding officer and parliamentarian to address the situation. b. Debaters who request the information may receive the evidence from the presiding officer within a period of two speeches. The round would not be put on hold for the request to be completed. 2026-27 UHSAA HANDBOOK 160 SPEECH/DEBATE i. For example, if a debater rises to a point of order after speech #4, then by the conclusion of speech #6, the requested evidence should be presented to the presiding officer. ii. If after reviewing the evidence in question, a debater feels that an evidence violation has occurred, they may submit a formal allegation by completing an evidence challenge form and, after making a motion to approach the chair, the debater will present the form to the presiding officer and parliamentarian. S. The use of internet enabled electronic devices is permitted. Students may not use the internet to gain help from coaches, other students, or any person, such that it would prevent the speech from being the original work of the competitor. T. Electronic device use must comply with the “New Guidelines for Use of Internet-Enabled Devices in Debate Events.” U. These rules may NOT be suspended, and the PO should rule such motions out of order, except to extend questioning or allow for open chambers. V. Congress Tie Breaks shall be as follows for Preliminary Rounds: a. 1. Ranks 2. Judge Pref 3. Reciprocals 4. Ranks drop 1 High/1 Low 5. Parli Vote